Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Welcome to the Riverse Documentation Hub—your go-to resource for everything related to our carbon registry: standard rules, procedures, and methodologies. Whether you are a project developer, partner, or carbon credit buyer, this platform is designed to provide you with all relevant information you might look in a efficient navigation system.
Why this documentation?
At Riverse, we believe that consistency, transparency, and adherence to well-defined standards are the cornerstones of trustful and success Voluntary Carbon Markets.
Our documentation is providing detailed guidance, rules and structured approaches to all processes of our carbon standard and registry.
Our Riverse Standards Document section covers the essential rules and guidelines that govern our standard and registry across all methodologies and project types.
Each methodology gives specific requirements and quantification methods per project types.
1
Measurability
The GHG emission reductions are quantitatively, rigorously, and conservatively measured.
2
Real
The GHG emissions reductions have actually occurred, according to the monitoring plan. RCCs are ex-post.
3
Additionality
The mitigation activity would not have occurred without the revenues from carbon finance.
4
Permanence and risk of reversal
Carbon will be removed for at least 100 years (applicable for removal RCCs only).
5
No double counting
Mitigation activities are only counted once, and are not double used, issued or claimed.
6
Co-benefits
Projects must deliver additional positive impact towards environmental and social sustainability.
7
Substitution
The products/services generated as project outputs must appropriately, realistically, and efficiently substitute those of the baseline scenario, rather than create new demand.
8
Environmental & social do no harm
Projects must not contribute to environmental or social damage.
9
Leakage
The project’s avoided GHG emissions must not be indirectly transferred elsewhere via activity shifting.
10
TRL
The technology readiness level must be 6 or higher.
11
Targets alignment
Project’s emission reductions must be aligned with the European Union’s emission reduction targets for their sector.
12
Minimum impact
Projects must qualify for a minimum amount of RCCs.
GHG emission reduction measurements shall aim for completeness, accuracy, transparency, and conservativeness.
If no Riverse methodology exists for a given project, documented scientific research can be proposed to establish a measurement method. This method shall be evaluated and validated by the Riverse Climate team and the VVB.
Upstream and downstream actors in the supply chain are not counted as project sites.
purpose
relationship to the project
street address or, if not available, GPS coordinates
reference person
contact information
host country
Projects shall undergo an in-person or remote site audit within two years of the project’s crediting period start date and/or before the second verification audit. The purpose of this site audit is to confirm that:
The project exists and is functional
The scale of the project is in line with the description
Key processes operate as described in the project PDD
Projects that are in the planning phase and seeking carbon finance to fund investments shall prove that the project will actually occur, and will begin operations within 2 years of certification. Proof may include contracts with suppliers of key inputs or receipts from purchase of key machinery.
After beginning operations, the Project Developer shall comply with the requirement in 4.2.5.
Project developers must define the scope of the project, i.e. the mitigation activities that are under consideration for RCC issuance. The scope specifies the geographic, temporal (i.e. project start date), site, and operation limits of the project.
For example, a company operating in multiple countries, that has existed for many years, with several operating sites, and multiple activities must define the scope of their operations that is defined as the project. A company’s annual operations are not a sufficient definition of a project.
The project must have started operating within the last three years.
The crediting period shall start when the mitigation activities begin, provided the project is already registered with Riverse at that time. The crediting period shall be no longer than five years.
If the project is already underway, the crediting period may start up to 18 months prior to its registration date with Riverse.
📎 Supporting documents:
Site registration certificate
Site audit certificate and report
[conditional] If the project is under development, proof that it will actually occur
The Project Developer shall submit a Monitoring Plan during the validation step that defines the list of Key Impact Indicators (KII).
For each KII in the Monitoring Plan, the Project Developer shall specify the update frequency and auditable source.
For each verification and issuance of RCCs, the Project Developer shall upload each KII with proof to the Impact Certification Platform.
📎 Supporting documents:
During validation: Monitoring Plan defining the Key Impact Indicators (KIIs) with examples of proof, source of the proof and update frequency.
During verification: values of KIIs with proof, uploaded to the Riverse certification platform.
Regulatory surplus analysis: Mitigation activities must go beyond what is required by regulations.
Projects shall prove that:
there is no law, regulation, statute, legal ruling or other regulatory framework that makes the implementation of the project compulsory, and
if there is a regulation, their mitigation activities allow for more GHG emission reductions than what is required by regulations. In this case, only the project activities that surpass the mandated amount are eligible for RCCs.
📎 Supporting documents:
Description of the regulatory environment concerning the project’s mitigation activity.
Description of current and confirmed upcoming regulations or incentives that promote the project’s solution.
Investment analysis: Project Developers may use investment analysis to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the project investment a financially viable and interesting option.
Projects shall prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary for investments to launch or expand the project.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits.
📎 Supporting documents:
Annual updates of predicted financial indicators.
Barrier analysis: Barriers may exist that prevent the mitigation activity from continuing or expanding. These may be financial, institutional, or technological barriers. Project Developers must demonstrate how revenue from carbon finance is necessary to allow projects to overcome these barriers.
Examples of barriers include but are not limited to:
Financial: high upfront costs, uncertain or low returns on investment, long payback periods
Institutional: complex or costly regulatory requirements, limited access to financing, lack of supportive infrastructure, limited market demand, resistance from incumbents
Technological: cost competitiveness and economic viability, scale and manufacturing challenges
Project Developers shall identify, describe and where possible, quantify the barrier, with verifiable proof.
Project Developers shall demonstrate that revenue from carbon finance is decisive in overcoming this barrier, including justification that:
the magnitude of revenue from carbon finance is similar to the amount of funding needed to overcome the barrier, and
the project could not have provided the funding itself.
Project Developers shall demonstrate that at least one alternative to the project activity does not face significant barriers, including the barriers faced by the project.
Note that for overcoming barriers to expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits.
📎 Supporting documents:
Description and, where possible, quantification of the barrier. Demonstration that revenue from carbon finance is decisive in overcoming this barrier.
Projects eligible for removal RCCs are subject to the Permanence and risk of reversal criteria. Permanence and reversal risks are not evaluated for avoidance RCCs, because they are considered to have little to no material reversal risks.
By default, at least 3% of all verified removal RCCs shall be transferred to the buffer pool upon issuance.
Project Developers shall complete the Risk Assessment Template tailored to their specific project type, which is provided in the methodology documentation. This template guides Project Developers in evaluating the likelihood and severity of each risk type.
For each reversal risk type with a high or very high risk score, Project Developers shall develop a risk mitigation plan, or incur an additional 3% contribution of verified removal RCCs to the buffer pool.
If no methodology exists, the Project Developer shall suggest risks to consider in the PDD, which must be approved by the Riverse Certification team and the VVB. Documentation and proof must be provided to justify that the identification of risks was performed with a similar level of rigor, scientific accuracy, and conservativeness that is required for methodology development.
📎Supporting documents:
Project Developer’s responses to the Risk Assessment Template evaluating reversal risks.
[conditional] If a risk has a high or very high risk of reversal, a risk mitigation plan, or signed agreement to contribute an extra 3% of verified removal RCCs to the buffer pool.
Double use shall be prevented by the Riverse Registry, where each project is automatically assigned a unique identifier, with project ID, location, and Project Developer name and contact information. An immutable certificate is generated upon retirement.
Project Developers shall not use another program to issue carbon credits for the given mitigation activity, for the same year. Project Developers shall disclose any issuance of carbon credits for the same project prior to the crediting period, or with a different project scope.
Project Developers shall ensure that specified upstream and downstream actors in the supply chain have not and will not issue carbon credits for their role in the mitigation activity. Specific requirements on this topic may be made in methodologies.
Double claiming with NDCs shall be prevented by signed agreements with host countries and confirmation of corresponding adjustments. Such agreements will be made publicly available with the project documentation, and updated as needed.
Double claiming with national climate policies and emissions trading schemes shall be prevented by proof that the mitigation activity is outside the scope of such policies and schemes. If this is not the case, Project Developers must obtain proof of an accounting adjustment or cancellation in the emissions trading scheme.
For purposes of voluntary climate pledges and reporting (e.g. GHG protocol), Project Developers must inform upstream and downstream supply chain entities of claimed project/intervention/insetting emission reductions, report them to Riverse, document any transfer of emission reduction units, and seek guidance in cases of conflicting claims from reporting bodies like the GHG Protocol.
📎 Supporting documents:
Proof that carbon credits will not be issued by specified actors within the same value chain for the same mitigation activity (specific proof requirements depending on the methodology).
[conditional] Any other requirements specified in the methodology document.
[conditional] Letters of authorization from host country and proof of corresponding adjustments.
Projects shall support between two and four quantifiable and verifiable environmental or social co-benefits. These must be in addition to their climate benefits that are already accounted for in the issuance of RCCs.
Co-benefits must be positive environmental or social impacts that are substantial, and would not have occurred without the intervention of the project.
Other relevant UN SDG sub-objectives or sustainability indicators may be suggested by Project Developers, and accepted at the discretion of the Riverse Certification team and the VVB.
Co-benefits shall be quantified and proven using the project’s GHG quantification results, primary data collection from the project, an LCA of the project or similar technology, or other reputable scientific documents. The tool, method, approach, and/or equations used for assessing co-benefits shall be described in methodology documents and/or DPDs.
📎 Supporting documents:
Identification of two to four UN SGDs that the project contributes to substantially as co-benefits, with:
quantified indicators for each co-benefit
source/proof for each co-benefit
Projects shall prove that their project outputs have similar performance metrics to the baseline scenario and deliver equivalent functions.
Project Developers shall identify and quantify performance metrics to compare between the baseline and the project scenario. Specific metrics to consider are detailed in methodologies.
📎 Supporting documents:
Proof that the project output has sufficiently similar technical and performance specifications to substitute for the baseline scenario.
If the project already has a legal permit (for example, construction permit, operation approval from authorities) that required similar stakeholder consultation or environmental and social impact assessments, Project Developers shall provide any documents related to those processes, and may be deemed exempt from the Riverse stakeholder consultation by the VVB and the Riverse Certification team.
Certain methodologies may define strict rules and cutoffs that may disqualify projects based on their environmental and social risk assessment results.
The Riverse Certification team or VVB may require annual monitoring of an environmental or social risk if they determine that the risk could lead to the project causing net harm.
Risk assessments shall assess at least the following risks, which should be avoided and minimized:
Labor rights and working conditions
provide safe and healthy working conditions for employees
provide fair treatment of all employees, avoiding discrimination and ensuring equal opportunities
prohibit the use of forced labor, child labor, or trafficked persons, and protects contracted workers employed by third parties.
Resource efficiency and pollution prevention
minimize pollutant emissions to air
minimize pollutant discharges to water, noise and vibration
minimize generation of waste and release of hazardous materials, chemical pesticides and fertilizers
Land acquisition and involuntary resettlement
minimize forced physical and/or economic displacement
Biodiversity conservation and sustainable management of living natural resources
avoid and/or minimizes negative impacts on terrestrial and marine biodiversity and ecosystems
protect the habitats of rare, threatened, and endangered species, including areas needed for habitat connectivity
do not convert natural forests, grasslands, wetlands, or high conservation value habitats
minimize soil degradation and soil erosion
minimize water consumption and stress in the project
Indigenous Peoples (IPs), Local Communities (LCs), and cultural heritage
identify the rights-holders possibly affected by the mitigation activity (including customary rights of local rights holders);
when relevant, apply the FPIC process
do not force eviction or any physical or economic displacement of IPs & LCs, including through access restrictions to lands, territories, or resources, unless agreed upon with IPs & LCs during the FPIC process
preserve and protect cultural heritage consistent with IPs & LCs protocols/rules/plans on the management of cultural heritage or UNESCO Cultural Heritage conventions
Respect for human rights, stakeholder engagement
avoid discrimination and respect human rights
take into account and responds to local stakeholders’ views
Gender equality
provide for equal opportunities in the context of gender
protect against and appropriately responds to violence against women and girls
provide equal pay for equal work
📎 Supporting documents:
Results of the stakeholder consultation
[conditional] Legal permits, or results of previous stakeholder consultations or environmental and social impact studies
Project Developer’s responses to the Risk Assessment Template evaluating environmental and social risks
Project Developers shall follow the relevant methodology requirements for identifying, assessing and mitigating leakage. Potential risks and detailed instructions are identified at the methodology level.
Methodologies provide instructions on how to assess leakage and manage and, if necessary, deduct leakage emissions. Any project-specific leakage risk may incur additional leakage emission deduction, up to the discretion of the Project Developer, the VVB and the Riverse Certification team.
📎 Supporting documents:
Project Developer’s responses to the leakage risks identified in the methodology.
1
Basic principles observed
2
Technology concept formulated
3
Experimental proof of concept
4
Technology validated in lab
5
Technology validated in relevant environment
6
Technology demonstrated in relevant environment
7
System model or prototype demonstration in operational environment
8
System complete and qualified
9
Actual system proven in operational environment
Projects shall at minimum reach TRL 6, which is described in the table above.
📎 Supporting documents:
Proof of technological progress and/or production capacities either in an operational environment or lab.
Transport & mobility
17%
Construction & housing
73%
Agriculture
58%
Industry & waste
47%
Energy
45%
📎 Supporting documents:
GHG quantification results showing that the project’s GHG reduction efficiency is aligned with the sector target emission reductions.
To renew certification at the end of the crediting period, projects may re-conduct a complete validation process using the current Riverse Standard Rules and methodology requirements.
For renewed projects, the crediting period shall be the total length of the combined crediting periods.
📎 Supporting documents:
It should be used together with the latest versions of the , , , and all other documentation found on this site.
Download any page as a PDF by clicking the Export as PDF button to the right
All projects must meet the 12 general eligibility criteria described below. Detailed instructions and examples are presented in .
Project Developers shall follow the approach outlined in the section, based on , to measure GHG emissions reduction, avoidance and/or removal.
Project Developers shall specify the Riverse they follow to measure GHG emission reductions.
Supporting documents:
GHG emission reduction measurements that meet the requirements and follow a Riverse-approved sector-specific methodology (if available)
All sites where the project operates shall be registered during the certification process. This includes all factories, facilities, or operations under direct control of the Project Developer, whose activities are involved in RCCs verification and issuance. Sites registration procedures are detailed in Section 4.3 of the .
shall include the site’s:
Only activities that are shall be considered in the project scope.
The project scope should not be confused with the , which is used for GHG reduction quantification. The system boundary defines the project scope plus upstream and downstream activities that count towards the project’s GHG emissions and removals.
KIIs are parameters that are important in the GHG reduction quantification calculations, are important in determining project eligibility, are subject to change, and are measurable using project data. More details on KIIs are available in the .
KIIs shall meet the minimum requirements for Monitoring Plans detailed in the Methodology, if applicable, and meet KII requirements described in the .
Project Developers shall fill in the to demonstrate their additionality. In the template, they must provide project-specific justifications and verifiable evidence.
Note that Riverse Carbon Credits are only issued for GHG reductions that are additional to business as usual. This is described more in the requirements for setting a
Investment analysis, business plan, or completed of the UNFCCC Clean Development Mechanism “Investment Analysis”, with accompanying spreadsheet and calculations, showing that funding from carbon finance is necessary for the project investment.
Permanent carbon removals mean that carbon removal is ensured for the committed-upon duration (at least 100 years for ). This duration is the commitment period, and represents the number of years for which the Project Developer can prove that carbon will likely remain sequestered. The minimum commitment period duration for RCCs is 100 years.
Contribution to the buffer pool: projects eligible for removal RCCs must contribute a default 3% of their verified removal RCCs to the buffer pool. This covers a minimum inherent reversal risk of all removal RCCs. More details on the buffer pool are available in the .
Risk assessment: projects eligible for removal RCCs must evaluate the risk of reversal during the validation step using the Reversal Risk Evaluation section of . Details on how to fill in the template, and how to use the results, are in the section below.
The consequences of a carbon removal reversal are outlined in the Cancelation section of the .
The Reversal Risk Evaluation section covers carbon reversal risks, and responds to the criteria. This is evaluated to ensure that carbon removal is long-term, and to provide transparency. Reversal risks may include social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
The Environmental and Social Evaluation section covers risk of environmental and social damages, and responds to the criteria, described below. This is evaluated to transparently identify environmental and social damages, and if necessary, to put in place safeguards against high-risk damages.
For reversal risks, mitigation plans aim to manage the identified risks of carbon reversal, to ensure that carbon is removed from the atmosphere for at least the commitment period duration, which is at least 100 years. A reversal risk mitigation plan shall cover at least 40 years. In case reversal risks are realized, and more than 1 tonne of CO2eq is estimated to have been re-emitted, compensation measures shall follow the procedures outlined in the Cancelation section of the .
Double use of credits within the Riverse Registry: RCCs are traced with a unique identification number from issuance to retirement (see more in at Chapter 9 RCC Management). An immutable certificate is generated upon retirement.
Riverse’s provides full explanations and requirements regarding this eligibility criteria. Key points are summarized here.
Double issuance is prevented by the signing of the , where all Project Developers agree to follow the requirements outlined in the present document.
Double claiming with other GHG-related environmental credit frameworks is not allowed. This is prevented by the signing of the , where all Project Developers agree to follow the requirements outlined in the present document.
Signed agreeing to follow the requirements outlined in the present document, including those related to double counting.
Project Developers shall use the SDGs outlined in the as the basis for identifying co-benefits, which are deemed most relevant to Riverse’s program focus.
The GHG quantification method shall use an appropriate functional unit that reflects the equivalent functions delivered by the project and baseline scenarios (see more details in the ).
Stakeholder consultation: Project Developers must conduct a comprehensive and documented stakeholder consultation to provide insights into unintended outcomes and foster collaboration. Stakeholder feedback is collected online through the Riverse Registry for one month during the validation phase. The methods to conduct this consultation is detailed in the .
Risk assessment: Project Developers must evaluate the risk of environmental and social damage during the validation step using the Environmental and Social Damage evaluation section of Risk Assessment Templates. Details on how to fill in the template, and how to use the results, are in the section.
Project Developers shall conduct a stakeholder consultation gathering feedback on the environmental and social impacts of their project, among other feedback. The stakeholder consultation shall take place during the project's validation process, addressed to local stakeholders and communities. The feedback is reviewed by the Riverse Certification team during the final project validation review, and they may require the Project Developer to take corrective action to address the concerns. The feedback shall be made publicly available in an appendix of the PDD. More details are included in the .
Project Developers shall fill in the methodology’s Template for their project type, evaluating the likelihood and severity of each environmental and social risk.
If no methodology exists for the given project type, the requirement outlined at the end of the shall apply.
recognize, respect and promote the protection of the rights of IPs & LCs in line with applicable international human rights law, and the and ILO Convention 169 on Indigenous and Tribal Peoples
abide by the and universal instruments ratified by the host country
If no methodology exists for the given project type, the requirement outlined at the end of the shall apply.
The reduction efficiency of the project is calculated as following:
Projects’ reduction efficiency shall be higher than the targeted emission reduction targets for the project’s sector, presented in the :
The project must justify a minimum emission reduction of 1000 tCOeq over the crediting period of the project.
Projects shall justify a minimum emission reduction of 1000 tCOeq over the crediting period of the project.
GHG quantification results showing that the project’s GHG emission reductions over the crediting period are projected to be at least 1000 tCOeq.
Sets the general requirement for Project Developers for registering and operating Riverse projects and issuing Riverse Carbon Credits (RCC).
Describes the rules and procedures for documentation management, methodology development and updates, registering and operating carbon projects.
Outline the requirements set by the Riverse Standard to ensure that carbon credits are unique, following the No Double Counting criteria in the Riverse Standard Rules
Riverse is a simplified joint-stock company ("société par actions simplifiée") with its headquarters situated at 28 Avenue des Pépinières, 94260 Fresnes, France, and is registered in the Créteil Companies and Trade Register with the number 908 082 332.
As a mission-driven entity ("Société à Mission"), Riverse has a defined purpose pursuant to Article 1835 of the French Civil Code.
The company's mission is to create significant and positive environmental or social impact through its commercial and operational activities, and to conduct its business with exemplary professionalism in the pursuit of the collective interest. In alignment with its mission, the company is dedicated to:
Advancing solutions that contribute a net environmental or social benefit to both the community and the planet;
Engaging with partners and customers who share the company's values and objectives;
Delivering significant value and impact through its partnerships and client interactions;
Ensuring the dignity of individuals and promoting a healthy work-life balance for its employees.
Building upon its core mission, the simplified joint-stock company Riverse operates two entities:
The Riverse Standard: A European crediting program within the voluntary carbon market, tailored for industrial projects that demonstrate the potential for significant reductions or sequestration of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. The Riverse Standard prescribes exacting certification criteria, rooted in stringent scientific methodology and designed to align with the principal frameworks dedicated to fostering transparency and integrity in the voluntary carbon market.
The Riverse Tech Infrastructure: Serving as the operational backbone for the Riverse Standard, this infrastructure comprises two principal components:
The Riverse Registry: Ensuring traceability and transparency, it maintains detailed records of Riverse Carbon Credits from issuance to retirement, thereby preventing double counting and adhering to the protocols recommended by carbon market integrity organizations.
The Impact Certification Platform: This platform streamlines the RCCs certification (validation and verification) process for Project Developers by offering tools for environmental impact assessment, documentation assembly, and simplifying validation and verification procedures. With features designed for third-party Validation and Verification Bodies (VVB), it promotes a transparent and efficient pathway for project auditing and RCC management.
Both entities are managed by the Riverse Executive Team and supported by the internal teams within Riverse.
Overview of the Riverse Organization:
The Riverse Standard's governance architecture is designed to ensure scientific rigor, independence and efficiency.
It is spearheaded by two principal independent entities: the Standard Advisory Board and the Technical Advisory Committee.
Standard Advisory Board (SAB)
Ensures Riverse’s activity is continuously in line with its foundational mission. Provides strategic direction, endorses or vetoes amendments to the standard rules and methodologies, and recommends enhancements.
Technical Advisory Committee (TAC)
Composed of independent experts, provides technical expertise and reviews on specific methodological aspects or project certification.
In addition to these independent governance entities, four specialized Riverse teams are dedicated to the standard's operational execution:
Executive Team
Manages the organization's day-to-day operations
Secretariat
Compiles and synthesizes feedback and updates on standard documents, and conveys these to the Standard Advisory Board for deliberation and approval.
Certification team
Primary point of contact for Project Developers navigating the standard processes, provides technical assistance, process guidance, feedback, and performs the final validation review.
Climate team
Oversees the scientific approach and choices behind Riverse Standard Rules and methodologies. As GHG quantification and climate solution experts, they assist the Certification team in case of technical inquiries.
All Riverse ecosystem stakeholders are contractually linked with Riverse. The following stakeholders are publicly disclosed:
The following is the minimum list of stakeholders who must sign the policy:
Members of the Executive board
Members of the Secretariat, Standard Advisory Board
Members of the Climate, Certification, R&D and Partnerships teams
Members the Technical Advisory Board
VVBs
Project information, including documentation, detailed calculations, audit/verification/monitoring statements, as well as reports and legal representations
Transparent issuance tracking, transfer and retirement/cancellation of units
Individually identified units through unique serial numbers containing sufficient information to avoid double counting (type, geography, vintage)
Unit status (issued, verified, retired, canceled), with full traceability of the chain of custody
6.3 Improve water quality by reducing pollution, eliminating dumping and minimizing release of hazardous chemicals and materials
6.4 Increase water-use efficiency
6.5 Protect and restore water-related ecosystems
7.2 Increase substantially the share of renewable energy in the global energy mix
7.3 Double the global rate of improvement in energy efficiency
7.4 Facilitate access to clean energy research and technology
8.2 Achieve higher levels of economic productivity through diversification, technological upgrading and innovation
8.3 Support decent job creation and innovation, and encourage micro-, small- and medium-sized enterprises
8.4 Improve global resource efficiency in consumption and production
8.5 Achieve full and productive employment and decent work for all women and men, including for young people and persons with disabilities
9.4 Upgrade infrastructure and retrofit industries to make them sustainable, with increased resource-use efficiency and greater adoption of clean and environmentally sound technologies and industrial processes
11.6 Reduce the adverse per capita environmental impact of cities, including air quality and municipal and other waste management
11.a Support positive economic, social and environmental links between urban, peri-urban and rural areas
12.2 Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
12.4 Achieve the environmentally sound management of chemicals and all wastes throughout their life cycle
12.5 Reduce waste generation through prevention, reduction, recycling and reuse
13.2: Integrate climate change measures into national policies, strategies and planning (note that only GHG reduction measures beyond what is considered for carbon credit issuance may be considered as a co-benefit)
14.1 Prevent and significantly reduce marine pollution of all kinds, in particular from land-based activities, including marine debris and nutrient pollution
14.3 Minimize and address the impacts of ocean acidification
15.1 Ensure the conservation, restoration and sustainable use of terrestrial and inland freshwater ecosystems and their services
15.5 Reduce the degradation of natural habitats, halt the loss of biodiversity and, by 2020, protect and prevent the extinction of threatened species
GHG emissions and reductions shall be calculated using the following IPCC Global Warming Potential (GWP) values for a 100 year horizon according to . The GWPs for the main greenhouse gasses are summarized below, and the full list of GWPs can be found in the , Table 7.SM.7.
1
29.8
27
273
HFC-32
771
HFC-134a
1526
CFC-11
6226
PFC-14
7380
The following security measures are the minimum requirements for the Riverse Registry, and ensure confidentiality, integrity, and data availability:
Data transfers shall always use industry-standard encryption technology (SSL/TLS/HTTPS).
Application authentication shall be enabled and verified by a third-party provider that meets industry best practice, is internationally recognized, and is ISO27001 certified.
Backend service and database hosting shall be enabled by a third-party provider that enables encryption.
Administrative tools shall be provided 2FA for admin authentication and sign-in.
The Riverse Secretariat shall verify at least twice per calendar year that the IT security requirements are met, and summarize the findings in a report made publicly available on the Riverse website. The following elements shall be verified:
Verify compliance with the above requirements
Verify security vulnerability status and upgrade all JavaScript dependencies with npm.
Review Authentication provider access
Review Cloud provider IAM accounts and access
Rotate database passwords, API keys (internal and external)
Review Database connection allowlist
Review repository history for leaked secrets
Verify application authorization rules
Some projects have particularly high environmental impacts in their first year(s) of operation. This can be caused by inefficiency in early stages of operations while ramping up their processes. For example, at the beginning of a project, there may be very high consumption of inputs for a rather low production of outputs. This does not include emissions of construction and infrastructure, which are amortized over many years.
In some cases, this ramp-up effect may lead the project to emit more GHGs than the baseline scenario in the first year of the crediting period. In this case, the project’s validation and verification of the first two years will be bundled. This way, the project’s net induced emissions from the first year are subtracted from the avoided emissions of the second year.
If the project is still a net emitter and does not avoid any emissions at the end of the second year of the crediting period, the project will be dropped from the Riverse certification process.
When RCCs are bundled for the first two years of a crediting period, the vintage is the second year.
Note that this ramp-up effect only relates to high volume or frequent use of consumables in the first year, not to fixed inputs such as machinery and buildings. This is because according to the LCA approach, the emissions of these long-lived inputs are distributed annually over their usable lifespan. Fixed inputs refer to products where the lifespan is more than 1 year, and includes objects such as machinery, tanks, pipelines, building materials, and concrete slabs. Consumables refer to inputs that are taken up by the process and consumed in order to create the product. Their use is usually recurring and ongoing, and include inputs such as electricity, water, fuel for transportation, feedstock inputs (for biogas), and replacement screens (for electronics reconditioning).
There are two types of avoided emissions: those that lead to an absolute decrease in emissions, and those that lead to a smaller increase in emissions.
Absolute decrease: there is a real absolute decrease in emissions compared to the baseline scenario.
Smaller increase: there is a relative decrease in emissions compared to the baseline scenario, but still an absolute increase in emissions. This may happen when a project intervenes in a sector with growing demand, where overall production increases, so emissions increase over time.
All Riverse Carbon Credits are issued ex post, after the verification process.
Removal RCCs are issued on Riverse’s registry under the mechanism label “removal”. They represent one tonne of carbon dioxide equivalent captured and stored: 1 removal RCC = 1 .
Avoidance RCCs are calculated by comparing GHG emissions of the project to the ones of a reference or baseline scenario that would have occurred without the project.
Avoidance RCCs are classified on Riverse’s registry under the mechanism label “avoidance”. They represent one avoided tonne of carbon dioxide equivalent: 1 avoidance RCC = 1 .
Credit pools are defined as a group of Riverse Carbon Credits from the same project, mechanism and vintage year. Each transaction in the Riverse Registry may cover credits from one credit pool. For example, separate transactions are required to retire credits from two different credit pools.
A project is uniquely described on the registry by:
Project registry ID
Project name
Name of the Project Developer
Location
Host country
Type of mechanism (avoidance and/or removal)
Crediting period
Validation body
Other labels where relevant (e.g. CORSIA, Article 6, CCP…)
Each RCC is uniquely described on the registry by:
unique identifier
Project registry ID
Vintage year (year of verified activity in verification)
Type of mechanism (avoidance or removal)
Methodology ID
Riverse Standard Rules version number
Host country (inherited from Project)
Other labels where relevant (e.g. CORSIA, Article 6, CCP…)
Riverse Carbon Credits and provisional credits can have different statuses on the Riverse Registry:
Provisional
Provisional credits are estimated credits from projects that are validated but not yet verified. They give visibility on the volume of expected credits, which enables pre-purchase agreements. They may result from:
Validated projects that are still in the planning phase, and have completed a validation audit, and ex-ante estimates of avoided/removed emissions.
Verified
Canceled
Riverse Carbon Credits can be “canceled” if the verification audit demonstrates that the previous ex-post credits were not legitimate, or if a reversal event is reported (for removal RCCs).
Retired
Riverse Carbon Credits are “retired” when a buyer claims them, they can’t be transacted anymore and are considered permanently used. They still appear on the Riverse Registry for traceability, with the label “retired”.
Verified RCCs may have labels, which are supplementary information and do not change the inherent status of a verified avoidance or removal RCC. Labels may cover, for example:
Permanence horizons: e.g. 100 or 1000 year permanence for removal RCCs
Compliance with trading schemes: e.g. CORSIA eligible, Article 6 eligible
Accredited: e.g. ICROA accredited, ICVCM accredited
Provisional credits are estimated upon project validation for the projected volume of emission avoidance/removal over the project’s crediting period. They are conservatively calculated.
Pre-purchase agreements are signed agreements between the PD and a buyer with defined volumes and prices of Riverse Carbon Credits. These can be made once provisional credits have been estimated and the project has been validated.
Provisional credits are only used to track pre-purchase agreements for buyers. Their property rights can not be transferred to the buyer until the mitigation activity occurs and they are verified (hence become RCCs).
The general GHG reduction quantification approach and components are outlined below. Detailed instructions and requirements can be found in Riverse methodologies.
Riverse Carbon Credits shall be calculated by subtracting the GHG emissions and removals of the project scenario from the emissions and removals of a baseline scenario, or reference scenario, that would have occurred without the implementation of the project.
Functional units shall include characteristics such as:
Type of product/service
Amount
Functional units may include characteristics such as:
Performance specifications
Geographic location
Duration
The system boundary shall cover the project scope, and include:
all processes under direct control of the project and
the key upstream and downstream processes.
Processes may include raw material extraction, delivery of supplies, processing, manufacturing, distribution, use, retail, distribution, and waste treatment.
Processes with the lowest contributions to impacts, which each account for less than 1% of total impacts, may be excluded from the GHG quantification. These processes shall be transparently identified and justified.
Due to the comparative measurement approach, processes that are identical in the project and baseline scenario may be excluded, since they will not affect the comparative results.
The by the World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WBCSD) shall be followed to select the baseline scenario (see figure below).
According to the from the WBCSD, average market solutions shall be assumed by default for the baseline scenario. Only when a project solution is known to substitute one specific technology (e.g. the best available technology, or a product from one specific manufacturer), may the specific technology be used as a baseline.
Conservative assumptions, values, and processes shall be chosen when selecting a baseline scenario, to avoid overestimation of GHG emission reductions. Average market solutions shall be determined based on practices in the country/region of the project, and statistically relevant historical information.
If the project activity is multifunctional, the baseline scenario shall cover all functions of the project.
When the average market solution is represented by a market mix of solutions, the market mix shall include the portion of the project solution that is already used in the market.
The duration of validity of the baseline scenario selection shall be defined in methodologies.
Project GHG emissions and removals shall be quantified using primary data from project operations for operating projects, or estimated data for planned projects. The estimated data shall be used for project validation, and shall be replaced with actual data once the project begins operations for the verification of emission reductions.
All measurements from the project must be verifiable and based on recent conditions (no more than 1 year old). These measurements include quantities (volume, mass, number) and type of products and inputs.
All background data (for example, emission factors, rates of recycling, composition of national electricity grid) shall be derived from traceable, transparent, unbiased, and reputable sources.
All assumptions and estimates shall be conservative, transparently presented and justified.
For geographic accuracy and consistency across projects, national-level background data should be prioritized. Local (region, state, city-scale) or global sources may be used if justified.
Qualitative estimates of uncertainty shall be justified ranging from none, low, medium, to high. A choice of “None” is only applicable for measurements of primary data that have strong, immutable sources of proof.
Project Developers shall assess uncertainty for the following areas at the project-level:
assumptions
selection of the specific baseline scenario
measurements
estimates or secondary data used for the project assessment
Methodologies shall include assessments of uncertainty for the following areas at the methodology-level:
assumptions
baseline scenario selection guidance
equations and models
estimates or secondary data used for all projects under the given methodology
All practical steps must be taken to achieve a low level of uncertainty for each area.
Areas that have high levels of uncertainty shall use the most conservative reasonable option, to avoid overestimation of GHG emission reductions.
Based on the uncertainty levels estimated for the above individual areas, Project Developers shall justify an overall uncertainty estimate of low, medium or high for the project’s GHG emission reductions.
The uncertainty estimate shall account for the sensitivity of the total GHG emission reductions to each assessed area. This way, for example, an area might have high uncertainty, but if that area has a small effect on the total GHG emission reduction calculations, then the level of uncertainty is acceptable and can be considered lower.
The overall uncertainty estimate shall be translated into the discount factor, representing the percent of credits that will not be issued, using the following:
Low uncertainty: 3%
Medium uncertainty: 6%
High uncertainty: 9% or higher
The Riverse Standard Documentation is the set of documents that describes requirements and procedures for all projects and methodologies under the Riverse Standard.
The revision of the Procedures Manual follows the same process.
Major revisions are tracked through the first number after the standard document name (e.g. Riverse Standard Rules V1). Major revisions include three phases: submission, review, and approval.
Open feedback: All the latest versions of the Riverse Standard Rules and methodologies documentation are published on Riverse’s website. This allows any interested party to be able to comment on every document at any time—not only during dedicated public consultations.
To ensure the relevance and rigor of the Riverse Standard Documentation, the Climate team and the Secretariat actively monitor all references, and propose changes from referenced standards and tools (IPCC, ISO…).
Compilation of feedback: The Secretariat compiles feedback into a document called the 'Standard Revision Request'.
Formulation of Revision Proposal: After analyzing each feedback, the Secretariat drafts a 'Revision Proposal'. This proposal outlines the changes deemed necessary to the Riverse Standard Documentation based on the feedback received.
Submission to SAB and deliberation: the Revision Proposal is presented to the SAB for their critical evaluation. If the Revision Proposal is validated, the SAB decides whether the proposed revision is of a nature that demands public input.
Integration of Public Feedback: the Secretariat integrates feedback from the public consultation into the existing 'Revision Proposal'. The outcome of this integration is a 'Final Standard Revision Proposition'.
SAB Review and Approval: The 'Final Standard Revision Proposition' is then presented to the SAB for their final approval. The SAB ensures that feedback from the public consultation phase has been genuinely and appropriately integrated.
After the revision procedure is completed, each contributor receives an update on how their remark has been treated.
Project compliance: Projects that are already validated must become compliant with revised rules upon their next verification. They do not need to undergo a new validation process. The VVB shall check for gaps and compliance during the verification audit. If projects are incompatible with revised rules, no new RCCs will be issued for that project, but their verified RCCs will remain valid on the Riverse registry.
Correct typographical or formatting errors that do not affect the meaning or application of the standard.
Update references to external documents, tools, or standards without changing the core methodology.
Adjust procedural steps or timelines to improve clarity or efficiency without altering the overall process.
Add or update examples or case studies to aid understanding, without introducing new requirements.
Simplify or streamline documentation language to improve accessibility, without affecting the technical content.
Formalize processes that are already implemented in practice.
Procedure and document development:
Internal process setting: All Riverse Standard Documentation is initially drafted internally by the Climate team.
Basis of standards: procedures are tailored to Riverse’s operations, but should draw inspiration and guidance from established standards such as ISO 9001 and ISO 31000, ensuring global compliance and recognition.
Instead of a Revision Proposal as described in the previous section, a creation proposal is submitted to the Standard Advisory Board for validation.
A public consultation is conducted for the creation of any new Riverse Standard Documentation.
The Methodology Creation Proposal is reviewed first by the Riverse Climate team, and if approved then it is reviewed by the SAB for final approval.
The reviews consider factors such as:
Maturity of the technology
Number of existing projects
Scientific consensus of substantial carbon reduction potential
Feasibility of carbon reduction measurement
Degree of circularity
If the proposal is rejected by the SAB, it then decides whether to earmark it for reworking or, based on the gravity of the concerns, abandon it altogether.
Members of the technical working group shall be selected based on
expertise related to e.g. the scientific foundations, sustainability issues, LCA/GHG quantification, policy, or operations of the methodology's subject.
representation from diverse stakeholders from e.g. researchers/academics, project developers, independent experts, or NGOs.
To research and develop the methodology, the Climate team will gather the working group and consult the TAC members on a regular basis. The first step of methodology development shall always be a literature review. Following steps depend on the needs of each methodology.
The minimum requirements for a Riverse methodology include the following:
Eligible technologies and activities
Scope/delineation of a project (e.g. how many sites can be included in one project?)
Minimum requirements for a monitoring plan
Justification of the baseline scenario (pre-defined or guidance for baseline scenario selection), and frequency of updating the baseline scenario
Glossary with definitions of technical terms
Methodology-specific instructions for:
no double counting
co-benefits
substitution (for avoidance RCCs)
permanence (for removal RCCs)
ESDNH risks
leakage
targets alignment
Risk assessment template
Methodology-specific instructions for:
assumptions
data sources
description of processes to include in the project and baseline scenario
all equations needed to calculate avoided and/or removed emissions
uncertainty assessment
Once a first version of the methodology has been drafted, the Secretariat organizes a 30-day public consultation by publishing a Call for Consultation. The Secretariat and Climate team integrates feedback into a new Final Methodology Creation Proposition.
The Final Methodology Creation Proposal is then validated by the SAB, which ensures that the feedback from the TAC, experts, and the public consultation was integrated.
Methodologies are adaptable to ensure their relevance and robustness. To streamline updates and maintain transparency, the Climate team implements:
At a minimum, methodologies shall be reviewed and undergo public consultation every 3 years.
A methodology may be discontinued if:
shifts in scientific consensus indicate it no longer aligns with best practices
it fails to achieve measurable carbon reductions
it is no longer additional
it overestimates credits and cannot be revised to ensure conservativeness
Methodologies are evaluated against these criteria at least once every three years during the mandatory major revision process, though they can also be reviewed and discontinued at any time if necessary.
Projects already validated under a discontinued methodology may continue using it until their next verification. After that, they must transition to a new methodology or become ineligible for new RCCs. Previously issued RCCs remain valid and tradable.
Decision by the SAB: Public consultations are mandatory for all major revisions of the Riverse Standard Documents and methodologies. For other revisions, the Standard Advisory Board (SAB) decides, based on their judgment and complexity of the topic at hand, whether to launch a public consultation.
Publishing the Call for Consultation: the Secretariat initiates the public consultation with the publication of a Call for Consultation. This call is widely broadcasted through relevant channels to ensure maximum outreach, inviting Project Developers, carbon credit resellers / brokers / marketplaces, Net Zero engaged corporates, Validation and Verification bodies, greentech experts, climate and environmental scientists and the general public to provide their insights and feedback on the topic. The minimum duration of the consultation is 30 days.
For all new methodologies, the Secretariat should organize a webinar to explain the rationale of the methodology and an overview of its requirements.
Integration into Final Proposition: the Secretariat then integrates this feedback into the existing proposal. This revised document, now termed the Final Standard Revision Proposition, harmonizes both the initial proposal and the feedback from the public consultation.
By accepting the audit assignment, the accredited VVB agrees to:
declare whether impartiality and independence are compromised (this may be the case if the auditor is already in a relationship with the Project Developer)
comply with and sign a copy of Requirements for VVB
allow Riverse to disclose the results of the audit, the name of the firm, and the names of the people involved in the audit
respect confidentiality clauses with Project Developers (on processes, materials, quantities)
Remote audits (those that do not include a physical site visit by an auditor) can optimize audit efficiency while maintaining the integrity of the audit process. The objective of a remote audit is to establish confidence in the VVB certification process by direct observations carried out through an electronic medium:
Videographic evidence is required for remote audits. The video should allow the VVB to confirm that each component is true, and will typically consist of a tour of the site with commentary.
Formats may include video calls with the auditors or pre-recorded videos.
The use of remote assessments by VVB of a given project may be requested in site validation assessment. Additional remote audits for verification are at the discretion of the VVB, who is entitled to reject any request from PDs.
If the remote audit does not allow the VVB to to audit all elements deemed necessary, the remaining issues should be recorded and documented.
To maintain impartiality and credibility, and reduce complacency and bias, a single VVB may conduct a maximum of three (3) sequential verifications for a specific project.
Upon reaching the sequential verification limit with a VVB, the PD shall be granted a transition period of six (6) months to engage a new VVB for the subsequent verification.
PDs must maintain comprehensive records of all verifications, including the VVBs involved, to demonstrate compliance with this rule.
Regular audits will be conducted to ensure PDs adhere to this rule. Non-compliance may result in penalties or suspension of the project's validation status.
The following metrics will be employed to evaluate a VVB's performance:
Timeliness: Adherence to stipulated timelines for project verification.
Accuracy: Correctness of verification processes, calculations, and conclusions.
Consistency: Uniform application of standards and methodologies across different projects.
Communication: Effectiveness and clarity in communication with PDs and other stakeholders.
Integrity: Adherence to ethical guidelines, including conflict of interest declarations
Each VVB is required to submit an annual Performance Report that details its activities, challenges, and areas of improvement relating to its work with the Riverse validation and verification process. This report should provide insights into the VVB's verification approach, methodologies employed, and training undertaken.
Project Developers are asked to provide feedback on the VVB's performance after each validation and verification process, as part of the Riverse satisfaction survey. This feedback is considered in the VVB performance review.
The Standard Secretariat annually reviews the annual Performance Reports and assess VVBs based on the established performance metrics. VVBs are encouraged to continually enhance their skills, methodologies, and processes. Training resources, workshops, and seminars specific to the Riverse Standard will be provided to support this endeavor.
All parties involved must sign the policy. The following is the minimum list of stakeholders who must be included:
Members of the Executive board
Members of the Secretariat, Standard Advisory Board
Members of the Climate, Certification, R&D and Partnerships teams
Members the Technical Advisory Board
VVBs
Contractors to the Riverse Standard involved in at least one of the procedures
Procedures to identify and mitigate conflicts of interest are detailed in the policy document.
The Standard Advisory Board (SAB) is independent from Riverse SAS. It is responsible for reviewing suggested changes to the Riverse Standard Rules, Procedures Manual, and the Riverse Registry procedures.
The SAB shall:
Ensure Riverse’s activity is in line with its foundational mission, delineated in its statutes
Accept or reject changes to the Riverse Standard Rules, Procedure Manual, and Riverse Registry Procedures, specifying written reasons for the decisions
Provide strategic guidance for the Standard and make recommendations to align Riverse processes and rules with relevant regulations and integrity frameworks.
The SAB shall be appointed following the process bellow:
The inaugural SAB was selected by the Riverse Executive Team, following interviews with candidates who were distinguished by their expertise in areas relevant to the board's focus.
New SAB members are nominated by the Riverse Executive Team and confirmed through a decision made by the current SAB members.
The Chair of the SAB is elected by its members from among themselves by a simple majority vote for a one-year term
The mandate for SAB members is tacitly renewed every year
Only SAB members and the Chair have the right to vote on decision items during SAB meetings. When the Chair calls for a vote on any issue, decisions will be made by a simple majority. In the event of a tie, the Chair will cast the deciding vote to determine the outcome.
The Riverse Technical Advisory Committee (TAC) is an external entity from the Riverse organization. Its mission is to bring in-depth expertise on each sector covered by Riverse.
The Riverse Executive and Climate teams will establish the TAC’s missions as necessary. Typical missions may include the following:
Review a specific project application and deliver a Technical Analysis report
Review a new methodology, or its revision
Review a specific methodological aspect on their domain of expertise
Conduct solutions-based scientific research on their domain of expertise
Members of the TAC should be knowledgeable in at least one specialized area relating to the Riverse Standard focus (such as, but not limited to, refurbishment and recycling processes, bioenergy, biobased construction materials, biomass carbon removal and storage, or carbon markets).
TAC members should prove the following skills:
Expertise in an area covered by the Riverse Standard Rules, existing methodologies, or a sector considered for future methodology development
Deep understanding of environmental topics
The TAC serves as an expert consultative committee for the Riverse Standard, without decision-making authority. Should a technical issue arise necessitating a decision, the SAB may seek a recommendation from a TAC member. However, the final decision will be made by the SAB.
The Riverse Executive Team is tasked with operational and strategic functions within the organization. Their key responsibilities include:
Overseeing daily operations to ensure efficiency and alignment with organizational goals
Determining the long-term strategy and direction
Making essential decisions for Riverse.
Reporting to and integrating advice from the SAB into the company's operations and strategy
The Executive Team of Riverse is appointed by a collective decision of the Riverse SAS partners, in accordance with the constitutive statutes of Riverse.
Decisions for which the executive team is responsible are made by a simple majority vote within the executive team.
The Secretariat of Riverse holds a fundamental administrative and coordinating role within the organization's structure.
The Secretariat’s main responsibilities are outlined as follows:
Collecting and synthesizing feedback on the Riverse Standard Rules and methodologies, preparing them for review and validation by the governing bodies.
Serving as a communicative bridge, it conveys information between the Executive Team, the Certification and Climate Teams, and the SAB
Organizing and documenting public consultations.
The Climate team is responsible for the climate science and integrity of the Riverse Standard Rules.
The Climate team’s main tasks are the following:
Regularly revise and improve the Riverse Standard Rules
Monitor relevant references and scientific progress to integrate into the Riverse methods
Develop new methodologies, and regularly revise and improve existing ones
Coordinate with the TAC for methodologies creation and revision
Certification team and VVB trainings
The Certification team’s main tasks are the following:
Improve the validation process to make it as rigorous, transparent and practical as possible
Review Project Applications
Accompany Project Developers in the certification process of their project
Coordinate with VVBs for outputs of validation/verification audits
Run VVB performance oversight
Manage the Riverse Registry: register projects, deregister projects, process the issuance/verification/cancellation of credits.
Moreover, any stakeholder of Riverse’s ecosystem is under .
Finally, Riverse implements a robust that sets out how the Riverse organization identifies, manages, prevents, and discloses potential or real conflicts of interest to comply with the applicable regulatory requirements and code of practices.
Contractors to the Riverse Standard involved in at least one of the procedures described in the .
The Riverse Registry is openly accessible through Riverse’s website , and displays the following information to ensure maximum transparency and traceability of Riverse Carbon Credits:
The Riverse Registry IT security requirements are detailed in the Appendix 6.5.
Below is a selection of co-benefits that are particularly aligned with Riverse’s program objectives. They are taken from the .
CO
CH fossil
CH biogenic
NO
Both types of avoided emissions can be eligible for RCCs, as long as they meet the for their sector.
Two main types of RCCs are issued by Riverse: removal RCCs and avoidance RCCs. Both types are measured by calculating the difference in GHG emissions of the project scenario compared to the baseline scenario, following the approach outlined in ISO 14064-2:2019. See details in the section.
Removal RCCs are calculated by evaluating the removal projects’ net GHG emissions (i.e. carbon removal and emissions) compared to the baseline scenario’s (i.e. what would have occurred in the absence of the project). See more details on choosing a baseline scenario in the .
projects that continuously upload data to the Impact Certification Platform to estimate credit volumes frequently (e.g. monthly, weekly), but only undergo verification audits e.g. annually.
Riverse Carbon Credits are issued ex-post as after the verification audit at the end of the monitoring period if the project meets the expected KII, with the production and emissions as estimated. See for more details. They appear as “verified” on the registry.
See the criteria for more general guidance on calculations.
See the section for more information.
Indirect processes, such as market changes or physical displacement, shall be evaluated in the criteria, and included in the GHG reduction quantification when relevant and feasible. Methodologies provide instructions on how to assess leakage and manage and, if necessary, deduct leakage emissions.
The Riverse Standard Rules undergoes regular revision to ensure it reflects up-to-date science and best practice in the voluntary carbon market. The complete diagram of these procedures can be found on the website .
All interested parties, irrespective of their background or involvement, are encouraged to continuously provide their feedback on the current Riverse Standard Documentation. They can do so by email at , or .
Public Consultation: the Secretariat organizes a public consultation of the proposed revisions (see section).
Implementation: The Climate team implements the approved revisions into the Riverse Standard Documentation and any affiliated documents. All changes are documented in the , and .
Minor revisions may be made by the Riverse Climate team when they are deemed necessary. All changes are documented in the , and . Minor revisions are tracked through the second number after the standard document name (e.g. Riverse Standard Rules V1.1). Revisions are considered minor if they:
The creation of new Riverse Standard Documentation follows the Review and Approval phases described in the section, with the following differences:
All public consultations are accessible on the website under the Standard Documentation section .
The complete diagram of these procedures can be found on the website .
Anyone may submit a request for a new methodology at any time. The requests are summarized by the Secretariat into a Methodology Creation Proposal (template ).
If the proposal is validated by the SAB, a Methodology Creation Mandate is granted to the Secretariat and the Riverse Climate team. This mandate assigns the designated teams to research, develop, and finalize the methodology. The are presented below.
The Secretariat gathers a technical working group composed of at least 3 members from the (TAC) and/or external experts. The technical working group collaborates with the Riverse Climate team to develop the methodology.
BiCRS carbon capture modules on biogenic CO
Major updates: substantive alterations are subject to a thorough vetting process and follow the , plus the technical working group requirements described the section. Major updates are tracked through the first number after the methodology name (e.g. BiCRS methodology V1).
Minor updates and clarifications: Minor modifications to the methodologies are regularly published and continuously open for public feedback on the , ensuring constant engagement with stakeholders. Minor updates are tracked through the second number after the methodology name (e.g. BiCRS methodology V1.1).
Feedback integration: continuous feedbacks are integrated into the , promoting a feedback-driven refinement approach.
Eligibility criteria changes that could lead to discontinuing previously validated projects (same project compliance procedures apply as in the )
projects under that methodology consistently fail to meet the outlined in the Riverse Standard Rules
Compilation of feedback: After the conclusion of the public consultation period, the Secretariat compiles all feedback, suggestions, and perspectives collected. This collective feedback is then structured and summarized into a document known as the 'Consultation Report’. The report serves as a comprehensive repository of public opinion, ensuring that every suggestion is captured. The consultation reports are made available on the website under Standard Documentation .
All requirements for VVB application and accredited VVBs can be found in the .
Comply with and sign a copy of Riverse's .
Regular performance reviews ensure that VVBs consistently uphold their responsibilities, for accurate and impartial verification, as detailed in the .
The Conflict of Interest Policy (available ) is a separate document that must be signed by all individuals or parties identified as being at potential risk of a conflict of interest. For a detailed outline of the parties involved, please refer to the diagram found in the section.
Please refer to the for a detailed description of the Standard Advisory Board’s responsibilities and organization.
Please refer to the for a detailed description of the Technical Advisory Committee’s responsibilities and organization.
TAC members are nominated by the Riverse , with the approval of the SAB.
The Certification team is responsible for delivering the ongoing tasks required by the .
This document presents guidelines for Validation and Verification Bodies (VVBs) for conducting evaluations of greenhouse gas emission avoidance and/or removals of project developers.
The aim of this document is to present guidelines for Validation and Verification Bodies (VVBs) for conducting comprehensive evaluations of greenhouse gas emission avoidance and/or removals of Project Developers under the Riverse Standard.
Validation Audits
Verification Audits
This guidance is part of the larger framework of the Riverse Standard system, which encompasses the Riverse Standard Rules and the methodologies. Moreover, it complements the Riverse Procedures Manual that delineates project registration and supervision This document offers targeted guidance for auditors performing validation and verification audits within the specialized scope of Project Developers.
The guidelines detailed in this document become binding upon its formal release. Post this date, any VVB that meets the requirements can contribute to the validation and verification of Riverse Standard Projects.
Existing VVBs must reapply and provide the necessary documentation outlined in this text before continuing validation or verification tasks.
For VVBs who have an existing formalized agreement with Project Developers before the activation date of this guidance, a grace period of twelve months is given to apply again and comply with the new requirements.
Henceforth, Project Developers can only collaborate with VVBs officially recognized by Riverse, based on the requirements and processes defined herein. Projects already registered that haven't transitioned to the Riverse Standard Rules might be subjected to different review templates than those mentioned here.
I hereby acknowledge that I have read and understand the above requirements.
Company name:____________________
Name:_________________
Signature: ____________________________________ Date:_____________
Version history and changes to the Riverse Procedures Manual
This document delineates the requirements and procedures necessary for ensuring compliance with the and . It pertains to the following types of audits:
See for full versions of previous documents
This template shall be used to register all operating sites. All sites where the project operates shall be registered. This includes all factories, facilities, or operations under direct control of the project developer, whose activities are issued carbon credits.
This document summarizes all key elements of a project, allowing Riverse and the general public to have a complete understanding of its actions and expected results.
Any stakeholder may submit a request for a new methodology at any time. The requests are summarized and grouped into sectors by the Secretariat, in the creation of a Methodology Creation Proposal.
Download the template
Download the template
This document reports all activities carried out by the Project Developer during the year and its respective achievements. It serves as a channel to track the Project’s progress and communicate it to the general public.
This letter template shall be used by Project Developers willing to use the services of a third party firm to conduct part or all of the validation and/or verification process.
Download the template
This methodology is composed of modules, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project depending on their specific operations.
Modules are arranged into three module categories: carbon capture, transformation, and carbon storage. The modules available in the Riverse BiCRS methodology are presented in the figure below.
Modules are like mini-methodologies that only cover a part of the project life-cycle. Combining the relevant modules for a project results in a complete picture of eligibility criteria, GHG reduction quantification requirements, required data, monitoring plans, and other instructions for Riverse certification.
For a given project, multiple modules from each Module category may be selected if they are relevant to the project. For example, most projects will likely use both Transportation and Infrastructure and machinery modules from the Transformation category. At least one module must be selected from the carbon capture, transformation, and carbon storage categories.
Modules are compiled seamlessly on the Riverse Certification Platform. Project Developers only need to select the modules that are relevant for their project.
This methodology covers projects that transform and store biomass into a permanent carbon removal solution, also called biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS). This methodology is composed of modules, which give more specific requirements and instructions for different parts of project operations. This methodology document provides general requirements and instructions that are relevant for all BiCRS projects, regardless of the specific modules they use.
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RIV-BICRS-GEN-V1.0
Release date
December 4th, 2024
Status
In use
It is widely acknowledged that in addition to reducing global greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, and permanently sequestered. One way to do this is through , which involves a range of technologies that use plant biomass to remove carbon dioxide (CO) from the atmosphere and store that CO underground or in long-lived products.
All projects certified under this methodology must convert biomass into permanent carbon storage solutions.
Avoidance Riverse Carbon Credits (RCCs) may be issued for eligible project activities, such as energy production.
Any share of removals coming from non-biogenic carbon are not eligible for removal RCCs under this methodology.
Carbon removals shall be ensured for at least 100 years, according to the Riverse Standard Rules permanence criteria. Each project shall transparently disclose their permanence horizon of 100 or 1000+ years.
Technologies that are not detailed in a module, but that meet the general requirements of the present methodology, may be considered on a case by case basis.
The default project scope shall be defined in the Carbon storage modules.
The eligibility criteria requirements that are applicable to all projects under this methodology are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and Riverse Standard Rules:
At the European Union level, projects automatically pass the regulatory surplus analysis, which has been conducted by the Riverse Climate Team. Project Developers are only required to provide a country-level regulatory surplus analysis.
Investment analysis may be used to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the project investment a financially viable and interesting option. The investment may cover:
The creation and launching of new sites
Expansion of capacity of existing activities
Expansion by installing new processes
Business plans shall be provided as initial proof for investment analysis. During verification, audited financial statements shall be used to demonstrate that the initial estimates from the business plan were reasonable, and that carbon finance was used as initially described for the expected investment.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits.
Barrier analysis may be used to prove that the project faces financial, institutional, or technological barriers to ongoing operations that can only be overcome using carbon finance. Examples include but are not limited to:
Financial barrier: financial analysis demonstrating that the project is not financially viable, evidenced by net cash being lower than the working capital requirements, or proof that the project is not meeting the projected financial targets in the business plans and loan documents, and that carbon finance would make it financially viable.
Institutional barrier: description of new regulation that the project must make costly changes to comply with, financial analysis showing that the project cannot fund the changes on their own, and carbon finance is necessary to make it viable.
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial statements must be provided as proof. These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers, or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
BiCRS projects have a risk of double issuance of credits if the user of the removal solution and/or operator of the storage site also seeks credit issuance. Project Developers shall:
Identify all direct downstream users/buyers/actors in their supply chain, providing the company/organization name, name of an individual contact person at the company/organization, and their contact information (email address at minimum).
Provide proof that measures have been taken to avoid double issuance with those actors, such as through signed agreements, packaging/marketing material stating carbon credits have already been issued, and/or sales contract clauses.
If the Project Developer proves that the removal solution stays within the project scope all the way through storage, and it is never sold or transferred, then the requirements above may be disregarded.
At the validation stage for projects under development, this information may not be determined yet. In this case, upon validation Project Developers shall describe any information available on the expected buyers, and provide signed agreements committing to provide the necessary information upon verification. During the verification stage, Project Developers shall provide the information described above in order to issue RCCs.
Biochar use in concrete: 73%
Biochar replacement of peat or horticultural products: 58%
Energy co-products: 45%
The scope of the reduction is the system boundary used in GHG quantification, described in the Baseline scenario and Project scenario sections below.
This shall be proven using the GHG reduction quantification method described below and in the relevant modules.
This eligibility criteria may be disregarded for projects that only issue removal RCCs.
The net removals for a project shall be calculated by summing the emissions and removals of each module used by that project.
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow a robust, recognized method and good practice guidance. The overall methodological approach is a comparative life cycle assessment (LCA) at the project-scale, based on .
BiCRS projects may be eligible for removal and avoidance Riverse Carbon Credits. Removal and avoidance RCCs are calculated and issued according to two completely separate accounting mechanisms, described below. This conservative approach results in double counting the project's induced emissions, and avoids the need for allocation of emissions/removals.
The functional unit shall be 1 tonne of carbon storage solution (e.g. 1 tonne of biochar spread on soils, 1 tonne of biomass buried...).
BiCRS projects may result in multiple products in addition to the primary carbon storage component. Emissions from multifunctional processes shared among co-products may be allocated across the respective products. However, emissions from processes exclusive to a single product (e.g., dedicated delivery of carbon storage products) must be fully attributed to that product.
If the co-product is a nonvaluable waste, then no allocation is required and all GHG emissions are allocated to the main product.
If the co-product is valuable and eligible for avoidance RCCs, then no allocation is performed, and process emissions are counted towards both the avoidance GHG accounting and the removal GHG accounting. This is a conservative approach to separately handling removal and avoidance accounting schemes.
If the co-product is valuable and eligible for removal RCCs, then emissions may be allocated to between the co-products. It is best practice to perform allocation based on an underlying characteristic that best represents the main function of the products. Here the main function is carbon removal, so allocation shall be based on the proportion of carbon removal of the two products, in tonnes of carbon.
A baseline scenario must be included for any project that issues avoidance RCCs. The baseline scenario represents the GHG emissions from the product or activity that is avoided by the project activity, i.e. the GHG emissions that would have occurred in the absence of the project.
Specific instructions for definition and modeling of baseline scenarios are available in the relevant module documents.
Modules include specific instructions on calculating GHG emissions and removals for the relevant processes.
Each project must use at least one module from the following categories: carbon capture, transformation and carbon storage.
Projects are requested to send this letter to local communities and stakeholders. This letter should articulate the project's intent to issue RCC as a means to finance its operations and monetize its mitigation activities.
Module category
As required in the Riverse Double counting policy, Project Developers seeking to obtain the CORSIA or Article 6 label on Riverse Carbon Credits must provide an official Letter of Authorisation from the Host Country.
V1.0
This is a Transformation Module and covers processing and energy use related to the project. This module is part of the Riverse BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
This module covers all processing stages and non-transport energy inputs related to BiCRS projects. It is intended to cover all eligibility criteria and GHG quantification for all processes that are not included in the other BiCRS modules: feedstock production, transport, infrastructure/machinery, and carbon storage. Specific processes vary by project, and may include but are not limited to:
storing, drying, mixing, shredding and grinding of biomass feedstock
operation of pyrolysis/gasification machinery
direct emissions from off-gas released to the atmosphere (e.g. methane)
purification, liquefication, and other post-processing of products
use of electricity, gas, heat, water, or other material inputs
waste treatment and management of non-valuable co-products
The eligibility criteria requirements specific to this module are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and methodologies:
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Projects must follow all European, national, and local environmental regulations related to, for example, syngas combustion national emission regulations.
The only strict, disqualifying requirement in this module is that pyrolysis gases produced during the process must be either captured or cleanly burned, if the project is using pyrolysis/gasification. Waste heat and energy coproducts should be used onsite, and fossil fuel based energy should be minimized.
Pests and pathogen growth from biomass feedstock storage
Leachate and runoff from biomass feedstock storage
Gaseous emissions from pyrolysis/gasification/combustion
Improper disposal of waste by-products (ash, tar, residue...) causing soil and water contamination
Inefficient use of waste heat
Worker exposure to particulate matter or other gaseous pollutants from pyrolysis
Worker exposure to dust from biomass shredding/grinding, respiratory risks
The processes covered in this module are highly dependent on the project type, so not all risks may be relevant to a given project. Project Developers may explain how a risk is not applicable to their project.
The GHG reduction quantification instructions from all other modules used by the project must be used in conjunction with the present module in order to obtain full life-cycle GHG reduction quantifications. It is a catch-all module that includes all relevant processes that are not included in other modules.
Monitoring and quantification may be done per Production Batch, or per calendar year. Verification shall be done annually by summing the GHG reduction quantifications for each production batch produced in the calendar year.
The system boundary of this quantification section includes GHG emissions from at least the following mandatory activities:
Electricity and fuel production
Fuel combustion
Direct emissions of off-gas/flue gas
Water use
Waste treatment
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 1. These data shall be provided for each production batch and made publicly available.
Table 1 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for initial project certification and validation. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see Monitoring Plan section).
No other secondary data sources are used in this module.
If the project undergoes ex-ante validation, estimations and calculations may be accepted instead of measured primary data. These shall be replaced by measured primary data upon verification. Any estimates and calculations should be justified with:
process engineering documents
technical specifications for machinery
measured data from previous projects or from the scientific literature
statistics or databases
Note that conservative estimates and calculations shall always be made to avoid overestimating provisional credits.
Because energy is expected to be the most important input in this module, additional details are provided regarding how to model energy.
Projects may only use renewable electricity emission factors for their energy consumption if:
the energy production is directly linked to the project site, and can prove that there is a physical link, or
the project holds renewable energy certificates (REC) (e.g. guarantee of origin, GO) plus an energy contract or purchase agreement for the concerned energy. In other words, the project can prove the coupled use of the energy and its corresponding REC.
Use of only a REC is not sufficient and shall be counted as grid electricity.
Electricity grid emission factors shall be taken for the national grid (at the maximum granularity), and if possible, regional mixes shall be used.
GHG emissions from fuel use shall include both the upstream extraction and processing of fuel, plus the direct emissions from combustion.
Based on the project's detailed process diagram, activities and inputs shall be selected for inclusion in the module and listed.
For each input, Project Developers shall provide the amount used and units per Production Batch and/or per calendar year.
Uncertainty may come from project data, but this is estimated to be negligible, since it is required to come from a direct measurement.
This translates to no minimum expected discount factor based on this module.
Monitoring Plans for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each Production Batch and/or each calendar year:
Amount and type of any input/emission that makes up more than 30% of project life-cycle GHG emissions
Amount and type of any input/emission that makes up between 10-30% of project life-cycle GHG emissions and is expected to vary by more than 30% between Production Batches
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
The table below presents a non-exhaustive selection of Ecoinvent activities that may be used in the GHG reduction calculations for this module. Additional activities may be used for any project, if the following selection does not cover all relevant activities.
Table A1 List of ecoinvent 3.10 processes used in the GHG reduction quantification model, all processes are from the cutoff database
V1.0
This is a Carbon Capture Module and covers the sourcing of biomass feedstock for carbon storage projects. This module is part of the Riverse BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
This module covers use of biomass feedstock for permanent carbon removal and storage. Eligible biomasses are those that:
could not have been used as main material products,
were not grown for the purpose of or bioenergy production.
For simplification, all feedstocks that meet the above requirements will be referred to hereafter as waste. Biomass feedstocks are categorized accordingly:
Land owners or managers where biomass is cultivated or collected are not eligible Project Developers.
The eligibility criteria requirements specific to this module are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and methodologies:
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Projects must follow all national, local and European (if located in Europe) environmental regulations related to, for example, biomass harvesting, and forest management.
Project Developers shall provide proof that the biomass feedstock is classified as waste. This can be done via any one of the following three methods:
Price: if Project Developers did not pay for the biomass, or if they were paid to handle it, the biomass can be considered waste. Acceptable proof includes invoices, receipts, or contracts.
Contextual analysis: Project Developers may submit an analysis supported by reputable sources that the biomass 1) could not be used as main material products, and 2) was not grown for the purpose of .
Positive list of wastes: if the biomass is included in the following list, it can be considered waste. Acceptable proof includes invoices, receipts, contracts, or photographic evidence and is required for validation:
sawmill residues
sawdust
shavings
bark
forestry tops and branches
wildfire management residues
straw
husks
corn cobs
wood from horticulture (trimmings or whole plants)
nut shells
bagasse
sugar beet pulp
Project Developers shall evaluate the most likely alternative use/s of the biomass in order to assess environmental risks, leakage risks, and to calculate replacement emissions (if applicable). The evaluation shall be transparent and conservative.
The alternative use shall address questions such as:
was the biomass used for a product or service, that now needs to be replaced?
was the biomass going to store carbon anyway (in the biomass itself and/or in the soil)?
Proof shall be provided and may include signed statements from the biomass provider, historical records from the biomass provider, regional statistics or reputable reporting.
A short list of likely alternative uses may be provided for descriptive purposes, but for the purpose of further analysis, one single alternative use shall be proposed.
Biomass feedstock originating from forests shall provide at least one of the following forestry sustainability certificates (or similar, with a sufficient justification):
FSC (Forest Stewardship Council)
PEFC (Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification)
RSB (Roundtable on Sustainable Biomaterials)
SFI (Sustainable Forestry Initiative)
SBP (Sustainable Biomass Program)
These certifications are used to prove:
Legal and transparent chain of custody
Proper forest regeneration
Safeguarding biodiversity and soil health
Historically stable or increasing forest carbon stocks
Sound socio-environmental practices in forestry operations
Disruption of soil health when collecting and exporting organic matter
Presence of heavy metals, toxins or other chemical pollutants in the biomass
Spread of diseases or invasive species
Cultivation of feedstock
Deforestation from use of forestry products as feedstock
Distant transport of feedstock inputs (>100 km)
Biomass feedstock sourcing must not contribute to activity shifting leakage.
The requirement that biomass feedstock must be classified as waste prevents activity shifting leakage. Consequently, the evidence provided in the "Environmental and Social Do No Harm" section shall also be applied here to verify that the feedstock is waste.
Several other types of leakage risks are already covered by other components of this module:
Displacement of soil carbon storage: a small amount of soil carbon storage is assumed and modeled in the Baseline Scenario where relevant, effectively deducted from the project's carbon storage.
Upstream and downstream emissions: considered in the life-cycle based GHG quantifications in companion modules.
The GHG reduction quantification instructions from all other modules used by the project must be used in conjunction with the present module in order to obtain full life-cycle GHG reduction quantifications.
The required data from all projects using biomass feedstocks are presented in Table 2.
Table 2 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for initial project certification and validation. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see Monitoring Plan section).
Major assumptions in this module include:
This section is only required if the feedstock's alternative use was to be left on the soil or reapplied to soils for nutrient recycling. Specifically this includes but is not limited to:
mulching
composting
spreading fast-decaying cellulose-based residues (e.g. decay within 5 years)
The Baseline Scenario shall include permanent carbon storage that would have occurred anyway in the absence of the project.
Although most biomass carbon would be released before the CDR project's permanence horizon, a small fraction is stabilized permanently as soil carbon. This portion is accounted for in the Baseline Scenario and deducted from the project's carbon removal capacity.
The uncertainty around biomass carbon being 1) naturally incorporated into the soil and 2) converted to a stable carbon form is high, influenced by factors such as climate, soil type, soil health, and land use, making it hard to estimate for individual projects. Thus, it's assumed that 0.5% of the carbon in the biomass feedstock will be permanently stored in soils.
For projects that include baseline permanent carbon storage, the assumption that 0.5% of carbon is permanently sequestered is has moderate uncertainty, but the total net project removals is not sensitive to this assumption. Therefore, this translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects that include baseline permanent carbon storage.
Monitoring Plans for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each reporting period:
Mass, type and source of all biomass feedstocks collected by the project.
Sustainable forestry certification (if applicable)
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
Chemical analyses shall be defined by the carbon storage module and may include but are not limited to:
Explore the results of our public consultations, including feedback summaries and responses that drive improvements in our standards and methodologies.
See more details on how modules are organized in the .
This methodology document outlines the general requirements for BiCRS projects certified under the . These projects are eligible for removal Riverse Carbon Credits (RCCs) related to their carbon removals, and avoidance RCCs as a result of generating valuable co-products. Further details for specific technologies are available in module documents.
To demonstrate additionality, Project Developers shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the .
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate project activities (for removal and avoidance activities). It is acceptable if regulations promote or set targets for these activities, because the resulting increase in activities shall be accounted for in the .
For launching brand new sites, additionality can be simply demonstrated if the business plan shows that carbon finance is expected to make up at least 80% of the company’s revenue, as detailed in the .
Project Developers shall sign the , committing to follow the requirements outlined in the , including not double using or double issuing carbon credits.
Project Developers shall fill in the, in addition to all module-specific risk evaluations, to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of projects. The contains the defined in the Riverse Standard Rules.
BiCRS projects that issue avoidance RCCs must prove that they lead to at least the following GHG emission reductions compared to the baseline scenario, which are aligned with the and described in the .
General GHG quantification rules can be found in the .
Process-specific GHG quantification rules can be found in the accompanying BiCRS , , and modules.
GHG quantifications shall be completed either for each batch (batches are defined in the relevant ), or for each calendar year. Carbon storage module documents may provide specific requirements.
Baseline scenarios may be included for projects that issue only removal RCCs, for example from . The baseline scenario represents the permanent carbon removals that would have occurred anyway, without the project intervention.
Download the template
Download the template
See more details on how modules are organized in the .
Feedstock sustainability risks shall be taken from the .
Project Developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of projects. The identified risks include:
According to the , processes with the lowest contributions to impacts, which each account for less than 1% of total impacts, may be excluded from the GHG quantification. These processes shall be transparently identified and justified.
The version 3.10 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in .
If the available emission factors do not accurately represent the project, a different emission factor may be submitted by the Project Developer, and approved by the Riverse Certification team and the VVB. Any emission factor must meet the data requirements outlined in the , and come from traceable, transparent, unbiased, and reputable sources.
The rules outlined at the methodology-level in the shall be applied for allocating GHG emissions between co-products.
Project Developers shall choose a type of input/emission used among the options in . If the relevant input is not listed, it may be added/considered on a case by case basis, and approved by the Riverse Certification team and the VVB.
represents the total emissions from this module
represents the amount of the input/emission of type , in the same units as the emission factor described below
represents the emission factor for the input/emission of type in kg COeq per given unit from ecoinvent
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the .
Download the template
See more details on how modules are organized in the the .
The Project Developer and entity eligible for receiving carbon finance the user of biomass feedstock who enables the permanent carbon storage. This is further specified in the corresponding .
In addition to completing the described below, Project Developers must prove the following elements.
Project Developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of projects. The identified risks include:
The permanent carbon sequestration rate in the is 0.5%.
Because the only biomass types allowed are waste, they are assigned no environmental impacts from their production/cultivation stage. Impacts from following stages, such as harvest, transport, and processing, shall be accounted for in the module.
represents the permanent carbon removal in the baseline scenario in the reporting period, in t COeq. It is used in the removal equations in the general page to calculate total net project removals.
represents the amount of biomass feedstock used in the reporting period, in tonnes of dry matter.
represents the concentration of carbon in the biomass feedstock, in tonnes of carbon per tonne of dry matter.
represents the permanent sequestration rate of carbon applied to soils, which is 0.5%, as described in the section.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the .
Depending on the project type, chemical analyses may be performed on the biomass feedstock or the final carbon storage solution (e.g. biochar). The accompanying carbon storage module shall specify at which stage chemical analyses should be performed. In all cases, carbon content of biomass feedstock must be provided, although secondary sources may be acceptable (see ).
If chemical analyses of feedstock are required, Project Developers shall follow the instructions in the page to ensure a random and representative sampling procedure.
Download the template
Would you like to be notified of future consultations? Please
Access all archived versions of Riverse Standard Documents and methodologies here
Module name
Processing and energy use
Module category
Transformation
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RIV-BICRS-T-P&ENG-V1.0
Release date
December 4th, 2024
Status
In use
Pyrolysis/gasification target temperature, for each production batch*
°C
Operations records (only for projects that perform pyrolysis/gasification)
Pyrolysis/gasification residence time, for each production batch*
minutes
Operations records (only for projects that perform pyrolysis/gasification)
Detailed process diagram with included/excluded processes
Flow chart
Internal process documents
Type of input/emission*
Text description
Internal process documents
Amount of input/emission*
kg, liter, kWh, MWh, GWh, m
Meter readings, bills, internal tracking documents, invoices, contracts, gas analyzers or sensors on pyrolysis equipment, calculated using conversions from other primary project data
Grid electricity
8
GWh
All electricity used onsite annually
Electricity bills
Diesel
5
liter
Shredding machine. 1 liter diesel per Production Batch, x5 Production Batches per year, calculated using machine fuel efficiency and number of hours used
Technical specifications (liter/hour), record of number of hours used
Methane emissions
20
kg
Emissions calculated from incomplete combustion of syngas
Equipment technical specifications (e.g. 99% efficiency guaranteed), records of amount of syngas produced
Bottom ash waste
50
kg
Management of ash residue from 1 year, landfilled
Invoice from waste management company
grid electricity
market for electricity, low voltage
market for electricity, medium voltage
onsite solar electricity
electricity production, photovoltaic, 570kWp open ground installation, multi-Si
diesel fuel material
market for diesel, low-sulfur
market for diesel
diesel burning
diesel, burned in agricultural machinery
diesel, burned in diesel-electric generating set, 18.5kW
natural gas burning
natural gas, burned in gas turbine
heat, from steam
market for heat, from steam, in chemical industry
heat, from munipal incineration
heat, from municipal waste incineration to generic market for heat district or industrial, other than natural gas
heat, from biomethane burning
market for heat, central or small-scale, biomethane
heat, from straw burning in a furnace
heat production, straw, at furnace 300kW
heat, from natural gas
market for heat, district or industrial, natural gas
market for heat, central or small-scale, natural gas
water
market for tap water
market for water, decarbonised
market for water, deionised
non-hazardous landfill
market for process-specific burdens, slag landfill
market for process-specific burdens, sanitary landfill
market for process-specific burdens, inert material landfill
hazardous waste treatment
market for hazardous waste, for incineration
market for hazardous waste, for underground deposit
Module name
Biomass feedstock
Module category
Carbon capture
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RIV-BICRS-CC-BMF-V1.0
Release date
December 4th, 2024
Status
In use
Forest waste from secondary forest
Natural but not primary old-growth forest, may still be managed for timber
Default if no other forest type can be proven
Forest waste from managed forest
Managed mixed-use forests that may include agroforestry, plantations or rotational logging
Must provide proof
Necessary tree removal from any forest
Damaged trees, or trees removed for planned forest management such as preventing disease spread or fires
Must provide proof
Agricultural residues with value
Residues left on soil or reapplied to soils for nutrient recycling (e.g. mulching, composting, spreading fast-decaying cellulose-based residues with decay within 5 years)
Default if prior use could not be determined
Agricultural residues with no value
Plowed into soil, burnt in the field, no substantial return of nutrients to soil
Must provide proof
Other waste or residue
To be evaluated on a case by case basis according to criteria outlined in the present document
Must provide proof
Amount of biomass used*
Tonnes of fresh matter
Primary: Internal tracking documents, invoices, contracts
Carbon content of biomass
% w/w, fraction, kg/tonne
Primary or secondary: Laboratory chemical analyses, or local/national agriculture government agencies
Organic carbon content
Determining amount of carbon removed and carbon removal efficiency
Total carbon content
Determining amount of carbon removed and carbon removal efficiency
C:N ratio
Stability of biomass
Moisture content
Mass conversions
How to use this module
BiCRS methodology
Additionality
No double counting
ESDNH
Targets alignment
Other modules
Permanence
Substitution
Co-benefits
No double counting
ESDNH
Riverse Standard Rules
Measurability
Real
TRL
Minimum impact
Energy co-products
Projects eligible under this methodology are the anaerobic digestion sites where feedstock inputs are collected, anaerobic digestion occurs, and biogas/energy is generated. The Project Developers are the operators of the anaerobic digestion sites.
The only use of biogas eligible in the current version of the methodology is purifying biogas to biomethane and direct injection into the gas grid. Other uses may be considered on a case by case basis, if Project Developers provide sufficient proof that they 1) still adhere to the eligibility criteria and 2) have a rigorous, conservative GHG reduction quantification method for components that differ from the method described in the present document.
The only use of digestate eligible for carbon credits under this methodology is application to agricultural soils as an organic amendment and fertilizer. Such activities shall be credited with avoided synthetic mineral fertilizer production and use. If digestate is used in a different application, the project is still eligible for credits on the basis of their energy production activities.
One project corresponds to one anaerobic digestion site. It is not possible under this methodology to group multiple sites together as one project.
An anaerobic digestion site is defined as a site with one operations permit and shared infrastructure (e.g. digestion tanks, storage, and treatment facilities).
Only the activities at the biogas site that are deemed additional are part of the project scope.
Use of fossil fuels such as natural gas, oil, and coal are responsible for about of global greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, and make up of GHG emissions within the energy sector. Alternative energy sources exist with far fewer GHGs emissions, but technological, economic, and administrative barriers prevent and limit their development.
Biogas is a renewable energy source that can be produced via several different pathways. One option is anaerobic digestion, where organic materials such as food waste, animal manure, and agricultural residues are broken down by microorganisms in an oxygen-free environment. Common uses of biogas include:
Injection: Purification of biogas to biomethane and directly injecting it into the gas network.
Cogeneration: Generation of electricity and heat by a biogas engine or turbine for a combined heat and power (CHP) system.
Heat only: Production of heat in a biogas boiler.
Transport: Compressed natural gas (BioCNG) and liquefied natural gas (BioLNG)
The second output of anaerobic digestion, digestate, is a material rich in organic matter and nutrients that is spread on agricultural fields.
have confirmed that using biogas from anaerobic digestion rather than energy from fossil fuels leads to reduced GHG emissions. Yet, biogas makes up a small share of energy consumption: in 2022 in Europe, more natural gas was used than biogas,.
Once the project has undergone validation, it transitions to the verification phase with a designated Validation and Verification Body (VVB). The primary objectives of VVB verification are to ascertain the project's ongoing integrity, eligibility, and alignment with the initial projections. Verification is done for each year of the crediting period.
This involves a thorough:
review of the validity and proof of indicators presented in the Monitoring Plan.
evaluation of any major reported changes to the project, such as changes in operations or production output. Ensure that the project still meets the eligibility criteria.
validation of updated LCA calculations (using indicators from the Monitoring Plan), and the corresponding amount of RCCs to issue.
The output of this verification will be used to verify and issue the expected amount of RCCs, cancel (in case of underachievement) or issue additional RCCs (in case of overachievement).
The VVB team must follow the procedures outlined in the “Annual monitoring & verification” section of the Riverse Procedures Manual.
Following the comprehensive audit work, the derived results are as follows:
Consistency: The answers and evidence furnished for each criterion of the Monitoring Plan of the project have been verified and found to be consistent and valid.
Model: The model employed for CO2 calculation is the same as in the validation process, or is the latest version of related framework
Data authenticity and estimates: inputs include actual data and where appropriate estimates, and are supported by technical data from reliable and recognised sources;
Project/Process change: All major project/process change are duly reported and documented
LCA update: The LCA calculations have been accurately updated to reflect the indicators measured in the Monitoring Plan, and any major project/process changes if any)
RCCs verification: The annual quantity of removal/avoidance RCCs, based on real ex-ante carbon reductions/sequestration, has been verified.
The Riverse Certification team may eliminate a fraction of a project’s estimated RCCs using the uncertainty discount factor to mitigate carbon credit overestimation. These verified avoided/removed emissions are never issued as RCCs.
Application of a discount factor may occur when material uncertainty is identified, for example, in the project’s measured data, assumptions, or the selection of the baseline scenario.
When faced with high uncertainty, steps should be taken to reduce uncertainty, and conservative choices should be made. If uncertainty remains, a discount factor shall be applied. Requirements are described in the Uncertainty Assessment section of the Riverse Standard Rules.
RCCs that are eliminated with the discount factor are not issued and will not appear on the registry. This discount factor may vary from 0% to more than 10% of estimated RCCs. The amount is evaluated individually for each project.
All projects that issue removal RCCs must allocate a portion of their verified removal RCCs to the buffer pool. This pool acts as an insurance mechanism, shared across all removal projects, against the risk of reversal of sequestered carbon before the agreed upon commitment period (at least 100 years, for removal RCCs). This may occur due to, for example, natural disaster (fires, drought, pests) or project mismanagement. These RCCs cannot be retired by buyers.
The buffer pool is supplied with RCCs via two paths:
Default: Each removal project allocates by default at least 3% of its verified removal RCCs to the buffer pool.
As a result of the verification phase, provisional credits either are issued as verified RCCs or are canceled.
Upon verification, three situations are possible: exact estimation, overestimation and under-estimation. Below is an example for 100 estimated provisional removal credits. Note that the actual portion of RCCs going to the buffer pool may vary by project.
Case 1: the project produced exactly as expected, thus all the credits issued for this period are verified
100
100 RCCs verified: - 97 to the project
- 3 RCC go to the buffer pool.
0
Case 2: the project did not deliver the expected KIIs, thus part of the provisional credits are canceled
80
80 RCCs verified: - 77 to the project - 3 to the buffer pool
20 canceled, not issued
Case 3: the project produced more impact than expected, thus all the credits plus new credits are issued
120
100 RCCs verified and 20 new RCCs issued/verified: - 116 to the project - 4 to the buffer pool
0
The name of the Riverse Registry operator, from the Certification team, who operates the issuance is registered in the process.
When removal RCCs are issued, a contribution will automatically be transferred from Project accounts to the Riverse Buffer Pool account. The amount of removal credits to be added to the buffer pool is defined for each project, and displayed on the project page on the registry. The contribution shall equal the percentage confirmed during project validation, and shall be rounded up to the nearest whole RCC (3% by default).
Provisional credits may be canceled on the registry for several reasons:
lack of measurement source for a KII
change in KII or overall process, so that the project no longer avoids/removes carbon as expected
change in external factors causing the project to lose its additional status (i.e. change in regulation that makes the project activities required)
If pre-purchase agreements were made between buyers and PDs, the buffer pool will not be used to replace canceled provisional credits.
Verified removal RCCs may be canceled/withdrawn from the buffer pool if the Project Developer notifies Riverse of an event that re-emits at least 1 tonne of COeq of the carbon stored in the removal solution, before the commitment period ends. The amount of RCCs withdrawn from the buffer pool equals the tonnes of COeq estimated to have been released as a result of the reversal event. The Project Developer must notify Riverse within 30 calendar days of becoming aware of the reversal event.
Riverse Certification team shall cancel RCCs from the buffer pool of a similar type as the removal RCCs that were reversed.
Verified RCCs may be deemed erroneously issued due to, for example, calculation errors, use of wrong input data, or inaccurate proof. While the comprehensive audit process renders this highly unlikely, a procedure is prepared out of an abundance of caution.
Erroneous issuance may be signaled by the PD, the VBB, the Riverse Certification team, or any stakeholder. The Riverse Certification team shall investigate the incident, determine the number of excess credits issued, and take the following remediating action:
Credits already transferred or retired: the above procedure shall be applied, and an equivalent amount of excess credits will be transferred to the credit user at no cost from the project's next verification and issuance. If no additional credits are available, Riverse will work with the credit user on a case-by-case basis to agree upon compensation, with Riverse taking financial responsibility to ensure the credit user incurs no loss.
An Cancelation Report will be generated and attached to the cancelation event in the Registry that states the amount of excess credits erroneously issued and the remediating action.
To retire RCCs, the user must log in with their username and password to the Riverse Registry and click on the option “retirement”. There they must enter the following information:
Project name and registry ID from which RCCs are to be removed
Vintage year
Number of RCCs to be retired
Reason for retirement: voluntary offset, carbon tax, or another specific offset scheme
End-user information: country of location, name, document type, and document number
Taxpayer information, if applicable: country of location, name, document type, and document number
Once retired, RCCs can not be transacted, retired or canceled.
Once received, the PA is reviewed by the Certification team, with an average response time of 15 days. If clarification or additional details are needed, questions are sent to the PD.
For rejected applications, a refusal report explaining the decision will be provided to the PD. PDs may revise and resubmit at any time without restriction, allowing for the flexibility to revise and resubmit applications.
Approved PAs proceed to project registration.
To activate a Riverse registry account, the PD must complete the following steps:
Use the connection link received via email
Complete all administrative information required in the Admin page
This document should name the Registration Partner and define their authority and responsibilities, formally authorizing them to represent the PD in all registration, documentation, and project management activities under the Riverse Standard.
After the project is added to the registry, the PD is given access to the Impact Certification Platform to submit all elements required for the Project Design Document (PDD). The elements and their proof are checked by the Riverse Certification team, and upon approval the PDD is generated.
The PDD serves as the final validation document used for audit. PDDs shall contain, at a minimum, the following information:
Non-technical description of the project operations, scope, PD, location, and other relevant actors
Technical description of the technology and project operations
Justification that the project meets all 12 criteria described in the Riverse Standard Rules, and, if relevant, the chosen methodology
Assessment of environmental and social risks
Justification of the chosen baseline scenario
Project-specific assumptions, data sources, and emission sources/sinks in the GHG quantification, that are not already specified at the methodology level
Demonstration of additionality
Project-specific uncertainty assessment
Monitoring Plan with Key Impact Indicators (KIIs) to be monitored
Site registration
Future production projections
The Certification team evaluates the PDD and any supporting documents to ensure they respect Riverse’s general and methodology GHG quantification steps and eligibility requirements.
The Certification team may require clarifications and additional information about the project via the Impact Certification Platform.
For projects unlike any previously validated by Riverse, or in cases of uncertainty, the Certification team may recommend a full or partial proofreading of the PDD by a domain expert from the Technical Advisory Committee. This optional proofreading incurs fees based on the expert’s rates, charged to the PD.
Once the PDD completes an expert review (if needed) and is validated by the Certification team, the project proceeds to third-party validation with the VVB.
The PDD and proof documents are made available to the third-party Validation and Verification Body (VVB) on the Impact Certification Platform. The VVB audits the adherence to the Riverse Standard Rules and the specified methodology. In this stage, the VVB may request additional information or ask questions to the PD or the Riverse Certification team.
The validation audit takes place between the PD, the VVB and where necessary, the Riverse Certification team, and clarification is managed on the Impact Certification Platform.
The audit results are documented in a report, shared with the PD and the Riverse Certification team and are available upon request.
If the VVB identifies any reservations or discrepancies during assessment, the PD must respond promptly within 30 days. The PD can either correct the issues directly or submit a mitigation plan, which, if accepted by the VVB, can be added to the project's Monitoring Plan.
A site audit is mandatory within two years of the project’s crediting period start date and/or before the second verification audit. This punctual site audit is complementary to the annual operations audits, which are checked during verification via documents and photos.
The goal of the site audit is to confirm that:
The project exists and is functional
The scale of the project is in line with the description
Key processes operate as described in the project PDD
Projects that issue more than 10,000 RCCs per year must undergo an in-person site audit.
VVBs reserve the right to request an in-person site audit if the remote audit is deemed insufficient. This may be at any time in the process, before or after a remote audit has been conducted.
The VVB must determine the specific components to be checked during the site audit. These components should allow the VVB to complete the goal mentioned above. A list of components should be sent to the PD one week before the scheduled audit.
The output of the site audit includes the VVBs comments on each component, noting whether it was confirmed, if there are remaining reservations, if it was deemed false, or (if it was done remotely) if an in-person follow-up audit is necessary.
If a stakeholder consultation has already been conducted (to obtain a permit for instance), PDs are exempt from this requirement, and shall share the results on the Impact Certification Platform.
Additionally, the Riverse Registry provides an open-access space where stakeholders can check the project details and provide feedback. The consultation is open for a 30 day period on the Riverse Registry.
If no concerns remain unaddressed, the project is validated. The PDD is made available on the Riverse Registry.
Key impact indicators (KIIs) are identified during the GHG quantification (or LCA) and the eligibility criteria assessment, and reported in the PDD. These are parameters with high variability and importance that need to be audited continuously to measure the impact of the project and the number of RCC to be issued, and ensure the project’s eligibility. KIIs should represent processes that can be measured automatically. A project should have 5-10 KIIs.
KIIs that are directly linked to the project’s main function/output (such as mass of waste recycled/reconditioned, kWh in biogas production…) must be accounted for. KIIs should cover values that are important in calculating avoided GHG emissions in the LCA, plus values that demonstrate continued adherence to eligibility criteria.
Sources for each KII must be identified in the Monitoring Plan in the PDD, and must be:
auditable and documented: a process can be put in place that leads to these results. It is not subject to interpretation.
digitalized: sources will ultimately be associated with carbon credits, they must be at least digitized if not already digital.
A Monitoring Plan is provided in the PDD that defines the source, frequency, and responsible party of measurement for each KII. This facilitates the ongoing, regular verification processes to ensure data quality in project monitoring. On a regular basis (every 3, 6, or 12 months), Project Developers upload KIIs to the Impact Certification Platform for monitoring and verification of their impact.
Quality assurance and quality control is ensured by requiring verifiable evidence for each KII.
Minimum requirements for a Monitoring Plan are defined at the methodology level, but individual projects may require monitoring of extra elements. The Monitoring Plan is created by the Riverse Certification team for each project, and PDs can accept it or request modifications. The Monitoring Plan is reviewed by the VVB during the validation audit.
Failure to adhere to the Monitoring Plan, for example omitting a KII measurement due to unexpected interruption or errors in monitoring equipment or procedures, shall result in conservative estimation of the concerned KII that results in a deduction of carbon credits.
The sources and KIIs proposed in the Monitoring Plan are documented and submitted annually in the Monitoring Report.
The VVB delivers a verification opinion certificate for each verification, which is made publicly available on the Riverse Registry.
Additionally, spot checks are conducted by the Certification team to ensure that the project’s mitigation activity occurs as described in the PDD.
Once the Monitoring Report and KII’s source are audited:
For projects completing ex-post validation and verification simultaneously, or for subsequent verifications (e.g., in years 2, 3, etc.), the verified amount of RCCs are issued directly.
Upon credit issuance, the PD must have an activated account with the Riverse registry, where All RCCs are issued, transacted, and retired.
Projects may choose to issue credits more frequently than their verification audit interval by opting for continuous issuance. Continuous issuance eligibility requires that a project:
Operate for at least one month with at least one verification audit showing minimal discrepancies.
Demonstrate the ability to provide data at the desired continuous frequency.
Develop a continuous issuance Monitoring Plan.
Request and receive approval from a VVB and the Riverse Certification team.
The steps for continuous issuance include:
Project Developers submit data continuously to the Riverse Impact Certification Platform, which automatically calculates GHG emission avoidance/removal
Calculations and proof are checked by the Riverse Certification Team
A project's validated status may be affected by:
Revisions to Riverse Standard Documentation or Methodology:
If the Riverse Standard Documentation or methodology used in the project validation has been updated, PDs must use the latest version for the subsequent verification of RCCs.
Ineligibility: If revisions render the project ineligible, it cannot issue credits at the next verification, though existing credits remain on the registry.
Compliance Requirements: For revisions requiring proof of compliance, the PD must demonstrate adherence in the next Monitoring Report.
Major Changes in Project Scope or Operations:
Required Updates: Significant changes in operations, processes, baseline scenario, technologies, or scale require the PD to update GHG quantification and eligibility in the next Monitoring Report.
For both revisions and major changes, the following apply:
Verification by VVB: The VVB audits all changes summarized in the Monitoring Report to ensure they comply with Riverse Standard Rules and the selected methodology uphold project integrity.
Updated LCA: All changes must be reflected in an updated LCA to ensure ongoing accuracy and conservatism.
The maximum duration of the crediting period is 5 years. This means that for 5 years after the start of the crediting period, the validation and Monitoring Plan is valid, and verification may be performed by following the Monitoring Plan requirements. At the end of the crediting period, the project must be renewed. For renewed projects, the crediting period shall be the total length of the combined crediting periods.
Preparation of a new PDD, with updated responses to all eligibility criteria, updated GHG reduction quantification, and an updated selection of a baseline scenario
Validation audit
Site audit
Stakeholder consultation
Project validation review
Project status is related to the different steps in the certification process.
V3.1
This methodology covers projects that produce biogas from anaerobic digestion of agricultural products, residues and wastes. It includes both energy production from biogas and the production of digestate, a valuable organic amendment.
Methodology name
Biogas from anaerobic digestion
Version
3.1
Methodology ID
RIV-ENGY-01-ADGAS-V3.1
Release date
October 30th, 2024
Status
In use
VVBs shall have a valid accreditation from either:
ISO 14065 or equivalent
COFRAC ISO:17029 or equivalent
Approval as a Designated Operational Entity (DOE) under UNFCCC-CDM, with scopes: 1, 4, 5 6 or 13
The VVB company shall prove more than 5 years of auditing experience, including at least 2 years in environmental/sustainability auditing (refer to Structure and competencies
CVs of the lead auditors
Proof of work on at least 2 projects within the sector within the 2 previous years
At application review and on yearly basis the VVB shall:
Prove that the company is financially sound
Disclose the Riverse program any negative media coverage
Disclose any legal/juridical proceedings
The VVB must demonstrate its knowledge of and experience related to a specific sector on which it can conduct the VVB tasks.
This sector should be one of the following:
Industrial circular economy solutions
Bioenergies
Biomass carbon removal and storage
Construction sector
Engineered removals
Upon receipt of the application, the Riverse Secretariat reviews the information provided and responds once the review is complete.
Rejection: Riverse rejects applications where it determines that the applicant does not possess the required competencies, specified in the section above.
Approval: Riverse approves the application and sends documents to be signed.
Riverse Secretariat organizes training with the Certification team, on the Riverse Standard and the Impact Certification Platform. Methodologic specific training could be planned depending on the scope of the accreditation.
Once all the above is completed, the Riverse Secretariat delivers an accreditation to the VVB. It can start working with projects seeking validation under the Riverse program.
The VVB organization is added as an approved VVB on Riverse’s website.
Each VVB must employ a minimum of two auditors: one Auditor leader and one Internal reviewer, in addition to the wider audit team. This policy ensures that the Audit Team for every project includes at least two auditors, one to serve as the audit team leader and one to serve as the Internal Reviewer. The audit team may also include additional auditors, local experts, content experts, and/or translators. The Audit Leader is the main contact person for project verification.
The Team Leader must demonstrate:
Knowledge of the Riverse Standard and accompanying documents;
Knowledge of and experience related to the framework for emissions avoidance or removals project;
Competency leading audits and coordinating team members.
The audit team must demonstrate collective knowledge and expertise in:
The Riverse Standard Rules, methodologies, and relevant procedures, as well as specific expertise in the project type/activity;
The GHG emission avoidance/removal accounting methodology(ies) applied by the project, including activity data and emissions factors;
Data sampling techniques, including risk weighting and statistical significance calculation;
Project baselines, removals, and sequestration;
Concepts such as additionality, leakage and permanence;
Risk assessment techniques;
Data monitoring, auditing, and assurance;
Desk-based reviews of documents, data, and records;
Validation and verification techniques, to assess accuracy and appropriateness of gathered evidence; and
Preparation of validation and verification reports.
The on-the-ground audit team must demonstrate knowledge and expertise in:
Country-specific knowledge/language skills;
Interviewing, listening, and observing; and
Sensitivity towards socio-economic matters and environmental and social safeguards.
Appropriate checks must be completed through:
A Internal Reviewer, approved by Riverse as a lead auditor, to perform a final QA/QC (Quality Assurance/Quality Control) review attesting to accuracy of data. The Internal Reviewer is not part of any direct validation or verification activities and shall remain neutral.
A Conflict of Interest (COI) form that is submitted to Riverse’s Certification team when an audit team is contracted for validation or verification. The VVB is the responsible party for a Riverse audit. VVBs must ensure that individual validators and verifiers are qualified with the proper training and skills to conduct verification activities.
CVs of Lead Auditors (Lead Auditor and Internal Reviewer) and a COI form should be submitted to the Certification team for approval prior to carrying out validation/verification services for a project.
To maintain impartiality and credibility, and reduce complacency and bias, a single VVB may conduct a maximum of three (3) sequential verifications for a specific project.
Upon reaching this limit, the Project Developer is required to engage a different VVB for subsequent verifications. The Project Developer shall be granted a transition period of six (6) months to engage a new VVB for the subsequent verification.
Project developers must maintain comprehensive records of all verifications, including the VVBs involved, to demonstrate compliance with this rule.
Regular audits will be conducted to ensure Project Developers adhere to this rule. Non-compliance may result in penalties or suspension of the project's validation status.
Regular monitoring ensures that VVBs consistently perform accurate, impartial and timely validation and verification audits.
The following metrics will be employed to evaluate a VVB's performance:
Timeliness: Adherence to stipulated timelines for project validation and verification.
Accuracy: Correctness of validation and verification processes, calculations, and conclusions.
Consistency: Uniform application of requirements and methodologies across different projects.
Communication: Effectiveness and clarity in communication with Project Developers and other stakeholders.
Integrity: Adherence to ethical guidelines, including conflict of interest declarations.
Each VVB is required to submit an annual Performance Report that details its activities, challenges, and areas of improvement relating to its work with the Riverse certification process. This report should provide insights into the VVB's verification approach, methodologies employed, and training undertaken.
The Standard Secretariat annually reviews the annual Performance Reports and assess VVBs based on the established performance metrics. VVBs are encouraged to continually enhance their skills, methodologies, and processes. Training resources, workshops, and seminars will be provided to support this endeavor.
V1.0
This is a Transformation Module and covers the cradle to grave impacts of major infrastructure and machinery. This module is part of the Riverse BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
This module covers the embodied emissions from production and end of life of major infrastructure and machinery used for BiCRS projects. Specific infrastructure and machinery vary by project, and may include but are not limited to:
pyrolysis/gasification reactors*
feedstock shredders, grinders, dryers and conveyors*
building structure*
concrete foundations*
cables used in large quantities
silos and storage facilities
gas cleaning systems
onsite pipelines
Materials that shall be prioritized are those that are expected to contribute the most to GHG emissions, due to large quantities used and the emission intensity of the material. This includes, for example, steel and its alloys, concrete, virgin aluminum, and copper. Other materials that may be considered, but are lower priority because they contribute fewer GHG emissions, include glass, ceramics, various types of plastics and recycled aluminum. Materials not mentioned here may be omitted. Electronic components (e.g. wiring, circuit boards, screens...) are not included due to their small impact and difficulty in data collection.
There are no eligibility criteria requirements specific to this module. Eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and methodologies:
The GHG reduction quantification instructions from all other modules used by the project must be used in conjunction with the present module in order to obtain full life-cycle GHG reduction quantifications.
No Baseline scenario shall be considered by default for this module.
Project Developers may choose between two modeling options:
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 1. These data shall be provided once during validation, and made publicly available.
Table 1 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for initial project certification and validation. Two asterisks (**) indicate which data are optional, where a conservative default choice will be applied
Data shall be reported in terms of items (e.g. pyrolysis reactor) and the materials that make up each item (e.g. stainless steel, ceramics).
Material amounts may be directly provided in the sources, or may be calculated using basic conversions based on a primary source plus justified conversion factors (e.g. density).
No other secondary data sources are used in this module.
If the project undergoes ex-ante validation, estimations and calculations may be accepted instead of measured primary data. These shall be replaced by measured primary data upon verification. Any estimates and calculations should be justified with:
process engineering documents
technical specifications for machinery
measured data from previous projects or from the scientific literature
statistics or databases
Note that conservative estimates and calculations shall always be made to avoid overestimating provisional credits.
Infrastructure and machinery have significant GHG emissions over their entire lifespan. However, for the purpose of issuing carbon credits, these emissions must be distributed proportionally across the specific verification period under review ("amortized"), rather than being counted entirely upfront.
The lifetimes provided in Table 2 shall be used by default for various types of items. Note that they are very conservative estimates for lifetimes in order to avoid over-crediting, and due to the high uncertainty around the durability of such items. Project Developers may provide proof to justify a different lifetime, subject to the approval of the VVB and the Riverse Certification team.
Table 2 Assumed expected lifetimes are presented for various types of machinery and infrastructure.
The estimated lifetimes presented in Table 2 are assumptions.
The end of life waste treatment methods are assumed, because it is impossible to know what waste treatment methods will be common many years in the future.
First all total GHG emissions from infrastructure and machinery are quantified.
Then they are amortized to one year based on the expected lifetime of each item.
Finally they can be normalized to the functional unit of 1 tonne of carbon storage solution, based on the amount of carbon storage solution generated during the verification year.
They can optionally be normalized to the Production Batch, or to the tonne of carbon storage solution in a given Production Batch, for informational purposes only. RCCs are ultimately verified and issued based on the annual processes.
For each material, Project Developers shall provide the item it corresponds to (e.g. steel for pyrolysis reactor, steel for silo...) and the amount used in the item. Items may be composed of multiple materials, or only one main material. Default lifetimes provided in Table 2 shall be applied, unless Project Developers justify a different lifetime.
Although it is more precise to accurately measure and report all machinery and infrastructure, this represents a large data collection burden for a life cycle stage that is not expected to be a major contributor to GHG emissions in many BiCRS projects.
The proxy represents a global average biomass gasification factory, so it is adapted by replacing heat and electricity inputs with country-specific sources. It includes the production and waste treatment of buildings, facilities, dryer, gasifier, communication equipment, and gas treatment and conditioning equipment.
Uncertainty may come from project data, but this is estimated to be negligible, since it is required to come from a primary source.
The uncertainty of the assumptions in this module is assessed below:
There is high uncertainty in default expected lifetimes for infrastructure and machinery items, and results are very sensitive to this parameter. Conservative values within a reasonable range were taken.
There is high uncertainty in the future waste treatment methods, but results are not very sensitive to this parameter.
There is moderate uncertainty in assuming that the selection of ecoinvent processes for a given material/item are representative of all its uses.
It is expected that the overall project emissions will typically not be very sensitive to the infrastructure and machinery module emissions and uncertainty, since they usually make up a small fraction of the total emissions. The uncertainty for projects from this module is therefore estimated to be low. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects that have significant GHG impacts from infrastructure and machinery.
No default monitoring plan is required for this module because data are expected to be reported and calculated only once per crediting period.
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
The table below presents a non-exhaustive selection of Ecoinvent activities that may be used in the GHG reduction calculations for this module. Additional activities may be used for any project, if the following selection does not cover all relevant activities.
Table A1 List of ecoinvent 3.10 processes used in the GHG reduction quantification model, all processes are from the cutoff database
Project developers shall demonstrate that they meet all eligibility criteria outlined in the Riverse Standard Rules and described below with a specific focus on biogas from anaerobic digestion.
Eligibility criteria that do not require specific methodology instructions are not described here. This includes:
Measurability
Real
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
No additional measures for double issuance are required under this methodology, because double issuance among actors in the supply chain is unlikely.
Common co-benefits of biogas from anaerobic digestion projects, and their sources of proof, are detailed in Table 1. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Summary of common co-benefits provided by electronic device refurbishing projects. Co-benefits are organized under the United Nation Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDGs) framework.
The biomethane generated and injected into the gas grid must be a valid substitute for natural gas, as modeled in the baseline scenario.
This is typically already required by energy companies that manage the gas network that the biomethane is injected into. Project Developers shall provide contracts with the relevant energy company, where clauses require the final product to meet specific characteristics making it substitutable for natural gas.
The co-product of anaerobic digestion, digestate, must be a valid substitute for mineral fertilizer, which digestate is assumed to replace in the baseline scenario. Numerous scientific studies have confirmed that digestate has a high fertilization value, sometimes . Fertilization value is largely dependent on nutrient concentration, which shall be measured via laboratory tests for a sample of digestate from each project.
The amount of mineral fertilizer avoided in the project scenario shall correspond to the nutrient content of the digestate (see the Project avoided mineral fertilizer section for more details). This ensures that digestate is modeled as a realistic substitute for mineral fertilizer based on project-specific data.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Projects must follow all European, national, and local environmental regulations related to, for example, anaerobic digestion management, feedstock storage, feedstock sourcing, digestate storage, and digestate spreading.
To be eligible under this methodology, projects shall use no more than 10% dedicated crops in their feedstock input mixture in the first year of the crediting period. This decreases to 5% in the second year, and 3% in the remaining years. This shall be monitored each year during the crediting period.
It is environmentally preferable to use waste, manure, and slurry as feedstocks rather than intermediate energy crops, but this may not be preferable to farmers/biogas producers for financial or productivity reasons. Although this methodology does not impose a strict threshold on intermediate energy crops in the feedstock mix, the example below highlights how biogas producers are incentivized to use waste, manure, and slurry as feedstocks.
Use of dedicated crops, leading to competition for food and agricultural land;
Reliance on energy crops rather than waste, manure, and/or slurry;
Distant transport of feedstock inputs (>100 km) leading to increased greenhouse gas emissions from transport;
Energy intensive processing;
Methane leaks from digestion process and storage facilities;
Leaching of runoff from manure, slurry or digestate storage, increasing eutrophication risks;
Leaching of excess nutrients from digestate spreading, increasing eutrophication risks;
Air quality, volatile odors from manure, slurry or digestate storage;
Landscape conversion from rural to industrial;
Workers health and safety.
There is a risk of activity shifting leakage related to biomass feedstock, potentially causing indirect land-use change (ILUC). This occurs when deforestation or conversion of natural ecosystems happens elsewhere to compensate for agricultural land lost to feedstock cultivation.
Project Developers shall determine and transparently communicate in the PDD the leakage risk from their biomass feedstock (see example below).
The risk level is based on the criteria for sustainable biomass and the definitions of low and high ILUC risk for biofuels, bioliquids, and biomass fuels.
Projects using less than 90% low ILUC risk feedstock inputs are ineligible for Riverse Carbon Credits.
Low ILUC risk biomass is defined as biomass that does not cause significant expansion into land with high carbon stock. This includes but is not limited to:
Wastes and residues
Manure, slurry
Straw
Agri-industry processing residues (e.g. sugar beet pulp)
Cover crops, catch crops, intermediate crops, and intercrops
rye, maize, sunflower, alfalfa, and triticale silage, from crops grown outside the main growing period
Bioenergy crops on marginal or degraded land
energy crops grown at any time of the year, if the Project Developer can prove that the land was unable to be cultivated in the past 5 years.
Feedstock inputs that are high ILUC risk include but are not limited to:
Whole-crop maize cultivated during the main growing season
Maize silage cultivated during the main growing season
Example 1
Example 2
Leakage may occur when emissions are shifted upstream or downstream in the supply chain and outside the project’s direct scope. These emissions shall be included by default in the GHG reduction quantification, as part of the life-cycle approach. The upstream and downstream emissions included in the quantification are detailed in the Baseline scenario and Project scenario sections
The scope of the reduction is the system boundary used in GHG quantification, described in the Baseline scenario and Project scenario sections below.
This shall be proven using the GHG reduction quantification method described below.
V2.0
This is a Carbon Storage Module and covers the biochar application to soils. This module is part of the Riverse BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
This module covers industrial biochar projects that meet all of the following criteria:
Biochar may be applied directly to soils or incorporated into soil-related products, such as soil additives, horticultural substrates, potting soils, fertilizer mixes, or compost.
Projects may be designed to prioritize bio-oil or bioenergy production, where biochar is the co-product. Such projects may still be eligible for removal Riverse Carbon Credits under this module, if they meet all criteria outlined herein.
This module also covers any potential avoided horticultural products from the use of biochar.
This module issues removal RCCs on the basis of biochar end use/delivery, i.e. application to soils and permanent storage, not on the basis of biochar production.
The Project Developer and entity eligible for receiving carbon finance may be either:
the operator of the biochar production site, or
land owners or managers who purchase biochar and apply it to their soil.
Pyrolyzer and gasification equipment manufacturers are not eligible Project Developers.
Specifically, the definition of a production batch follows the definition, where pyrolysis temperature and biomass feedstock composition must not change by more than 20%.
Measurements and reporting are performed at the production batch level. Verification and credit issuance may be done per production batch, or annually on the cumulative production batches from that year.
A production batch has a maximum validity of 365 days, after which biochar shall be considered part of a different production batch even if conditions are unchanged. In other words, the production batch ID number resets and a new production batch is created, and new monitoring requirements applied, after 365 days, regardless of if feedstock or pyrolysis conditions change or not.
The eligibility criteria requirements specific to this module are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and methodologies:
Permanence is ensured by measuring one of the following characteristics of biochar that are known indicators of carbon stability:
1000 year pathway: Random reflectance. The fraction of the biochar that has a random reflectance of 2% or higher can be considered inertinite, which is an extremely stable, permanent storage of organic carbon.
The distinction between the two permanence horizons is supplementary, qualitative information that does not affect the inherent attributes of the removal RCC.
If only one party intends to issue carbon credits, this must be proven through signed agreements, minimizing the risk of double counting.
If both the biochar producer and the farmer intend to issue carbon credits, they must agree on how to divide the annual biochar production for credit issuance. The credited biochar amount must be tracked and reported separately, governed by agreements outlining which party receives credits.
Common co-benefits of biochar application to soil, and their sources of proof, are detailed in Table 1. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Summary of common co-benefits provided by biochar application to soils projects. Co-benefits are organized under the United Nation Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDGs) framework.
If Project Developers can prove that their biochar product replaces a specific and known amount of a specific product, (e.g. a known fraction of a horticultural substrate mix), then the product may be considered as replaced and avoided. The Project Developer shall justify the amount of material actually replaced by biochar, and may not simply use a 1:1 mass replacement ratio. A non-exhaustive list of possible replaced products include:
Horticultural peat/peat moss
Lime
Perlite and vermiculite
Synthetic mineral fertilizers (only when biochar is used as an ingredient in fertilizer mixes, not when it is directly applied to soils)
Project Developers must prove that:
the biochar is an appropriate and realistic substitute for the avoided product, and
that the user of the biochar actually uses less of the horticultural product than they did previously
In other words, it is not sufficient to prove that biochar could technically substitute products, because there is high uncertainty in which products biochar would actually substitute. It must be shown using operations tracking or invoices from the biochar user that they actually use less of the replaced product, thanks to the addition of biochar.
By default, it shall be assumed that biochar application to soils does not replace any measurable, verifiable product.
If only removal RCCs are issued, then this eligibility criteria is not applicable.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Projects must follow all national, local, and European (if located in Europe) environmental regulations related to, for example, pyrolysis, gasification, waste feedstock management, and biochar spreading on soils.
Biochar applied to soils must be below the pollutant concentration thresholds outlined in Table 2, defined by the (for WBC-Agro). This shall be measured for each production batch.
Table 2 The thresholds for pollutant concentrations allowed in biochar, as detailed in the .
Heavy metal or other pollutants in biochar applied to agricultural soils
The GHG reduction quantification instructions from all other modules used by the project must be used in conjunction with the present module in order to obtain full life-cycle GHG reduction quantifications.
The system boundary of this quantification section starts at the arrival of biochar at the site of permanent incorporation/application (i.e. field for spreading, mixing into potting soil...) and ends at the biochar end of life, after accounting for decay and re-emission in its end use application.
GHG emissions covered in this module include:
Permanent carbon storage modeling
Production of avoided baseline scenario materials
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 2. These data shall be provided for each production batch and made publicly available.
Table 2 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for initial project certification and validation. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be monitored and updated during verification (see Monitoring Plan section).
No other secondary data sources are used in this module.
By default, biochar application to soils does not replace any product.
The baseline scenario for the purpose of Removal vs Avoidance RCCs issuance is detailed below.
For removal RCCs, there is no baseline from this module because it is assumed that there is no significant share of the project activity already occurring in business-as-usual. Therefore, the baseline for removal credits is zero and is omitted from calculations.
By default, it shall be assumed that biochar application to soils does not replace any measurable, verifiable product.
If Project Developers can prove that their biochar product replaces a specific and known amount of a specific product, then the product may be considered as replaced and avoided.
This approach is based on research from , and is rooted in organic petrology and geochemistry disciplines. This approach is built upon research showing that fractions of inertinite in biochar samples are:
and will not re-release their carbon for at least 1000 years.
The baseline scenario selection (if applicable) has low uncertainty, because the specific circumstances, amount and type of baseline material must be proven by the Project Developer.
The equations and models have low to moderate uncertainty. The model for 100-year permanence from has moderate uncertainty because it is a model fitted to experimental data, which always introduces variability. The equations for 1000-year permanence from have low uncertainty because they are basic conversion equations.
The assumption that biochar characteristics are the same throughout the production batch is low, thanks to the strict definition of a production batch ensuring low-variability, and the exhaustive sampling requirements ensuring a representative sample.
The uncertainty at the module level is estimated to be low. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects using this module.
The following indicators shall be measured for each production batch:
Carbon content (organic and/or total)
moisture content
random reflectance (only if applying for 1000-year permanence)
Measurements shall be performed by laboratories with at least one quality assurance accreditation, such as:
ISO/IEC 17025
CEN/TS 17225-1
ISO 10694
Unaccredited laboratories from academic settings shall be evaluated on a case by case basis by the VVB and the Riverse Certification team.
The recommended approach sampling requirements are based on the following sources:
One representative sample per Production Batch shall be created and sent for laboratory testing. This sample ensures that any within-batch variability is captured in the measurements.
Table 1 details the number of composite samples that should be taken per Production Batch to obtain one representative sample, based on the .
The representative sample size should be be 24 liters * the n number of composite samples per Production Batch detailed in Table 1.
Table 1
The should be followed for taking composite samples. Those requirements are summarized below.
The first sample must be taken within 7 days of the start of the Production Batch.
To prepare one sample, 8 sub-samples of 3 liters each are taken at intervals of at least one hour directly at the discharge of the freshly produced material. This shall be repeated for three consecutive days.
The 24 samples are combined to form one composite sample.
The first sample must be taken within 7 days of the start of the Production Batch.
Samples may be taken from a well-mixed pile of biochar produced within the last 7 days.
The amount of biochar used for one sample shall be equivalent to at least one day's production.
24 sub-samples of 3 liters each shall be taken from different spots in the pile.
The 24 subsamples are combined to form one composite sample.
The representative sample shall be homogenized by the Project Developer or by the laboratory that performs testing. The biochar shall be ground to a size of <3 mm.
The ground sample is mixed by shoveling the pile three times from one pile to another.
A sub-sample of 1.5 liters shall be taken from 15 spots in the mixed pile.
The 15 sub-samples are re-combined, and then mixed by shoveling the pile three times from one pile to another.
From the mixed pile of the combined sub-samples, 15 subsamples of 150 ml each should be taken at 15 different spots in the pile and combined. This combined homogenized representative cross sample is used for laboratory testing.
A one-liter retention sample shall be collected each day that biochar is produced. These samples should be combined for storage over the calendar month. Retention samples must be stored for a minimum of two years.
For each Production Batch, Project Developers shall submit a Sampling Record for verification to prove their adherence to the requirements above. Sampling Records shall include the following information for each sample taken:
Date of sampling
Amount of biochar sampled
Description of representative sampling process (either followed the recommended approach, or describe the individual approach)
Sample ID
Visual description and observation of biochar
Description of any potential anomalies
Proof of retention sampling
Photos showing the date, sample ID, and amount of biochar that is included in the present Sampling Record
Biochar projects often use carbon financing to launch new projects, and validation is done ex-ante before the project begins operations. In this case, are estimated using reasonable project data estimates. These provisional credit estimates are converted to verified issued credits upon verification using real project data. Required project data estimates are detailed below.
A project may use one quantification approach for ex-ante estimation, and use a different approach for verification.
measurements from samples from pilot phase or previous operations for the same site (preferred option),
equipment manufacturer data/quotes/estimates,
scientific literature for similar project conditions, or
verified measurements from other projects under similar conditions.
Project Developers must prove that they plan to perform pyrolysis at a temperature of at least 500°C.
Project Developers shall provide either:
When validation is conducted on non-operating projects that are in the planning stage, Project Developers shall prove during validation that the biochar is reasonably expected with strong certainty to end up in its intended use (application to soil). This shall be provided by either:
Option 1: Signed agreements with the end-buyers that they intend to purchase the agreed upon quantity of biochar annually (preferable).
Option 2: If the project is in planning stages and has not yet secured a buyer, a signed agreement from the Project Developer of their intended buyer/user of biochar. Note that the delivery risk is higher for this option, so Option 1 is preferable. An increased discount factor may be applied.
Upon verification, once the project has started operating, Project Developers shall prove that biochar has been used in the intended application for each Production Batch, (e.g. incorporated into soils, added to fertilizer mixes…). This shall be done in Biochar Application Verification Reports that shall contain all of the following:
Tracking records of the purchase and/or delivery of the biochar to its end use point of use, specifying the date, amount of biochar and Production Batch ID.
GPS coordinates of all end use points with according amounts of biochar, if known to the Project Developer.
Company name and individual contact information for each buyer/user of biochar, for traceability and random checking by VVBs.
Photo diary of biochar application, including photos of for example the biochar being delivered, tags/labels with information, road signs during delivery, process of biochar spreading.
Monitoring Plans for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each Production Batch:
Description of the pyrolysis conditions (temperature and residence time) and any variability in the process
Amount of biochar produced, in tonnes of fresh biochar
Moisture content of biochar
Organic carbon content
Monitoring Plans for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each calendar year:
Number of Production Batches
Total amount of biochar produced per year, in tonnes of fresh biochar
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
The table below presents a non-exhaustive selection of Ecoinvent activities that may be used in the GHG reduction calculations for this module. Additional activities may be used for any project, if the following selection does not cover all relevant activities.
Table A1 List of ecoinvent 3.10 processes used in the GHG reduction quantification model, all processes are from the cutoff database
This page describes the changes in the Biochar application to soils module.
Policy
The purpose of this document is to:
Inform Project Developers and carbon credit buyers to avoid making misleading claims about the greenhouse gas emission reductions their activities enable
Double use occurs when a single carbon credit is used and/or retired twice (by two entities, or two times by the same entity). This is prevented on the Riverse registry, where Riverse carbon credits are traced with a unique identification number from issuance to retirement.
An immutable certificate is generated upon retirement, available to the public on the Riverse Registry, with the following information:
Entity that retired the carbon credit
Vintage year
Mechanism (avoidance or removal)
Date of retirement
Credit IDs
Credit source (project name and information)
Any applicable credit labels (e.g. CORSIA)
Refer to the Riverse Procedures Manual Section 9.7 RCC management- Retirement for more detailed information.
There are no project-specific requirements related to double use.
Double issuance occurs when multiple carbon credits are issued for one greenhouse gas (GHG) reduction or removal activity. This can occur in two ways:
Two carbon credits are issued for the same amount of emission reductions or removals that actually occurs
Two different entities (e.g., the manufacturer of the material/equipment and the user), both claim the same GHG avoidance or removal and request carbon credit issuance for it, to the same or two different crediting standards.
Where there exists a risk of overlapping claims of GHG avoidance and removal between actors in the same supply chain, projects shall clearly delineate the GHG accounting boundary of the GHG avoidance and removal activity. The Riverse Standard shall only issue one carbon credit for the GHG avoidance or removals that occur within the project’s GHG accounting boundary, and not to any overlapping activities.
Methodologies may specify requirements for projects to reduce risk of double issuance between actors in the same supply chain by, for example:
Obtaining signed agreements from upstream suppliers or downstream users
Adding relevant clauses in sales contracts
Providing information to users via marketing, packaging, or other outreach
Projects shall not be eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits if the Certification team identifies overlaps of GHG accounting boundaries with another project’s GHG accounting boundaries, within the same or any other crediting program.
If the project is already registered under another crediting program, and intends to register and/or issue credits under the Riverse Standard, the project must prove that the same emission avoidance and removals will not be issued under both crediting programs. The project shall provide the following information related to the project status under the other crediting program to Riverse:
Project unique identifier
Vintage period(s) and corresponding volumes
Signed letter from the Project Developer that it has informed the other crediting program representative about its intention to register to the Riverse Standard and requesting the deactivation or putting on hold the project with this other crediting program.
If the project has already issued credits under another crediting program, the project may be permitted to be certified under the Riverse Standard after deactivating registration with the other crediting program. Only GHG avoidance and removal units of a different vintage and/or scope, that have not already been issued under the other crediting program, shall be eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits.
Double claiming occurs when the same GHG emission avoidance or removal is claimed by two different entities towards their mitigation targets, inventories, or pledges. The following sections outline requirements to prevent double claiming across several scenarios.
If one of the following conditions are met, Project Developers shall follow requirements in 3.2.2 through 3.2.5.
the project issues carbon credits for use towards a nationally determined contribution (NDC), or
the project issues carbon credits for a domestic climate mitigation target of a jurisdiction or nation other than the host country, or
the project issues RCC to be used under CORSIA.
Obtain an authorisation by the project’s host country, to use the project carbon credits for the intended purpose. This authorization will be made publicly available with the project documentation, and updated as needed.
Obtain confirmation from the project’s host country, that the corresponding carbon credits will be granted a corresponding adjustment. This written confirmation will be made publicly available with the project documentation, and updated as needed.
Ensure the project’s compliance with host country regulations/guidance relating to the voluntary use of carbon credits that are also accounted towards a country’s NDC.
If the following conditions are met, Project Developers shall follow requirements in 3.3.3.
the host country has a regulated domestic climate mitigation target and/or national emissions trading scheme, and
the project’s GHG removal/avoidance units fall within the scope of the host country’s domestic climate mitigation target and/or national emissions trading scheme, and
the GHG avoidance or removal units may also be claimed by another country, jurisdiction, or entity
Obtain a letter from the host country/regional regulator stating that the GHG removal or avoidance unit is not accounted for under the host country’s domestic mitigation target and/or national emissions trading scheme, or that an accounting adjustment or cancellation has been made.
If the Project Developer seeks to issue credits with another GHG-related environmental credit framework for a different time period than GHG avoidance and removal units sought under the Riverse Standard, the Project Developer shall provide evidence that the other GHG-related environmental credits will not be issued for the same time period as the impact credited under the Riverse Standard.
Where the Project Developer is a buyer or seller of a product within a supply chain, and implements a project that generates a GHG avoidance/removal that changes the GHG inventory of another entity within the supply chain (e.g. through insetting), there is a risk that the other entity upstream or downstream within the supply chain could double claim the GHG avoidance/removal.
The Project Developer shall
inform entities throughout the supply chain that they are claiming and reporting the emission reductions from the associated intervention,
retire the associated Riverse Carbon Credits on the registry on their own behalf,
and inform Riverse of the associated change in their product's emission footprint through an issued statement.
Any transfer of GHG removal/avoidance units from one entity to another within the supply chain must be documented through an authorized project representative issuing a signed statement detailing the transfer that has occurred.
Situations may arise where two end users seek different types of claims (e.g. contributory vs. offsetting claims) from GHG avoidance/removal units issued by the same Project Developer from the same project. Under such circumstances, the company shall seek guidance from reporting companies, the GHG Protocol, and other accounting tracking mechanisms that emerge.
Projects that aim to issue RCCs that meet the requirements of Article 6 of the Paris Agreement, or other Paris Agreement-related programs such as CORSIA, must be differentiated from RCCs that are only eligible to be used for voluntary carbon market purposes. This is to prevent double counting between the host country’s NDC and the buyer or airline’s own climate targets, accounting and claims. As such, unique Riverse Standard labels can be issued to avoidance or removal credits that meet the requirements of Article 6 and CORSIA.
The Riverse Standard mainly covers projects based in Europe. In the context of Article 6, sellers of Internationally Transferred Mitigation Outcomes (ITMOs) are most likely to be low-income countries, while high-income countries, such as European countries are more likely to be the buyers. This is due to greater financial need, higher emission reduction potential at a lower cost, and the ability for ITMOs to facilitate technology transfer and capacity building in lower-income countries. Furthermore, high-income countries are more likely to purchase ITMOs to take responsibility for historical emissions and meet emission reduction targets.
Therefore, while the Riverse Standard has introduced the use of Riverse Standard labels to enable the use of credits under Article 6, at least in the short term, projects located in Europe are unlikely to become sellers of ITMOs under Article 6. However, seeking the labeling of Riverse Carbon Credits remains an option for Project Developers, since ITMOs may be used for other purposes.
Any project that intends to issue Riverse Carbon Credits for use under Article 6 or CORSIA shall meet any necessary established requirements specifically recognised under Article 6 of the Paris Agreement and CORSIA mechanisms. Projects that meet these requirements, including those relating to double counting and corresponding adjustments, may receive the relevant Riverse Standard labels. These credits will be labeled accordingly and be made available within the Riverse Registry.
Riverse labeled credits may also be used for voluntary carbon market purposes that do not require Article 6 or CORSIA labels but not vice versa.
The Project Developer applying these requirements shall provide evidence to Riverse that the Host Country has applied relevant corresponding adjustments in accordance with Article 6 of the Paris Agreement and its Letter of Authorisation. It shall also provide evidence that the Host Country is and continues to fulfill its obligations required under the relevant Paris Requirements.
The Project Developer shall provide evidence of the appropriate application of a corresponding adjustment within two years of the required application of corresponding adjustments pursuant to Article 6 of the Paris Agreement.
If the Project Developer is unable to provide evidence of the appropriate application of a corresponding adjustment as per 4.2.5 above, Riverse upholds the right to withdraw the Riverse Standard label from carbon credits in the registry and inform all account holders.
Riverse shall prepare and publish regular annual reports prior to April 1st of each calendar year, on the status of Riverse Carbon Credits associated with Article 6 authorisations on its website. The report will provide information relating to Riverse Carbon Credits authorized for use as ITMOs and categorize this data by host country, project activity type, and vintage. This will provide information to fulfill their reporting obligations in accordance with the Paris Agreement.
BiCRS: Marine sub-sediment burial v1.0
07/02/2025
10/03/2025
Battery second life v1.0
04/12/2024
06/01/2025
Biomass Carbon Removal Storage v1.0
12/09/24
12/10/24
Biogas from anaerobic digestion v3.0
27/05/24
28/06/24
Electronic device refurbishing v2.0
23/04/24
24/05/24
Riverse Standard Rules v6
12/03/24
12/04/24
Biobased Construction Materials Methodology v2.0
24/01/24
01/03/24
Riverse Standard Rules for European Greentechs v5
01/02/23
08/03/23
This manual describes the rules and procedures for registering and operating Riverse projects and issuing Riverse Carbon Credits (RCCs). It should be used together with the latest versions of the , , , .
See for full versions of previous documents
Conditional: If the project has high or very high risks of reversal (according to the project evaluation’s Risk Assessment Template), the Project Developer may choose to develop a risk mitigation plan, or contribute an extra 3% of their verified RCCs to the buffer pool. More details are available in the section on Risk Assessment.
RCCs are withdrawn from the buffer pool if there is a reversal event (see details in the section).
The issuance of RCCs is operated by the Certification team once the is fully conducted and all audit certificates are available.
Credits not yet transferred: an amount of credits corresponding to the number of excess credits issued for the given project's shall be frozen during the investigation, and canceled.
A retirement certificate can be downloaded from the Riverse Registry. Additionally, all retirement transactions are publicly available on the registry (see example ).
The Project Developer (PD) submits a (PA) to start the certification process. This step is free of charge for PDs.
The PA form is available online . It contains the following information:
To continue the certification process, the Project Developer must sign the Terms & Conditions agreement and accept the .
Upon signature of the , the PD is given access to the Impact Certification Platform and the project is registered on the registry.
Follow the to ensure the PD is registered properly
All sites where the PD operates the project’s mitigation activity shall be registered during the validation phase using the . This includes all factories, facilities, or operations under direct control of the PD, whose activities are issued Riverse Carbon Credits.
If the PD chooses a partner to register projects under the Riverse Standard, they must sign a Letter of Delegation (template provided ).
Validation audits shall comply with the latest version of Bodies, available on the website under Standard Documentation. A minimum of two auditors from an accredited VVB must be involved for each project audit, ensuring a peer review mechanism to maintain accuracy and integrity.
The audit shall validate the following elements (more details in the ):
Projects that issue less than 10,000 RCCs per year may choose between an in-person or remote audit. A remote audit is allowed because 1) it eases the time and cost burdens of PDs and VVBs and 2) it is satisfactory for the industrial projects, which usually consist of small, unchanging, easily documentable sites. For details on the remote auditing process, refer to the
Projects must undergo a stakeholder consultation in parallel with or before the validation audit through the .
The shall be used for consistent stakeholder consultations. This letter articulates the project's intent to issue RCCs as a means to finance its operations and monetize its mitigation activities.
This feedback is gathered by the Certification team and analyzed in the . The feedback received is added to the PDD in an Appendix and made available on the Riverse Registry.
Once validated by the VVB, the PDD is sent back to the Riverse Certification team to review the VVB’s remarks, and evaluate feedback from the (see details above).
The Riverse Certification team ensures that the VVB has thoroughly audited the following elements detailed in the :
For ex-post assessments, the project undergoes the simultaneously, which results in RCC issuance.
For ex-ante assessments, the project’s are estimated for the whole crediting period, and are eligible for pre-purchase agreements. The project proceeds to verification after it has started operating.
If concerns and critiques emerge from the stakeholder consultation or VVB report review, the Certification team may decide to subject them to the same process described above in the section.
Verification includes an audit of sources and KIIs listed in the Monitoring Plan. This verification is conducted by a Riverse accredited VVB that assesses the project’s operation according to the .
A project shall undergo regular monitoring and verification. The default period for a verification period is one year. The length of the verification period may vary but shall not exceed two years of operations. If a project does not conduct a verification within 2 years it shall be de-registered and must .
The PD submits KIIs on the Impact Certification Platform to update the GHG quantification and calculate the actual carbon avoidance/removal that occurred during the crediting period. The updated KIIs and any compliance updates (see ) are summarized in the Monitoring Report.
Compliance with Standard Document/methodology updates (see )
For projects that completed ex-ante validation, provisional credits are converted and issued as RCCs (see the )
are made available on the registry
A is performed at the desired frequency (every 3, 6 or 12 months), assessing the compilation of data and proof provided continuously over the previous reporting period
Provisional credits are converted to verified RCCs, and follow the issuance adjustments per the section
Upon renewal, projects must undergo a new validation assessment by performing the following steps, including all elements described in the section.
See the section for corresponding information on credit status.
VVB shall adhere to Riverse and confirm their independence from the market and carbon credits transactions.
VVB shall submit a at each validation or verification process they perform.
VVB must demonstrate knowledge of and experience on the its seeks accreditation for by providing:
The VVB submitted the .
VVB must submit a signed copy of the Riverse , and a signed copy of this current document, Requirements for VVB.
The VVB is responsible for assembling a competent and qualified Audit Team to undertake validation / verification activities before commencement of the activities. It must consider the capabilities and capacities of its staff when building the team and skills mentioned in . The Audit Team must have sector-specific competency in relation to the type of project being validated/verified.
Project Developers are asked to provide feedback on the VVB's performance after each validation and verification process, as part of the This feedback will be integral to the VVB performance review.
See more details on how modules are organized in the .
Items marked with an asterisk are required to be considered in the if they weigh more than 1 tonne.
The system boundary of this quantification section includes the raw material extraction, processing, and end of life waste treatment of major infrastructure and machinery used in the project life cycle (excluding transport machinery, which are covered in the ).
Quantification shall be done once during validation, and GHG emissions shall be allocated temporally to each verification year that credits are issued for (see more details in the section). This module may be considered during monitoring and subsequent verifications only if new infrastructure/machinery are declared by the Project Developer for that year.
The scope of the module, and which infrastructure and machinery items to include, are described in the section.
: This includes detailed measuring, reporting and modeling of important infrastructure and machinery used. Data collection is more difficult, but fewer conservative assumptions/discounts are made.
: For projects where infrastructure and machinery are not large contributors to GHG emissions (see details ), a proxy facility with infrastructure and machinery may be used. Data collection is simple and uncertainty is high, so efforts are taken to ensure this approach overestimates GHG emissions rather than underestimates.
The version 3.10 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in .
If the available emission factors do not accurately represent the project, a different emission factor may be submitted by the Project Developer, and approved by the Riverse Certification team and the VVB. Any emission factor must meet the data requirements outlined in the , and come from traceable, transparent, unbiased, and reputable sources.
For example, if a pyrolysis machine has an expected lifetime of 7 years, and its embodied life cycle GHG emissions are 35 t COeq, then its emissions amortized to 1 year are t COeq/year. For the annual verification and issuance of the project, 5 t COeq would be counted towards the project emissions for the pyrolysis machinery.
The rules outlined at the methodology-level in the shall be applied for allocating GHG emissions between co-products.
Emission factors for items and materials are grouped together under the most common representative type available in ecoinvent. For example, hundreds of ecoinvent processes are available that describe various production, processing, and waste treatment of steel, but only a selection of steel-related processes are made available in the Riverse platform (see options in ).
Project Developers shall select items/materials used among the options in . If the relevant input is not listed, it may be added/considered on a case by case basis, and approved by the Riverse Certification team and the VVB.
represents the total emissions from one item over its service lifetime
represents the amount of the material of type used in that item, in the same units as the emission factor described below
represents the emission factor/s for the material of type in kgCOeq per given unit from ecoinvent. Based on the available ecoinvent process, some materials require compiling raw material, processing, and waste treatment processes, and some already include these multiple steps.
represents the emissions of one item amortized to one year, corresponding to the annual operations for which RCCs are issued
was calculated in Equation 1
represents the expected service lifetime of the item type, as presented in Table 2.
represents the total emissions from this module allocated to the project for the annual verification period
was calculated in Equation 2.
Therefore, Project Developers may choose between a full, detailed model of their infrastructure and machinery using primary data, or a simplified approach using a proxy biomass gasification factory with approximately 400-500 t COeq over the lifetime (see Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent processes details).
If the simplified approach shows that Infrastructure and machinery contribute to more than 5% of the project's induced emissions (not net emissions, including removals), then this life cycle stage is deemed too important for the project and the simplified approach may not be used. The project must use the .
Note that due to high uncertainty in the simplified approach, conservative assumptions will be made that likely lead lead to overestimating project emissions from the infrastructure and machinery life cycle stage. For example, although the ecoinvent process represents a facility with a 50 year lifetime, a 15 year lifetime shall be assumed here (see section). Project Developers shall provide the amount of biomass processes annually, which is used to adjust the default facility to the project size.
a life cycle impact of 400 t COeq and
Therefore, the project would have 200 t COeq from infrastructure and machinery.
is described in Equation 3
represents the annual amount of biomass processed by the project, in tonnes of dry matter
represents the annual amount of biomass processed by the default factility according to ecoinvent
represents the emission factor for the default facility, described above and in
represents the assumed lifetime of the default facility, used to amortize impacts to 1 year. As described above, this is assumed to be 15 years.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the .
The general requirements from the Riverse Procedures Manual still apply, where Project Developers shall declare any major changes during monitoring, such as if a major piece of machinery was replaced, or a new piece of infrastructure was installed. shall then be performed as described in the previous section, using primary data described in Table 1.
To demonstrate additionality, Project Developers shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the .
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate biogas production from anaerobic digestion. It is acceptable if regulations promote or set targets for biogas production, because the resulting increase in biogas production shall be accounted for in the baseline scenario (see section).
At the European Union level, projects automatically pass the regulatory surplus analysis, which has been conducted by the Riverse Climate Team. Although the promotes biogas production/use, it does not require its production. Project Developers are only required to provide a country-level regulatory surplus analysis.
Investment analysis may be used to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the new project investment a financially viable and interesting option. The investment may cover:
the development and launch of a brand new biogas site, or
an expansion to increase production capacity, such as adding new biogas digesters.
Business plans shall be provided as initial proof for investment analysis. During verification, audited financial statements shall be used to demonstrate that the initial estimates from the business plan were reasonable, and that carbon finance was used as initially described for the expected investment.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits.
Barrier analysis may be used to prove that the project faces financial, institutional, or technological barriers to ongoing operations that can only be overcome using carbon finance. Examples include but are not limited to:
Financial barrier: financial analysis proving that the project is operating at a loss, and carbon finance would make it financially viable.
Financial barrier: financial analysis demonstrating that the project is not financially viable, evidenced by net cash being lower than the working capital requirements, or proof that the project is not meeting the projected financial targets (e.g. IRR) in the business plans and loan documents, and that carbon finance would make it financially viable.
Institutional barrier: description of new regulation that the project must make costly changes to comply with, financial analysis showing that the project cannot fund the changes on their own, and carbon finance is necessary to make it viable.
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial statements must be provided as proof. These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers, or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
Project developers shall sign the , committing to follow the requirements outlined in the , including not double using or double issuing carbon credits.
Projects shall comply with the requirements set out in the .
Project Developers shall prove that their project provides at least 2 co-benefits from the (SDGs) framework (and no more than 4).
Project Developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of projects,. The identified risks include:
Biogas from anaerobic digestion projects must prove that they lead to at least a 45% reduction in GHG emissions compared to the baseline scenario. This is aligned with the , as described in the .
See more details on how modules are organized in the .
A production batch is the biochar produced under the same conditions regarding production temperature and feedstock mix. It is assumed that all biochar from the same production batch has similar characteristics (i.e. , moisture content…).
Projects issuing removal RCCs from biochar application to soil may claim one of two different permanence horizons, depending on their method: a permanence horizon of 100 years or 1000 years.
100 year pathway: Hydrogen and organic carbon content (). must be less than 0.7 to be considered eligible for 100-year permanent removals.
These indicators are suitable proof that a substantial fraction of the carbon present in biochar is permanently stable. The specific amount of permanently stored carbon is determined using the models and equations detailed in the section.
These indicators shall be monitored for each production batch according to the Riverse .
Project Developers shall fill in the to evaluate the risk of carbon storage reversal, based on social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
See the section for general requirements on this topic. Since both biochar producers and users are eligible for removal RCCs under this methodology, additional details are provided here.
Project Developers shall prove that their project provides at least 2 co-benefits from the (SDGs) framework (and no more than 4).
Note that avoidance from is covered in a a separate module.
Feedstock sustainability risks shall be taken from the .
Project Developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of projects. The identified risks include:
Quantification shall be done at a minimum for each biochar production batch, and may be done more frequently for .
The version 3.10 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in .
The rules outlined at the methodology-level in the shall be applied for allocating GHG emissions between co-products.
The fraction of biochar with an below 2% does not contribute to any permanent carbon storage. This fraction, classified as semi-inertinite rather than inertinite, likely plays a role in long-term carbon storage. However, due to limited research on its quantification, it is conservatively excluded from this analysis.
All biochar from the same production batch has the same characteristics (e.g. , , ).
According to the Riverse Procedures Manual, this assumption shall be re-assessed at a during the mandatory methodology revision process, and any changes to this assumption would be .
Note that baseline scenario carbon sequestration may be included for the project from the .
For avoidance RCCs, a baseline scenario shall only be considered if the project meets the and is eligible to claim avoidance RCCs.
Examples of ecoinvent processes for these products are presented in .
Note that avoidance from energy co-products is covered in a.
The equations for calculating avoidance are presented in the and shall be applied here.
Project Developers must choose between one of two approaches to quantify the total carbon removals from their biochar product, as described in the . A single approach must be used consistently throughout each reporting period, though a different approach may be chosen for subsequent reporting periods.
, or
e.
This approach is based on research from , and the . It is rooted in soil ecology and soil biochemistry disciplines. The permanent fraction of biochar carbon remaining after 100 years ( ) is modeled according to the local average annual soil temperature.
Soil temperature shall be obtained for the location of each biochar spreading/end use event, using the GPS coordinates provided in the and the global soil temperature dataset from . The Riverse Certification Team can provide soil temperature values for Project Developers based on the provided GPS coordinates.
For verification, Project Developers shall provide primary project data in the form of laboratory measurements for and following the .
Table 3 Soil temperature ranges are categorized and their corresponding c and m regression coefficients are presented, which are used in Eq. 1 below to calculate . Values are taken from .
represented by the fraction of the sample with a Random Reflectance () of .
For verification, Project Developers shall provide primary project data in the form of laboratory measurements for distribution and per production batch following the .
distribution shall be calculated on at least 500 measurements, yielding a distribution diagram similar to the examples in Figure 1.
The fraction of the distribution with an above 2% shall be assumed to equal the fraction of the biochar carbon that is stored permanently for 1000 years. The fraction
The fraction of the distribution with an below 2% shall represent the fraction of biochar carbon that is not permanently stored, and for which no removal RCCs are issued.
Example 1: This biochar sample has heterogenous quality and a wide distribution of measurements. The biochar sample has a mean of 2.12, and 72% of the measurements are above the 2% inertinite threshold. Therefore, this biochar sample has an of 0.72, and 72% of the organic carbon in the sample will be converted to COeq and considered as 1000-year carbon removals. The remaining 28% of carbon is assumed to decompose within the 1000-year permanence horizon, and is not considered for any removal RCCs.
Example 2: This biochar sample has rather homogenous quality and a narrow distribution of measurements. The biochar sample has a mean of 2.32, and 95% of the measurements are above the 2% inertinite threshold. Therefore, this biochar sample has an of 0.95, and 95% of the organic carbon in the sample will be converted to COeq and considered as 1000-year carbon removals. The remaining 5% of carbon is assumed to decompose within the 1000-year permanence horizon, and is not considered for any removal RCCs.
represents the fraction of biochar carbon remaining after 1000 years
represents the percent of the distribution sample that has a random reflectance () of 2% or higher.
represents the total carbon removals from biochar during the verification period, in tonnes of COeq. This value shall be applied to Equation 1 from the document to calculate overall project removals.
is calculated in Equation 3
, , , and are described in Equation 1.
Riverse is actively monitoring ongoing research and seeking expert advice on the potential development of a third approach that uses measurements as proxies for inertinite content. For example, if the value is less than 0.2, it could be interpreted as indicating that 95% of the biochar is inertinite. While this simplification has been suggested by experts and holds promise, it is currently considered insufficiently rigorous due to a lack of supporting evidence and clear guidance.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the .
The three assumptions presented in the section have moderate uncertainty, but the most conservative approach is taken in the quantifications.
The sampling procedure detailed in sections below and summarized in Figure 1 is the recommended approach for representative sampling. However, Project Developers may implement their own approach if it is detailed in the PDD and in ; ensures one representative sample per production batch; addresses samples and composite samples amount and frequency; and ensures homogenization. The VVB and the Riverse Certification team must validate the rigor and representativeness of the proposed sampling approach.
An estimated ratio and must be provided based on
If options 2-4 are used, the estimated and shall automatically be discounted by 10% for the validation-stage estimates, in order to ensure conservative estimates and avoid over-estimations.
An estimated must be provided based on the same sources described for Approach 1: 100-year removals with H/C. This estimated value shall be used for quantification.
distribution results for a sample of biochar produced at the project site under pilot/testing conditions. Measurements shall be used in Eq. 3 and 4 to estimate 1000 year removals.
may be used as a proxy only for validation stage estimates (not during verification). must be provided based on the same sources described for Approach 1: 100-year removals with H/C. This estimated value must be below 0.4 to use the 1000-year approach. A conservative default value of = 0.8 shall be assumed for all projects with a < 0.4 for the purpose of ex-ante validation estimates of 1000-year removals. The real results shall be used for verification and the final issuance of 1000-year removal RCCs.
(only for )
Random reflectance ( ) mean and distribution (only for )
, with names and GPS coordinates of spreading locations, among other information
Download the template
Because this module is considered the V2.0 of the Riverse BECCS and Biochar V1.0 methodology, the table below also includes changes from the Riverse BECCS and Biochar V1.0 methodology that are covered in other modules (e.g. ).
Outline the requirements set by the Riverse Standard to ensure that carbon credits are unique, following the No Double Counting criteria in the .
Projects shall not seek credit issuance for the same GHG avoidance or removal under the Riverse Standard and another crediting program. Project Developers commit to this by signing the .
Riverse shall complete regular spot checks to ensure that the same project, and different projects with overlapping project scopes and mitigation activities, are not also included on other registries under other carbon credit programs. Spot checks are conducted for each project based on geographies, similar processes types, and other standards/methodologies. Projects found to be non-compliant will face penalties outlined in the .
Project Developers shall not seek issuance of credits for GHG avoidance and removal units under the Riverse Standard at the same time as another GHG-related environmental credit for the same project activity and time period. Project Developers commit to this by signing the .
To obtain the Riverse Standard labels on Riverse Carbon Credits, the Project Developer must provide an official Letter of Authorisation from the Host Country. The Letter of Authorisation shall be made public on the Riverse Registry. A template letter is made available .
represents the fraction of biochar carbon remaining after 100 years
and represent regression coefficients, taken from , and summarized in Table 3 for the corresponding project's soil temperature.
represents the ratio of molar hydrogen to organic carbon in biochar, measured by laboratory analysis for each project.
represents the total carbon removals from biochar during the verification period, in tonnes of COeq. This value shall be applied to Equation 1 from the document to calculate total project removals.
is calculated in Equation 1
represents the concentration of organic carbon in biochar, on a weight basis.
represents the amount of biochar delivered during the verification period, in tonnes of fresh biochar.
represents the moisture content of biochar, on a weight basis (%w/w), so converts to dry mass of biochar
is 44/12 = 3.67, and represents the molar masses of CO and C respectively, and is used to convert tonnes C to tonnes of COeq.
Module name
Infrastructure and machinery
Module category
Transformation
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RIV-BICRS-T-INFRA-V1.0
Release date
December 4th, 2024
Status
In use
Item type
Selection
NA
Material type
Selection
Technical specifications, bill of materials, invoices, building design documents
Material amount
kg, tonne, m
Same as above
Item lifetime**
years
Same as above
List of items that were excluded
Selection
Description of the system and transparent justification
Tonnes of biomass processed annually (dry matter)
tonne
Contract with biomass supplier, operations tracking, invoices
Pyrolysis reactor
7
Feedstock shredder, grinder, dryer
7
Gas cooling, cleaning, and energy recovery
10
Silos, hoppers
10
Buildings, sheds
20
Aboveground pipelines
20
Underground pipelines
40
Building foundations
50
Steel alloy, stainless steel production
market for steel, chromium steel 18/8, hot rolled, GLO
Unalloyed steel production
market for steel, low-alloyed, hot rolled, GLO
Reinforcing steel (building)
market for reinforcing steel, GLO
All steel end of life
market for waste reinforcement steel, RoW
Concrete production
market for concrete, normal strength, RoW
Concrete end of life
market for waste concrete, not reinforced, Europe without Switzerland
Copper production
market for copper, cathode, GLO
Aluminum production
market for aluminium, wrought alloy, GLO
Default facility for simplified approach
synthetic gas factory construction, RoW
heat, district or industrial, other than natural gas, Europe without Switzerland
market group for electricity, medium voltage, European Network of Transmission Systems Operators for Electricity (ENTSO-E)
UN SDG
Description
Proof
SDG 7.2 Increase substantially the share of renewable energy in the global energy mix
Promoting renewable energy over fossil fuel energy is important not only for reducing GHG emissions, but also for energy security, diversification, and conservation of finite resources. By definition, producing biogas from anaerobic digestion contributes to increasing the share of renewable energy in energy mixes.
Energy produced (kWh), from injection receipts from gas network.
SDG 8.2 Achieve higher levels of economic productivity through diversification, technology upgrading and innovation
Anaerobic digestion sites, often managed by farmers, provide an opportunity for income diversification, helping small-scale farmers remain viable in a challenging agricultural landscape. This is particularly beneficial given the .
Fraction of farmer income from anaerobic digestion site operation.
SDG 8.4 Improve global resource efficiency in consumption and production
Almost of mineral nitrogen and phosphorus fertilizer are used annually in the EU. Their production requires large amounts of fossil energy consumption and mining of finite resources. Anaerobic digestion recycles nutrients by converting agricultural residues into digestate, which returns nutrients to agricultural soils.
Amount of digestate applied to soils, calculations and conversions done in Riverse’s model.
SDG 12.2 - Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
The project’s circularity will be measured by the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI), according to the Ellen MacArthur Foundation's methodology.
Primary data collected from the project for the GHG reduction quantification, which are also used in the Circularity Assessment.
SDG 12.5 - Reduce waste generation through prevention, reduction, recycling and reuse
Projects may use waste from agro-industrial processes as feedstock inputs, .
Records of feedstock inputs showing the amount of waste used.
SDG 13. Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts.
Anaerobic digestion projects reduce emissions of methane, a GHG with an especially high climate change impact and global warming potential in the short-term. Climate change impacts over 100 years are used as the basis to calculate GHG reductions and issue carbon credits, but reducing climate change impacts in the short-term by reducing methane emissions is an additional climate co-benefit.
Percent GHG emission reduction compared to the baseline scenario using values.
15.1 Ensure the conservation, restoration and sustainable use of terrestrial and inland freshwater ecosystems and their services
Energy cover crops can be grown and used for biogas production, and replace either bare soil or non-harvested cover crops. Compared to bare soil, energy cover crops can such as reduced nitrogen leaching, improved soil health, and soil carbon sequestration (which is not included in the GHG reduction quantification).
Records of feedstock inputs showing energy cover crops, plus justification that energy cover crops are managed in a sustainable way.
Feedstock input
Amount (tonnes)
Percent of feedstock mix
Growing season
Low ILUC risk?
Cow manure
4,000
20%
NA
Yes
Sugar beet pulp
7,000
35%
NA
Yes
Sunflower silage energy crop
9,000
45%
Summer (intermediate crop)
Yes
Feedstock input
Amount (tonnes)
Percent of feedstock mix
Growing season
Low ILUC risk?
Whole-crop maize
3000
15%
Main crop
No
Silo juice
2000
10%
NA
Yes
Rye silage energy crop
8000
40%
Summer (intermediate crop)
Yes
Maize silage energy crop
7000
35%
Late summer/fall (intermediate crop)
Yes
Module name
Biochar application to soils
Module category
Carbon storage
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
2.1
Methodology ID
RIV-BICRS-CS-BCSOIL-V2.1
Release date
March 26th, 2025
Status
In use
SDG 12.2 - Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
The project’s will be measured by the , according to the Ellen MacArthur Foundation's methodology. The indicator is expected to be 100% circularity for all biochar projects, since they use biomass feedstock and do not landfill or incinerate their product.
Type of feedstocks used, verification of end use of biochar
15.1 Ensure the conservation, restoration and sustainable use of terrestrial and inland freshwater ecosystems and their services
Biochar application to agricultural soils can therefore reducing the amount of land, pesticides, fertilizer, and other environmentally impactful resources needed to grow food
Proof of biochar use in agriculture as opposed to other applications: contract, invoices, receipts of sale of biochar to farmers.
Pb
300
Cd
5
Cu
200
Ni
100
Hg
2
Zn
1000
Cr
200
As
20
8 EFSA PAH
1
<7.49
1.13
0.46
7.5-12.49
1.10
0.59
12.5-17.49
1.04
0.64
17.5-22.49
1.01
0.65
>22.5
0.98
0.66
≤ 3 000
4
3 001 – 10 000
8
10 001 – 20 000
12
20 001 – 40 000
16
40 001 – 60 000
20
60 001 – 80 000
24
80 001 – 100 000
28
Peat moss
peat moss production, horticultural use, RoW
Perlite
expanded perlite production, CH
Lime
market for lime, RER
Nitrogen mineral fertilizer
market for inorganic nitrogen fertiliser, as N, country specific
Phosphorus mineral fertilizer
market for inorganic phosphorus fertiliser, as P2O5, country specific
Potassium mineral fertilizer
market for inorganic potassium fertiliser, as K2O, country specific
Mineral NPK fertilizer #1
market for NPK (26-15-15) fertiliser, RER
Mineral NPK fertilizer #2
market for NPK (15-15-15) fertiliser, RER
Re-introduce 100-year carbon degradation model equations based on soil temperature
Aligning with common biochar modeling practices.
March 2025
V2.1
Changed pollutant requirements from European Biochar Certificate (EBC) thresholds to World Biochar Certificate (WBC) thresholds
Adding more projects outside Europe, more reasonable and feasible to hold them to worldwide best standards, not European
March 2025
V2.1
Added equations for calculation GHG reductions
Increased transparency.
September 2024
V2.0
Aligned terminology with ISO 14064-2:2019
Improved consistency with the voluntary carbon market. LCA principles still apply.
September 2024
V2.0
Added risk assessment template for environmental and social do no harm
Provide more detailed and prescriptive assessment framework, clearer instructions for project developers.
September 2024
V2.0
Removed text for sections that are the same for all methodologies:
Measurability
Real
Additionality
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
Independently verified
Repeated text from the Standard Rules.
September 2024
V2.0
Added Monitoring Plan section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
September 2024
V2.0
Remove Rebound Effect and Independently Validated criteria
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
September 2024
V2.0
Added uncertainty assessment section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
September 2024
V2.0
Infrastructure and machinery quantification expanded and specified, simple option added
Simplification, results not sensitive to impacts
September 2024
V2.0
New Leakage requirements
More rigorous eligibility criteria, and clear requirements and instructions for Project Developers
September 2024
V2.0
Allow option for 1000 year removals, measurement of random reflectance
Updated research
September 2024
V2.0
Added verification of end use reports
Increased rigor to ensure biochar is used as claimed
September 2024
V2.0
Added precise sampling requirements
Provide Project Developers with clear expectations, ensure representative sampling
September 2024
V2.0
Allow option to monitor data and quantify GHGs per production batch
Facilitate data collection and reporting for Project Developers
September 2024
V2.0
Biomass feedstock shall only be waste and biomass cultivated from sustainable production is not allowed
Increased stringency, following best practice and scientific recommendations
September 2024
V2.0
Document name
Riverse Double Counting Policy
Release date
February 19, 2024
Version number
1.0
Status
In use
Biochar application to soils
Marine sub-sediment burial
Biochar storage in concrete (coming soon)
List of ecoinvent 3.10 processes used in the GHG reduction quantification model
Energy crop: maize silage
maize silage production | maize silage | Cutoff, U, RoW
Energy crop: sunflower
market for sunflower silage | sunflower silage | Cutoff, U, GLO
Energy crop: rye grass
market for ryegrass silage | ryegrass silage | Cutoff, U, GLO
Energy crop: other grass silage
grass silage production, Swiss integrated production, intensive | grass silage, Swiss integrated production | Cutoff, U, CH
Energy crop: alfalfa, and triticale
alfalfa-grass mixture production, Swiss integrated production | alfalfa-grass mixture, Swiss integrated production | Cutoff, U, CH
Straw
wheat grain production | straw | Cutoff, U, RoW
Energy crop: whole corn
sweet corn production | sweet corn | Cutoff, U, RoW
Transport, truck
market for transport, freight, lorry 7.5-16 metric ton, EURO5 | transport, freight, lorry 7.5-16 metric ton, EURO5 | Cutoff, U, RER
Electricity
market for electricity, medium voltage | electricity, medium voltage | Cutoff, U (geography set to project country)
Activated carbon
market for activated carbon, granular | activated carbon, granular | Cutoff, U, GLO
Nitrogen fertilizer
market group for inorganic nitrogen fertilizer, as N | inorganic nitrogen fertilizer, as N | Cutoff, U, RER
Potassium fertilizer
market group for inorganic potassium fertilizer, as K2O | inorganic potassium fertilizer, as K2O | Cutoff, U, RER
Phosphorus fertilizer
market group for inorganic phosphorus fertilizer, as P2O5 | inorganic phosphorus fertilizer, as P2O5 | Cutoff, U, RER
Biogas plant construction
anaerobic digestion plant construction, agriculture, with methane recovery | anaerobic digestion plant, agriculture, with methane recovery | Cutoff, U, RoW
Natural gas
natural gas, burned in gas turbine | natural gas, burned in gas turbine | Cutoff, U (geography set to project country)
Biogas
market for biogas | biogas | Cutoff, U, RoW
Biomethane
market for biomethane, high pressure | biomethane, high pressure | Cutoff, U, RoW
Remove biogas torching parameter
Below impact threshold
May 2023
V1.1
Define gas self consumption rate of 4%
GHG results not sensitive, simplify data collection
May 2023
V1.1
Set digestate produced to 85% of the sum of feedstock input fresh mass
Precise values rarely available
May 2023
V1.1
Add possibility to have digestate separated during storage, and during spreading
Improved accuracy
June 2023
V1.1
Specify amounts and nutrient content of different phases of digestate (raw, liquid, solid)
Improved accuracy
June 2023
V1.1
Remove transport of manure and slurry in baseline and project scenario
Assumed to be the same in both scenarios, no effect in a comparative LCA
June 2023
V1.1
Add options for digestate transport via irrigation pipes or truck transport
Improved accuracy, more relevant options for Project Developers
June 2023
V1.1
Calculate digestate storage methane emission rate based on residence time in digester, rather than fixed rate of 2% of biogas produced
Improved accuracy
July 2023
V2.1
Updated parameter on amount of methane leaked during purification
Error in units conversion
September 2023
V2.2
Add possibility for projects to provide their own data on methane leakage rates during purification, instead of standard leakage rate of 0.7% of biogas leaked
Improved accuracy, increased use of project specific data
October 2023
V2.2
New section Monitoring Plan
Alignment with Standard Rules V6
March 2024
V2.3
Add share of biogas in the grid to the baseline scenario
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6 and increase conservativeness.
March 2024
V2.3
Added equations for calculation GHG reductions
Increased transparency.
May 2024
V3.0
Aligned terminology with ISO 14064-2:2019
Improved consistency with the voluntary carbon market. LCA principles still apply.
May 2024
V3.0
Added risk assessment template for environmental and social do no harm
Provide more detailed and prescriptive assessment framework, clearer instructions for project developers.
May 2024
V3.0
Removed text for sections that are the same for all methodologies:
Measurability
Real
Additionality
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
Independently verified
Repeated text from the Standard Rules.
May 2024
V3.0
Added Monitoring Plan section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
May 2024
V3.0
Remove Rebound Effect and Independently Validated criteria
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
May 2024
V3.0
Added uncertainty assessment section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
May 2024
V3.0
Model infrastructure instead of full data collection, move under “Digestion and biomethane management” section
Simplification, results not sensitive to impacts
May 2024
V3.0
Model activated carbon based on energy production, instead of direct data collection
Simplification, results not sensitive to impacts
May 2024
V3.0
Change biomethane combustion methane emissions from fossil to biogenic
Error
May 2024
V3.0
Reintroduce transport of manure and slurry in baseline scenario
Completeness, often collected project transport distance anyway
May 2024
V3.0
Add five different energy cover crop options, instead of a single proxy
Improved accuracy, increased use of project specific data
May 2024
V3.0
New Leakage requirements
More rigorous eligibility criteria, and clear requirements and instructions for Project Developers (after public consultation)
July 2024
V3.0
Include methane emissions from manure and slurry storage in project and baseline scenarios
Public consultation feedback, erroneously assumed previously that they are the same in project and baseline scenarios
July 2024
V3.0
Create project scope requirements
Specify the project scope as one anaerobic digestion site
October 2024
V3.1
Add minimum list of ESDNH risks
Align with Standard Rules V6.2
October 2024
V3.1
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include at a minimum, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information:
amount of biomethane injected into the grid
mass and waste status of each feedstock input in tonnes of fresh matter (ensuring the dedicated crop and ILUC risk thresholds are not surpassed, see Environmental and Social Do No Harm and Leakage)
repartition of solid, liquid and raw digestate
amount and type of electricity use on-site
description of any major changes in operations
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
Small IT and telecommunication equipment constitute emissions and is one of the . In addition to climate change impacts, these electronic devices also require mining rare minerals and materials, and make up a rapidly growing stream of hazardous waste.
. Therefore, a major lever to reduce GHG emissions in this sector is to increase the lifetime of devices, so that fewer devices are produced. One method for increasing device lifetime is device repair and refurbishing.
Refurbishing of electronics involves restoring previously owned and used electronic devices to a functional state. It requires a diagnosis, cleaning, repairs, replacing parts, and testing to ensure performance. Extending the lifespan of these devices reduces the production of new devices and reduces electronic waste. Refurbishment of electronic devices is gaining mainstream acceptance from consumers but still faces barriers from high costs of repair, market fragmentation, and lack of consumer trust.
The project may be biobased construction material manufacturing. In this case, carbon credits are issued according to the amount of biobased materials sold to building developers during the reference calendar year. The Project Developer may be the biobased construction material manufacturer.
The project may be the use of biobased construction materials in new, permanent building construction or renovation of permanent buildings during the reference calendar year. RCCs are issued according to the amount of biobased construction materials used in the new building construction. The Project Developer may be the building developer, i.e. the entity responsible for technical choices, building design, and oversight of the development.
Biobased construction materials may include but are not limited to, wood framing, wood panels, hempcrete (concrete containing hemp fibers), and cellulose thermal insulation.
Types of biomass used for biobased construction materials may include wood (timber/lumber), bamboo, hemp, straw, recycled paper, and flax, among others.
For the manufacturing of biobased construction materials, one project corresponds to the production of a single biobased product by one registered company within a single country.
For the use of biobased construction materials, one project includes all biobased materials used within a single building development, where a building development is defined as all construction covered under one building permit.
Buildings are responsible for 21% of global greenhouse gas emissions (GHGs). These can be split into operational emissions (such as energy consumption while buildings are used), and embodied emissions (emissions from the production, maintenance, and waste treatment of building materials). Embodied emissions of buildings account for almost 5-12% of national GHGs across European countries. Much of this impact comes from the energy-intensive production of cement and steel, which are the top two building materials used globally, along with masonry (bricks, blocks, and stone).
Biobased construction materials are composed of matter derived from biogenic origins. They typically have lower embodied GHG emissions than conventional materials because they 1) are mostly composed of renewable, biogenic carbon, which comes with low or even negative embodied emissions, and 2) can have less energy-intensive manufacturing processes.
If the construction material has an expected carbon storage duration of 100 years or more, then the biogenic content of that material counts towards removal Riverse Carbon Credits (RCCs). Regardless of their carbon storage duration, all biobased construction materials are eligible for avoidance RCCs, if the biobased construction material has lower embodied impacts than conventional materials thanks to its low-carbon inputs.
This section includes all procedural templates used in the Riverse process.
Once a project’s PDD has been pre-validated internally by Riverse, it enters the validation step. The objective of validation is to provide an external evaluation to ensure that:
the LCA methods employed are robust and accurate,
that there is consistency in the primary data collected,
and that the project adequately answers to all 12 criteria outlined in the Riverse Standard Rules.
Validation seeks to guarantee the realness and authenticity of the project, ensuring that it genuinely contributes to the set objectives and is not merely a theoretical construct. This external validation provides an additional layer of credibility and trustworthiness to the entire process, ensuring stakeholders of the project's integrity and alignment with established requirements.
The VVB team must follow the procedures outlined in the “Project validation” section of the Riverse Procedures Manual.
The audit shall validate the following elements:
Consistency: The answers and evidence provided for each criterion of the Riverse Standard are consistent, conservative and valid;
Model: if the project is not covered by one of the Riverse methodologies, check that the LCA includes all necessary life cycle stages, and the methodology is in line with current LCA practice;
Data authenticity and estimates: inputs include actual data and where appropriate estimates, and are supported by technical data from reliable and recognised sources;
Model usage: the Project Developers uses life cycle assessment (LCA) to calculate the estimated carbon removals and avoidance, and determine the number of Riverse Carbon Credits (RCCs) to issue. The choice of the baseline scenario is justified, using accurate and conservative assumptions.
RCCs estimation over the crediting period: The projected quantity of removal/avoidance RCCs expected per annum has been validated, based on the modeled emission reductions and the expected output/production quantity of the project.
Monitoring Plan: the documents and indicators suggested in the Monitoring Plan will allow the VVB to verify project eligibility and RCCs issuance in the following years.
Items with a lifetime of 1 year or more
Items that have been created/are used as a direct result of the project operations
Pre-existing infrastructure that would have been used by another company/project, if the present project did not exist (e.g. office buildings, foundations...).
Onsite machinery and equipment
Machinery used in the product life cycle but located outside the direct control of the project (e.g. storage silos at the biomass feedstock collection stage)
Feedstock
Processing
Heat biomass to at least 350°C during production.
Biochar Quality and Use
Apply biochar to agricultural, forest, or urban soils, ensuring permanent sequestration of its organic carbon content.
Amount of biochar produced*
Tonnes of fresh matter
Internal tracking documents, invoices, contracts
Biochar *
Ratio
Laboratory chemical analyses
Organic carbon content
Percent
Laboratory chemical analyses
Biochar moisture content (M_{\text{%}}) *
Percent
Laboratory chemical analyses
of biochar spreading sites*
coordinates
Internal tracking documents, invoices, mapping software (e.g. Google Maps)
Amount and type of avoided horticultural product (optional)
kg, tonnes, m3
Operations tracking and invoices from the product user
Amount of biochar produced*
Tonnes of fresh matter
Internal tracking documents, invoices, contracts
Organic carbon content
Percent
Laboratory chemical analyses
Average random reflectance
Percent
Laboratory chemical analyses
Fraction of distribution measurements above 2%
Fraction
Laboratory chemical analyses
Biochar moisture content (M_{\text{%}})*
percent
Laboratory chemical analyses
Amount and type of avoided horticultural product (optional)
kg, tonne, m3
Operations tracking and invoices from the product user
V2.2
This methodology covers projects that refurbish electronic devices, extend their usable lifetime, reduce electronics waste and avoid production of new devices. The eligible device types include smartphones, tablets, laptops, desktop computers, and screens.
Methodology name
Electronic device refurbishing
Version
2.2
Methodology ID
RIV-REC-01-ELEC-V2.2
Release date
October 30th, 2024
Status
In use
Projects that reduce GHG emissions and are issued Riverse Carbon Credits typically also contribute to a circular economy. The assessment of a project's circularity is considered under the co-benefits criteria and represents the Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) number 12.2.
The Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) is the selected measure of circularity, due to its comprehensive assessment of material flows and alignment with global standards, notably established by The Ellen MacArthur Foundation.
The MCI examines the mass of material flows throughout a product's lifecycle. It evaluates how efficiently materials circulate within a closed-loop system, assigning “more circular” scores to systems that minimize waste and optimize resource reuse. The formula uses input parameters such as material feedstock amount and type (e.g. from recycled, reused, or biological sources), recycling rates, and lifespan extension potential to quantify a product's circularity.
A detailed description and formulas for calculating the MCI are documented in the dedicated , on pages 22 to 31 (following the Product-level Methodology under the Whole product approach). Figure 3 summarizes the MCI material flows for biogas and natural gas production.
The MCI is a unitless indicator that varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular. The project scenario MCI is compared to the baseline scenario MCI, measuring how much more circular the project scenario is than the baseline.
The MCI methodology has been applied to biogas production using the input data presented in Table 9.
Figure 3 Summarized representation of the MCI material flows. *Energy recovery as part of a circular strategy only applies to biological materials following the MCI's conditions.
Table 9 All variables needed to calculate the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) for the Riverse Biogas from anaerobic digestion methodology are detailed below. The full methodology and equations can be found in the dedicated .
M
Mass of a product
Total mass (kg) of gas produced, calculated based on the GWh of energy input into the gas grid in the project scenario according to:
where,
represents the mass of gas produced in one year, calculated based on the number of Functional Units produced (GWh) in the base year and the gas' LHV in kWh/m³.
represents the amount of GWh injected into the grid, from the gas grid injection receipts.
represents the gas calorific value, in kWh/m³. This is assumed to be 10, converted from Table 5.
represents the biomethane density, in kg/m³, which is assumed 0.75 kg/m³.
In the project scenario, the digestate produced shall also be considered in the final product weight as it has economic value. Thus,
where,
represents the product's final mass in the project scenario, calculated based on M and the amount of fertilizer thanks to the use of digestate.
represents the amount of digestate produced. This is calculated according to the amount of feedstock input, according to Eq.2, in kg (without considering the transport emission factor).
Fr
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from recycled sources
Assumed zero
Fu
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from reused sources
Assumed zero
Fs
Fraction of a product's biological feedstock from Sustained production.
In the project scenario, feedstock is of biological origin except dedicated crops. According to Riverse's biogas methodology section 2.4, projects must adhere to specific limitations when using dedicated crops as feedstock. Consequently, dedicated crops are deemed "virgin" to not benefit from biological feedstock circularity.
The market gas mix is composed of natural gas, biomethane, and biogas. It is assumed that biological feedstock is used in biogas and biomethane, but not in natural gas production. Thus, Fs in the baseline scenario is the sum of the fraction of biogas and biomethane in the grid.
V
Material that is not from reuse, recycling or biological material from sustained production.
The amount of virgin materials used in the project scenario is the equivalent of dedicated crops used.
All the input materials, except the fraction related to biogas/biomethane described above, are considered virgin as no reuse, recycled, or biological materials are assumed in a status quo scenario.
Cr
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a recycling process
Assumed zero because after the gas and digestate use, no product is left for recycling.
Cu
Fraction of mass of a product going into component reuse
Assumed zero as, after the gas use, no product is left for reuse except digestate in the project scenario (which is considered in the composting process below).
Cc
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a composting process
This fraction represents the amount of digestate relative to the total mass of the final product
().
Although the fraction of biogas and biomethane in the baseline scenario generate digestate, the amount would be very small, and does not have a significant impact on the MCI. Thus, it is excluded from the calculation.
Ce
Fraction of mass of a product being collected for energy recovery where the material satisfies the requirements for inclusion
This fraction represents the amount of biomethane relative to the total mass of the final products ().
Energy recovery as part of a circular strategy only applies to biological materials, according to the MCI methodology. This value is assumed to be zero for natural gas. Thus, the final value considered is the sum of the fraction of biogas and biomethane in the grid.
Wo
Mass of unrecoverable waste through a product's material going into landfill, waste to energy and any other type of process where the materials are no longer recoverable
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is zero as all final product mass can be recovered.
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is equal to the mass of the final product (M) minus the fraction of biogas and biomethane in the grid.
Ec
Efficiency of the recycling process used for the portion of a product collected for recycling
Not considered as no recycled material is used.
Wc
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated in the process of recycling parts of a product
Not considered as no recycled material is used.
Ef
Efficiency of the recycling process used to produce recycled feedstock for a product
Not considered as no recycled material is used.
Wf
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated when producing recycled feedstock for a product
Not considered as no recycled material is used.
W
Mass of unrecoverable waste associated with a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is zero as all the final product mass can be recovered.
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is equal to the mass of the final product (M) minus the fraction of biogas/biomethane.
LFI
Linear flow index (LFI)
Varies from 0 to 1, where 1 is a completely linear flow and 0 is a completely restorative flow. In a circular project, the LFI shall be closer to zero, while the baseline shall be closer to 1.
L
Actual average lifetime of a product
Biomethane shall have similar properties to natural gas to be injected into the gas grid. It is assumed that the actual average lifetime of the product in both scenarios is equivalent, and therefore doesn’t affect the comparative calculations. It is assumed to be 1.
Lav
Average lifetime of an industry-average product of the same type
U
Actual average number of achieved during the use phase of a product
Biomethane shall have similar properties to natural gas to be injected into the gas grid. It is assumed that the actuarial average number of functional units of the product in both scenarios is equivalent, and therefore doesn’t affect the comparative calculations. It is assumed to be 1.
Uav
Average number of functional units achieved during the use phase of an industry-average product of the same type
X
Utility of a product (function of the product's lifespan and intensity of use)
Following the MCI methodology calculation, this is equal to 1.
MCIp
Material Circularity Indicator of a product
Varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular.
Eligibility criteria that do not require specific methodology instructions are not described here. This includes:
Measurability
Real
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial documents shall be provided as proof. These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers, or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
No additional measures for double issuance are required because double issuance among actors in the supply chain is unlikely, given that device collectors and marketplaces are not eligible under this methodology.
Common co-benefits of electronic device refurbishing projects, and their sources of proof, are detailed in Table 1. Project developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Summary of common co-benefits provided by electronic device refurbishing projects. Co-benefits are organized under the United Nation Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDGs) framework.
SDG 5.1 - Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls
Electronic device refurbishing projects may promote gender parity in the information and communications technologies (ICT) workplace by having a large female workforce and having equal pay between men and women for doing the same job.
Average hourly earnings of men and women by age and disabilities (if any)
Standalone official policy for equal pay or current scenario in the sustainability report
SDG 8.5 - Achieve full and productive employment and decent work for all women and men, including for young people and persons with disabilities
Electronic device refurbishing projects often hire people with disabilities, who tend to have lower rates of employment (e.g. vs 74% overall activity rate).
Official record of number of employees with a disability vs total employees of the workforce
SDG 12.2 - Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
The project’s circularity will be measured by the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI), according to the Ellen MacArthur Foundation's methodology.
Primary data collected from the project for the GHG reduction quantification, which are also used in the Circularity Assessment
SDG 12.4 - Achieve the environmentally sound management of chemicals and all wastes throughout their life cycle
Electronic devices contain precious metals and rare earth elements. By refurbishing electronic devices, and recycling the precious metals and rare earth elements they contain, .
Number of devices refurbished. Amount of rare earth elements avoided calculated in Riverse life cycle inventory models.
SDG 12.5 - Reduce waste generation through prevention, reduction, recycling and reuse
The project diverts e-waste from improper disposal. In the EU, an average of 44% of small IT and telecommunication equipment e-waste is not treated in proper waste management channels. All e-waste collected in the project scenario is properly managed (via refurbishing or recycling).
Number and type of waste input devices.
Refurbished devices must be valid substitutes for new device production as modeled in the baseline scenario (i.e. the avoided new devices).
Project developers must demonstrate and provide evidence of the quality of their refurbished devices, showing they are valid substitutes for new ones. This evidence may include documentation of quality control checks, the device grading system, and the quality thresholds that devices must meet to be sold instead of recycled.
Devices sold by the project that are not functional shall not be considered as substitutes for new devices, and will not be counted towards avoided emissions from new device production. The avoided emissions from e-waste treatment are still counted.
Refurbished devices are assumed to have shorter lifetimes than new devices. This difference in performance is acceptable because it is accounted for in the GHG reduction calculations to calculate the number of RCCs to issue a project (see Equation 19 in the section New device production).
Lifetimes for selected devices are presented in Table 3 in the Assumptions section.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high-risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Improper on-site storage of non-functional e-waste
Energy intensive processing
Greenhouse gas emissions from transport for collection
Greenhouse gas emissions from transport for shipping
Worker health and safety
Frequent replacement of devices due to shortened lifetime (rebound effect)
Frequent replacement of devices due to economic incentives (rebound effect)
Leakage may occur when carbon-emitting activities are geographically displaced or relocated to areas outside the project boundaries as a direct result of the project's implementation. For electronic device refurbishing, this includes:
There is a risk that e-waste is transferred to different countries with less stringent waste treatment standards than their original country. This can occur in the form of:
non-functioning parts or devices that are discarded at the refurbishing facility, and/or
the refurbished device itself, which will undergo waste treatment in the country where it is sold and distributed.
Upstream and downstream emissions shall be included by default in the GHG reduction quantification, as part of the life-cycle approach. The upstream and downstream emissions included in the quantification are detailed in the Baseline scenario and Project scenario section
The scope of the reduction is the system boundary used in GHG quantification, described in the Baseline scenario and Project scenario sections below.
The Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) is the selected measure of circularity, due to its comprehensive assessment of material flows and alignment with global standards, notably established by The Ellen MacArthur Foundation.
The MCI examines mass of material flows throughout a product's lifecycle. It evaluates how efficiently materials circulate within a closed-loop system, assigning “more circular” scores to systems that minimize waste and optimize resource reuse. The formula uses input parameters such as material feedstock amount and type (e.g. from recycled, reused or biological sources), recycling rates, and lifespan extension potential to quantify a product's circularity.
The MCI is a unitless indicator that varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular. The project scenario MCI is compared to the baseline scenario MCI, measuring how much more circular the project scenario is than the baseline.
The MCI methodology has been applied to electronic device refurbishment using the input data presented in Table 7.
Symbol
Definition by the MCI
Guidelines for the project scenario
Guidelines for the baseline scenario
Mass of a product
Total mass (kg) of refurbished devices in the project scenario, according to Table 3.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from recycled sources
Assumed zero
Assumed zero
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from reused sources
Assumed zero
Fraction of a product's biological feedstock from Sustained production.
It is assumed that no biological feedstock is used in electronic devices.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Material that is not from reuse, recycling or biological material from sustained production.
The amount of virgin materials used in the project scenario is the same as the Np when virgin material shall be extracted to produce new pieces.
All the input materials are considered virgin as no reuse or recycled materials are assumed in a status quo scenario.
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a recycling process
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product going into component reuse
Fraction considered under the Cr variable, according to the country's rates.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a composting process
As no biological feedstock is used in electronic devices, this value is assumed to be zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product being collected for energy recovery where the material satisfies the requirements for inclusion
Energy recovery as part of a circular strategy only applies to biological materials, according to the MCI methodology. This value is assumed to be zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste through a product's material going into landfill, waste to energy and any other type of process where the materials are no longer recoverable
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Efficiency of the recycling process used for the portion of a product collected for recycling
Varies according to the country's rate, presented by .
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated in the process of recycling parts of a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Efficiency of the recycling process used to produce recycled feedstock for a product
Assumed equal to Ec as no data are available specifically for electronic devices. Additionally, since Fr is considered zero, this variable is not impactful.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated when producing recycled feedstock for a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology, and considering Fr equal to zero, this value is zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste associated with a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology and Riverse's guidelines, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Linear flow index
Varies from 0 to 1, where 1 is a completely linear flow and 0 is a completely restorative flow. In a circular project, the LFI shall be closer to zero, while the baseline shall be closer to 1.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Actual average lifetime of a product
Sum of lifespan of the product's first and second life according to Table 3, using an average weighted across all device types refurbished by the project.
Assumed 1
Average lifetime of an industry-average product of the same type
Average lifespan of the product's first life, weighted across all device types refurbished by the project (Table 3)
Assumed 1
achieved during the use phase of a product
Calculated based on the extended lifetime of the project's product.
Assumed 1
Average number of functional units achieved during the use phase of an industry-average product of the same type
Assumed 1
Assumed 1
Utility of a product (function of the product's lifespan and intensity of use)
Equal to 1 as the baseline scenario regards the status quo market (average industry scenario).
Material Circularity Indicator of a product
Varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Projects eligible under this methodology are the activities that carry out the technical aspects of refurbishment. Activities that only collect used devices (e.g. buyback schemes) or serve as marketplaces for refurbishers are not eligible projects.
Marketplaces may act as intermediaries between Riverse and refurbishers to assist in the certification process. Signed agreements shall be provided ensuring that the refurbishers are the principal and final beneficiaries of carbon finance.
Devices eligible under this methodology include: small consumer electronics such as smartphones, laptops, tablets, desktop computers, and screens. Other device types may be included in future versions of this methodology.
This methodology distinguishes between two types of refurbishing processes:
Light refurbishing is focused on fixing cosmetic damage or software issues. It is a more simple process because it doesn’t involve replacing parts.
Full refurbishing is an intensive process that involves light refurbishing plus replacing some device components and reassembling products. It is more costly and rigorous.
Both full and light refurbishing activities are eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits (RCCs) under this methodology.
One project corresponds to the refurbishing sites within one registered company located within one country.
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information:
Amount and type of devices collected
Transportation distances of these devices for collection, and for possible secondary transport
Amount and type of functional and non-functional devices sold
Number of devices undergoing full refurbishment, light refurbishment, recycled, and saved for spare parts.
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
V2.3
This methodology covers projects that manufacture biobased construction materials and/or use these materials in building construction or renovation. The eligible biobased materials include, but are not limited to, wood framing, hempcrete, and cellulose insulation, derived from biomass sources such as wood, bamboo, and hemp.
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow the method detailed below, based on .
Electronic device refurbishing projects are only eligible for avoidance Riverse Carbon Credits.
Electronic device refurbishing projects serve two functions: waste treatment from a device’s first life (Device A), and the provisioning of a “new” device in its second life (Device B). Both of these functions are included in the project and baseline scenario. See Figure 1 and Figure 2 for a depiction of project and baseline scenario system boundaries.
The distribution, packaging, use, and waste treatment of Device B are not included in the calculations because they are assumed to be the same in both scenarios. Therefore, the downstream system boundary is Device B at the factory gate.
Calculations and data collection are based on annual project operations.
Electronic device refurbishing projects are multifunctional (see General section above) so the functional unit is twofold:
production of one electronic device (Device B), plus
treatment of the corresponding amount of e-waste treated (from Device A) to generate this one device.
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 2:
Table 2 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see Monitoring Plan section).
Secondary data taken from the literature are used to define default values for the following elements:
Device expected lifetime (new and refurbished)
Device mass (if not provided by the Project Developer)
Emission factors from device production (when not available in the ecoinvent database, see paragraph below)
Electronic devices are evaluated in categories of device types rather than specific device models to facilitate data collection. It is assumed that devices in the same device type category have similar characteristics (mass, emission factor, lifetime), as defined in Table 3.
Some devices are not able to be refurbished to a functioning state, but contain some functional parts. Typically, the device is disassembled to harvest those scrap parts to use as spare parts for other refurbished devices. To maintain a conservative approach, these devices are assumed to go to electronic waste recycling.
In the baseline scenario, the distance for e-waste collection of Device A and transport to the waste treatment center is assumed to be 100 km.
The distribution of devices in the baseline and project scenarios is assumed to be the same, and is therefore excluded from quantifications. This is a conservative assumption, because and transported long distances. In contrast, the project scenario consists of mostly inter-EU shipping of devices across much shorter distances.
Packaging, use, and waste treatment of Device B are assumed to be the same in the baseline and project scenarios, and are therefore excluded from quantifications.
Table 3 Summary of assumed lifetimes, masses, and emission factors of new and refurbished electronic devices.
The project scenario consists of refurbishing used electronic devices, which serves two functions: 1) waste treatment of the device after its first life (Device A) and 2) refurbishing to produce a “new“ device (Device B). This process is broken down into 3 life cycle stages, and displayed in Figure 1:
Device A e-waste collection
Device A e-waste treatment of scrap materials
Device B refurbishing process
The mass of e-waste collected equals the total mass of input used devices collected at the refurbishing site annually.
Total mass of devices shall be calculated using the number of devices collected for each device type (provided by the Project Developer), multiplied by the assumed mass of each device type shown in Table 3.
For calculating transport distance, Project Developers shall provide the country and/or city where used electronic devices are transported from, and provide the average distance from the collection source to the refurbishing project site.
It is assumed that transport within Europe is done 100% by truck, and overseas transport is done by long-distance air freight.
Devices collected by the project that cannot be refurbished undergo e-waste recycling. Refurbishing projects typically have contracts with e-waste recycling companies that collect and recycle such devices.
Some non-refurbished devices may be kept onsite to harvest spare parts in the future, but due to limited project data on this topic, they are assumed to be recycled.
Devices that are sold by the project in a non-functional state shall be treated in the calculations as recycled devices.
This life cycle stage is composed of four main processes, each described below:
light refurbishing impacts
full refurbishing impacts
residual value of input devices, and
secondary transport of devices.
Light refurbishment impacts: The refurbishing process is split into two categories: light and full refurbishment, representing the degree of intervention needed to restore the device to a functioning state. Light refurbishment involves cosmetic and software improvements, and does not require the replacement of parts (e.g. new battery, new screen…). This distinction was chosen because
Light refurbishment includes inputs of cleaning alcohol, tissues, and cloth, and is modeled after the detailed LCA of electronic device refurbishing from the ADEME study.
Full refurbishment impacts: Full refurbishment includes light refurbishment plus repair and replacement of non-functional pieces. Detailed project data on all replacement pieces and inputs are rarely available, so full refurbishment impacts are modeled following the ADEME study.
Residual value of input devices: In life cycle assessments, when a project uses waste as an input, it typically enters the project system boundary with zero environmental impacts. Refurbishing projects collect and refurbish used devices that are not always at the end of their life, and are not truly waste. They may still be functional and hold residual value from their first life. This is evidenced by the fact that Project Developers sometimes pay for used devices, as opposed to waste collection, where the waste generator has to pay for waste treatment.
In this case, some environmental . It is assumed that only devices that undergo light refurbishment were in good condition and had residual value, and are allocated a share of GHG emissions from the device’s first life. On the other hand, devices that undergo full refurbishment are assumed to be non-functional waste and are not allocated any environmental impacts from their first life.
The residual value and corresponding allocated emissions are based on the ratio of the buyback price to the selling price of a new manufactured device. An average ratio shall be used for each device type, and is shown in Table 4. Alternatively, Project Developers may provide a similar project-specific database with their own buyback data.
Secondary transport of devices: After the device is collected by the refurbishing project and sorted, it may be sent to a different refurbishment site, for example to do speciality repairs. Project Developers shall report such secondary transport by providing the distance transported, and the number and type of devices making this transport.
The baseline scenario consists of two main functions: 1) waste treatment of the device after its first life (Device A) and 2) provisioning of a new device (Device B). The system boundary of the baseline scenario is shown in Figure 2. This is broken down into 3 life cycle stages, which are detailed in the following sections:
Device A collection
Device A e-waste treatment
Manufacturing of Device B
The structure of the baseline scenario is the same whether the project consists of ongoing operations or an expansion. In the former, project data from all annual site operations is considered, and the baseline scenario is defined as the functional equivalent of all annual operations. For an expansion project, only project data related to the expansion is considered, because the normal annual operations would be the same in the baseline and project scenario, and can therefore be excluded.
It is assumed that e-waste is transported by truck 100 km to its waste treatment center.
The mass of e-waste collected in the baseline scenario equals the total mass of input used devices collected by the refurbishing project annually.
Total mass of devices shall be calculated using the number of devices collected for each device type (provided by the Project Developer), multiplied by the assumed mass of each device type shown in Table 3.
Project Developers may provide more precise information on the mass of collected devices if it is available.
The treatment of e-waste is split between recycling, landfilling and incineration (Figure 2).
First, the fraction of e-waste that is not separately collected is assumed to be collected with municipal waste and incinerated or landfilled. In 2021, for example, this was an average of for the countries included in Eurostat.
The repartition between landfilling and incineration (with and without energy recovery) was taken from Eurostat, and the total repartition for all EU countries from 2020 was used. This resulted in .
Then, the fraction of e-waste that is separately collected is considered (average of ).
The number of new devices to consider in the baseline scenario corresponds to the number of devices successfully refurbished and sold in a functional state in the project scenario. Note that this does not necessarily equal the number of used devices collected, because a fraction of devices can not be successfully refurbished.
To quantify avoided GHG emissions, the baseline scenario must consider the market share of the project technology already in use. Currently, new device purchases come from both new manufacturing and existing refurbishing activities, and this is reflected in the baseline scenario (see Figure 2). The proportions of new and refurbished devices are detailed in Table 5.
The emission factor for smartphones was based on ecoinvent data and adjusted to better represent average smartphones. This was necessary because
smartphones are one of the most frequently refurbished devices, so special attention should be paid to them
, and
The impacts of refurbishing devices are described in the Refurbishing process section above.
Avoided GHG emissions are calculated by subtracting the sum of the project scenario GHG emissions from the sum of the baseline GHG scenario emissions.
Uncertainty shall be evaluated at both the methodology level and the project level. The project level uncertainty assessment must consider the uncertainty in the methodology, which is inevitably passed down to each project.
The uncertainty assessment below must be complemented by a project-specific uncertainty assessment. The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of avoided emissions to eliminate with the discount factor.
The assumptions that are estimated to have high uncertainty (i.e. high variability and high impact) are:
The assumptions that are estimated to have moderate uncertainty are:
The assumptions that are estimated to have low uncertainty (i.e. high variability and high impact) are:
The baseline scenario selection has low uncertainty and is mostly standardized. It accounts for project-specific information regarding the number, type and fate of devices, and national e-waste management statistics.
The equations used in this methodology consist of basic conversions and have low uncertainty.
Many estimates and secondary data are used in this methodology to enable a reasonable amount of project data collection. These data have varying levels of uncertainty, and are assessed in Table 6.
The uncertainty at the methodology level is estimated to be moderate. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 6% for projects under this methodology.
Table 6 Presentation of all secondary data and estimates used, and an assessment of their uncertainty.
Table A1 List of ecoinvent 3.10 processes used in the GHG reduction quantification model
*removed the power adapter production and waste treatment, and the device waste treatment
**removed the device waste treatment
Table A2 Mass and GHG emissions from production for iPhones gathered from Apple Product Environmental Reports, for a selection of recent models.
Table A3 Mass and GHG emissions from production for iPads gathered from Apple Product Environmental Reports, for a selection of recent models
*2021 is also considered in the average iPad emissions to have a bigger sample
Table A4 Mass and GHG emissions from production for MacBooks gathered from Apple Product Environmental Reports, for a selection of recent models
Table A5 Mass and GHG emissions from production for iMacs gathered from Apple Product Environmental Reports, for a selection of recent models
Table A6 The Refurbishing Impact Ratio is calculated by dividing the Results refurbished device column by the Results new device column. This fraction is then applied to the emission factors for new device impacts used in this study to obtain the emissions from the refurbishing process (Table 3).
where,
Table A7 The amount of full refurbishment activity input to each device type to obtain the desired emission factor for refurbished devices, as presented in Table 3. Calculated by dividing the desired emission factor for refurbished devices by the emission factor for one full refurbishment activity. The full refurbishment activity is described in Appendix 1.
Table A8 The national WEEE waste treatment rates are summarized. Sources are indicated in the column names. Percent of all small IT e-waste that is recycled/reused (column 3) was calculated by multiplying the Percent small IT e-waste separately collected (column 1) by Percent of separately collected small IT e-waste that is recycled/reused (column 2). Percent of all small IT e-waste in municipal waste stream (column 4) was calculated by subtracting Percent of all small IT e-waste that is recycled/reused (column 3) from 100%. Note that when percentages were >100, they were automatically set to 100.
Smartphones are the most frequently refurbished device type, so avoided emission calculations are particularly sensitive to their emission factor
A comparison of detailed life cycle inventories was the preferred approach, but was not possible due to a lack of transparent data on smartphone composition. Notably, the amounts of the most impactful smartphone components (mainboard, printed wiring boards, and integrated circuits) could not be found to adjust inputs to the ecoinvent process.
Instead, smartphone manufacturing emission factors were summarized for the (released 2022-2024) , and had publicly available LCAs.
For Apple iPhones (devices with most sales globally), the identified values are presented in Table A2, with an average of 64±15 kg CO2eq/device. Emission factors for other smartphones are summarized in the table below, and show an average emission factor of 49±13 kg CO2eq/device. These values shall be used for the emission factors for iPhones and other smartphones, respectively.
These values are around 25-50% greater than the smartphone production emission factor from ecoinvent 3.10.
To implement this change in the model, the amount of key inputs (mainboard, printed wiring boards, and integrated circuits) in the ecoinvent smartphone process was increased to reach the desired final emission factor.
Additionally, exchanges for the charger production, smartphone waste treatment, and cable waste treatment were removed from the process, to align with the project system boundaries.
Table A9 The non-Apple GHG emissions from manufacturing of smartphones gathered from manufacturer environmental reports, for a selection of recent and popular smartphone models. EF stands for emission factor.
The market share of new and used devices sold annually in Europe was used to determine the repartition of avoided new and refurbished devices in the baseline scenario. Most data were available for smartphones, taken from survey responses from 2022, and are presented in Table A10. The average values used for the GHG reduction quantification are a market share of 13% for refurbished smartphones, and 87% for new smartphones, as shown in Table 5.
Table A10 Breakdown of refurbished and new smartphones sold in European countries in 2022.
Similar detailed data were not available for other device types. Survey responses on the interest in buying a given refurbished device type were used to adjust the smartphone data in Table A10 proportionally to other device types (Table A11). The results from PCs were applied to laptops, and the results for TVs were used as a proxy for screens.
Table A11 Survey results asking respondents if they would be interested in buying the device type refurbished are summarized. The ratio of the results for smartphones compared to other device types was used to proportionally adjust the average percentage of refurbished smartphones gathered in Table A10.
The devices considered were the and and . New prices were taken from the manufacturer’s website where available, or from the manufacturer’s store on Amazon. In both cases, French sources were used. Average buyback prices were shared with Riverse by Project Developers. Prices reflect annual buyback price for that device category, for devices from Europe, in 2023.
Table A12 Sample prices for a new Apple iPhone.
Table A13 Sample prices for a new Samsung smartphone.
Table A14 Sample prices for a new Apple iPad.
Table A15 Sample prices for a new Samsung tablet.
The purpose of this document is to provide extra information on how to evaluate additionality of projects, according to the Riverse Standard.
This is already described in the Riverse Standard Rules and methodology documents, but this document provides detailed templates to guide project developers through their additionality proof.
Additionality shall be evaluated for each project, and there are no automatically additional project types or positive lists.
Items with a lifetime of less than 1 year are considered consumables, and are considered in the module.
Use waste and residual biomass as feedstock, according to the module.
Capture or cleanly burn pyrolysis gasses, as outlined in the module
Produce high-quality biochar with a molar below 0.7.
Download the template
Project developers shall demonstrate that they meet all eligibility criteria outlined in the , and described below with a specific focus on electronic device refurbishment.
To demonstrate additionality, Project Developers shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the .
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate collection, refurbishment, and resale of electronic devices. It is acceptable if regulations promote or set targets for these activities, because the resulting increase in these activities shall be accounted for in the baseline scenario.
At the European Union level, projects automatically pass the regulatory surplus analysis, which has been conducted by the Riverse Climate Team. The EU has introduced the Waste Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) Directive (), the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in EEE (RoHS) Directive (), Waste Framework Directive (), and the to prevent WEEE generation and promote re-use, recycling, and other forms of WEEE recovery. None of these legislations require electronic device refurbishing at the EU level**.** Project Developers are only required to provide a country-level regulatory surplus analysis.
Any increase in electronic device refurbishing and WEEE recycling thanks to the support of these regulations is accounted for in the GHG reduction quantification. For example, current rates of WEEE recycling are used in the GHG E-waste treatment section of the baseline scenario, and the current share of refurbished devices sold annually in the project country is considered in the New device productionsection of the baseline scenario.
Investment analysis may be used to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the project investment financially viable.
Business plans shall be provided as initial proof for investment analysis, to prove that the investment would not pay for itself, and that the amount of carbon finance is of the same order of magnitude as the investment cost. During verification, audited accounting documents shall be used to demonstrate that the initial estimates from the business plan were reasonable, and that carbon finance was used as initially described.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits.
Barrier analysis may be used to prove that the project faces financial, institutional, or technological barriers to ongoing operations that can only be overcome using carbon finance.
Project developers shall sign the , committing to follow the requirements outlined in the , including not double using or double issuing carbon credits.
Project developers shall prove that their project provides at least 2 co-benefits from the UN framework (and no more than 4).
Project Developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified risks of electronic device refurbishing. The identified risks include:
Electronic device refurbishing projects must prove that they lead to at least a 47% reduction in GHG emissions compared to the baseline scenario. This is aligned with the , as described in the .
This shall be proven using the GHG reduction quantification method described in the section.
Projects that reduce GHG emissions and are issued Riverse Carbon Credits typically also contribute to a circular economy. The assessment of a project's circularity is considered under the co-benefits criteria, and represents the (SDG) number 12.2.
in the dedicated , on pages 22 to 31, following the Product-level Methodology under the Whole product approach). Figure 3, modified from summarizes the MCI material flows.
Table 7 All variables needed to calculate the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) for the Riverse Electronic Device Refurbishing methodology are detailed below. The full methodology and equations can be found in the dedicated .
Where is the number of refurbished devices , and represents the weight in kilograms of device
Considers the mass of devices refurbished () and the mass of new pieces acquired (, in kg):
Project developers shall provide or an assumption based on its activity. If not available, 9% of virgin pieces will be considered in full refurbishing devices.
Value based on the collection rate of each country and its recycling rate as presented in the . After the end of the device's first and second life, the product is assumed to follow the country's recycling rates where waste is generated.
In electronics refurbishing projects, X is higher in the project scenario, as the project extends the product's life ()
Note that the project shall be defined as the project activities that are justified as additional. This may include a refurbishing site’s entire operations or only an expansion project. See the Additionality section and the for more details.
See Table 2 in the section for more details.
Download the template
General GHG reduction quantification rules can be found in the .
The baseline scenario represents the functionally equivalent set of activities that would occur in the absence of the project. Therefore, the baseline scenario is the average e-waste treatment of Device A, and the market mix for production of a new Device B. This market mix includes the fraction of refurbished devices that are already on the market (see ).
These values and their sources are provided in Table 3 in the section
The (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in
Refurbished devices are assumed to have shorter lifetimes than new devices, as presented in Table 3. To account for this difference, it is assumed that the amount of device production avoided in the baseline scenario is proportional to the ratio of new and refurbished device lifetimes. See section for more details. Lifetimes for Apple and non-Apple devices are assumed to be the same.
Detailed project data on the refurbishing process is rarely available. It is a manual process, and most impacts in the life cycle come from production of spare parts. Therefore, impacts of the refurbishing process are assumed to equal the ratio of impacts of new and refurbished devices in the detailed life cycle assessment on electronic device refurbishing, published by The French Agency for Ecological Transition (Agence de la transition écologique, ADEME), referred to hereafter as the . Refurbishing impact ratios for Apple and non-Apple devices are assumed to be the same. See Full refurbishment impacts section, for more details.
Residual value of input devices is detailed in , Residual value of input devices section and refers to the allocation of impacts from the production of Device A to the refurbished Device B, based on its residual economic value. This is calculated using the ratio of the buyback price to the price of the newly manufactured device. This ratio is calculated for each device type, and assumed to be the same for all models within that category.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from transporting used devices during the collection process ( ).
represents the amount of input collected devices of type collected by the project, in number of devices.
represents the number of devices by type sold in a functioning state, and shall be provided by the Project Developer for each verification.
represents the fraction of input used devices of device type i that are recycled, saved for spare parts, or not successfully refurbished to a functioning state by the project, and shall be provided by the Project Developer for each verification.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the transport of devices collected for refurbishing in the project scenario, in kgCOeq.
was calculated in Equation 1.
represents the weight in kilograms of device i, according to the presented in Table 3.
represents the distance traveled for device collection in km, provided by the Project Developer per sourcing country/city () and device type ().
represents the fraction of the devices collected per sourcing country/city () and device type ().
represents the emission factor for transport in kgCOeq/kg.km according to the ecoinvent database and includes truck or air freight. Refer to for the ecoinvent processes used.
Project Developers shall provide the fraction of devices that are recycled, and they will be modeled as mechanical e-waste recycling with shredding and separation (see ecoinvent processes in ).
This step calculates the GHG emissions from transporting and recycling the used electronic devices that are unsuitable for being refurbished ().
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the recycling process of devices/scrap not suitable for refurbishing, in kgCOeq.
and were described in Equation 1.
is described in the section section of the Project scenario.
represents the emission factor of recycling each device type. Refer to for the ecoinvent processes used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the transport of devices/scrap not suitable for refurbishing that are sent to recycling, in kgCOeq
and were described in Equation 1.
is described in the section.
represents the distance in km until the waste treatment facility. If not known, this value is considered 100km.
represents the emission factor of truck transport. Refer to for the ecoinvent processes used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the project scenario e-waste treatment of non-refurbished devices, in kgCOeq.
Results from this study are used to obtain the ratio of impacts of a refurbished device to the impacts of the corresponding new device (). This ratio is then applied to the new device production impacts summarized in Table 3 to obtain the desired amount of emissions from refurbishing. The emissions from refurbishing are modeled using the mix of ecoinvent processes used in light refurbishment described above, plus production of commonly replaced parts including screens, batteries, microphones and speakers.
Table 4 Residual value of device types. See for more details for smartphone, iPhone, tablet, and iPad. The average value of these device types was applied to the remaining device types due to a lack of device-specific buyback data.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the refurbishing process broken down into four main processes: 1) light refurbishing impacts, 2) full refurbishing impacts, 3) residual value of input devices, and 4) secondary transport of devices.
represents the number of devices of type undergoing the light refurbishing process and sold in a functional state.
is calculated in the section
represents the fraction of devices of type undergoing the light refurbishing process and sold in a functional state.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the light refurbishing of a device type.
is calculated in Equation 6.
represents the emission factor, in kgCOeq, for cleaning alcohol composed of 70% ethylene and 30% water. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the emission factor, in kgCOeq, of paper. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the emission factor, in kgCOeq, of cloth used for cleaning. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the number of devices of type undergoing the full refurbishing process and sold in a functional state.
is described in the section .
represents the fraction of devices of type undergoing the full refurbishing process and sold in a functional state.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the full refurbishing of a device type.
is calculated in Equation 8.
represents the rate of full refurbishment activities modeled per device type i. This reflects the "amount" of refurbishment used as an input for that device. See for its calculation and the amounts.
represents the emission factor, in kgCOeq, of one full refurbishment activity. This activity includes a mix of ecoinvent processes, described in and section .
represents the sum of residual GHG emissions from the device's first life allocated to the refurbished device, for all devices.
is calculated in Equation 6.
represents the average price paid for the collected used devices of type i (also called the buyback price).
represents the average selling price of a new device of type .
represents the emission factor in kgCOeq/kg due to the production of the new device type . The emission factors of new devices are presented in Table 3.
represents the sum of GHG emissions from secondary transport.
is the number of devices of device type that are sent for secondary transport.
and are described in the .
represents the distance traveled for secondary device transport in km per device type .
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the project scenario refurbishing process LCA step, in kgCOeq.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the baseline e-waste collection life cycle stage ().
represents the sum of GHG emissions in kgCOeq due to the transport of devices.
is calculated in Equation 1.
is described in Equation 2.
represents the distance of the device collection in kilometers, which is assumed to be 100 km.
represents the emission factor of truck transport in kgCOeq/kg.km. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
The proportion of e-waste recycled is based on national statistics obtained from the Eurostat database for small IT devices, as defined by the WEEE directive. Data for other countries where used devices are frequently sourced are taken from the , and extrapolated where necessary. The dataset and more detailed information are in .
This can be further broken down into the fraction successfully recycled/reused and the fraction that could not be recycled/reused (21%). Country specific fractions are used and are presented in .
The separately collected e-waste that could not be recycled/reused is assumed to be incinerated and landfilled, with the same proportions described in the Baseline scenario section .
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the baseline e-waste treatment life cycle stage ().
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the e-waste treatment of devices not separately collected.
and are described in the section .
is described in Equation 2.
represents the project's country waste reuse and recycling rate. These rates are presented in .
and represent the landfilling and incineration rates, respectively, described in section .
represents the emission factor of treating e-waste via landfill, in kgCOeq/kg using ecoinvent database, according to the breakdown of materials on pg. 11 of the :
represents the emission factor of treating e-waste via incineration, in kgCOeq/kg using ecoinvent database according to the following split :
)
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the e-waste treatment of separately collected devices.
,, and are describe above.
represents the emission factor of recycling device i, in kgCOeq/kg. Refer to for the ecoinvent process implemented.
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the baseline scenario e-waste treatment life cycle stage, in kgCOeq.
Table 5 Market share of refurbished devices sold annually in Europe. See for more details.
The process of manufacturing a new device is taken from the ecoinvent database, without modifications for the following device types: laptop, PC, tablet, and screen (See ).
GHG emissions from manufacturing Apple devices (iPhones, iPads, iMacs, and Macbooks) are taken from the production-stage impacts reported in Apple’s Product Environmental Reports. An average emission factor for recent models of devices was taken, and the emission factors considered are presented in .
it has been noted that . See for full details.
The difference in lifetime between refurbished and new devices, described in the , is accounted for in this life cycle stage. The amount of new device production avoided in the baseline scenario is proportional to the ratio of new and refurbished device lifetimes.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the baseline device production life cycle stage ().
represents the sum of GHG emissions in kgCOeq due to the production of new devices (i.e. excluding the market share of refurbished devices that are already in use).
was described in Equation 1.
refers to the market share (in percentage) of new devices sold annually per device type i, as presented in Table 1.
represents the emission factor in kgCOeq/kg due to the production of the new device type i. The emission factors of new devices are presented in Table 3.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the refurbishing of used devices according to the market shares in the baseline scenario.
was described in Equation 1.
refers to the market share (in percentage) of refurbished devices sold annually per device type i, as presented in Table 5.
and are described in Equation 9.
Refurbished devices are assumed to have a shorter lifespan than new devices, as described in the . This is accounted for in the following adjustment to avoided emissions from new device manufacturing:
represents the expected lifespan of a refurbished device i in number of years, as presented in Table 3.
represents the expected lifespan of a new device i in number of years, as presented in Table 3.
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the baseline scenario new device production life cycle stage, in kgCOeq.
The amount of devices avoided in the baseline scenario is proportional to the ratio of new and refurbished device lifetimes (see , and sections).
The ratio of new and refurbished device GHG emissions from ADEME can be extrapolated to represent the refurbishing process of all similar devices (seesection).
The residual economic value of used devices represents the GHG emissions that should be allocated from production Device A first life to the refurbished Device B (seesection).
Similar devices have similar characteristics (mass, emission factor, lifetime), leading to grouping devices into device type categories rather than assessing specific device models and brands (see section).
The distribution of Device B in the baseline and project scenarios is assumed to be the same (see section).
Non-functioning parts are assumed to be recycled (seesection).
The distance for e-waste collection of Device A in the baseline scenario is assumed to be 100 km (seesection).
Packaging, use, and waste treatment of Device B are assumed to be the same in the baseline and project scenarios (seesection).
***amount of each input varies by device type, and values were taken from the ADEME study (see the )
The following equation is used to solve , which represents the rate of full refurbishment activities modeled per device type i. This reflects the “amount” of refurbishment used as an input for that device. This is used in Equation 9 and Equation 18. Its values for each device type are presented in Table A7.
represents the GHG emissions due to the full refurbishing of a device type i. These values have been calculated using secondary data and are summarized in Table 3.
represents the emission factor of the full refurbishing process, which is composed of a mix of replacement parts and cleaning supplies, and is detailed in Appendix 1.
project scenario section explains that the ecoinvent 3.10 smartphone activity was modified. This was because:
Many , and do not represent the expected emissions of replaced/avoided devices on the market today. , which is based on data from the released in 2014.
Download the template
Methodology name
Biobased construction materials
Version
2.3
Methodology ID
RIV-BIOBM-01-CONST-V2.3
Release date
October 30th, 2024
Status
In use
Parameter
Unit
Source proof
Amount of sold devices (sold in a functioning state) during the reference year, by type and sourcing country (listed in Table 3).*
Units of device, by type
Track records from the refurbishing site
Mass of devices (optional)
grams/device type
Internal document containing this parameter
Distance traveled during collection from the sourcing place/country until the refurbishing site, and mode of transport (road or air freight).*
km
Track records from the refurbishing site
If applicable, secondary transport to send collected devices from the project site to another more specialized refurbishing site.*
Number of devices by type, and distance (km)
Track records from the refurbishing site/invoices
Percent of input used devices, broken down by device type, that undergo:
light refurbishment,
full refurbishment,
are recycled, and
are saved for spare parts or sold as non-functional devices.*
Percentage (%)
Track records from the refurbishing site
(Optional) The average buyback price per device category.
Currency
(Euro - € or dollar - $)
Invoices
Device type
Smartphone
49
4
0.2
3
2
iPhone
64
5
0.2
3
2
Laptop
170
19
1.6
5
3
MacBook
161
18
1.7
5
3
PC
190
19
5.4
5
3
iMac
211
22
4.5
5
3
Tablet
87
10
0.5
3
2
iPad
61
7
0.5
3
2
Screen
366
37
7
4
Device
Percent of residual value
Smartphone
11%
iPhone
14%
Tablet
20%
iPad
12%
Laptop
14%
Macbook
14%
PC
14%
iMac
14%
Screen
14%
Device
Percent Refurbished
Percent new
Smartphone/iPhone
13%
87%
Tablet/iPad
7%
93%
Laptop/Macbook
8%
92%
PC/iMac
8%
92%
Screen
6%
94%
Combined the calculations for several types of devices
Some devices were grouped together and assumed to have the same impacts.
August 2023
V1.1 to V1.2
Added equations for calculation GHG reductions
Increased transparency.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Aligned terminology with ISO 14064-2:2019
Improved consistency with the voluntary carbon market. LCA principles still apply.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Added risk assessment template for environmental and social do no harm
Provide more detailed and prescriptive assessment framework, clearer instructions for project developers.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Removed text for sections that are the same for all methodologies:
Measurability
Real
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
Independently verified
Repeated text from the Standard Rules.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Added Monitoring Plan section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Remove Rebound Effect and Independently Validated criteria
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Added uncertainty assessment section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Include fraction of refurbished devices already on the market in the baseline scenario of GHG reduction quantification
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6 and increase conservativeness.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Assign input used devices a fraction of environmental impacts from their first life, allocated based on their residual value
Input used devices are no longer considered waste. A more conservative assumption was made.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
E-waste treatment in the baseline scenario is modeled as a mix of e-waste incineration and landfill, rather than the ecoinvent process for device waste treatment. The latter is now used to model e-waste recycling (see Appendix 1 for ecoinvent activity names)
More accurate and representative of e-waste treatment practices.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Country WEEE rates come from data for only small IT and telecommunications devices, instead of all WEEE.
Improved precision, because statistics for all WEEE covered devices such as household appliances, lamps, photovoltaic panels.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Multiple WEEE rates from different countries are selected based on the source countries of collected devices.
Improved accuracy. Previously, only one source country could be selected in the calculation model.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
New device emission factors from ecoinvent were updated (see Appendix 1):
Smartphone: completely revised, see Appendix 5
Tablet, laptop: removed power adapter production, power adapter waste treatment, and the device waste treatment
PC: removed device waste treatment
Improved accuracy and harmonization of system boundaries.
April 2024
V1.2 to V2.0
Added additionality section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6.
May 2024
V2.0 PC to V2.0
Replace number of devices collected for number of devices sold as main input data, from which other values are calculated
Devices sold are easier and more reliable to track for Project Developers
August 2024
V2.0 to V2.1
Change USA, China and Turkey e-waste recycling rates in Appendix 4
Previous rates were erroneously calculated.
October 2024
V2.1 to V2.2
Create project scope requirements
Specify that operations in different countries must be registered as separate projects
October 2024
V2.1 to V2.2
Add minimum list of ESDNH risks
Align with Standard Rules V6.2
October 2024
V2.1 to V2.2
Specify minimum frequency of updating baseline scenario
Clarity and transparency
October 2024
V2.1 to V2.2
*
consumer electronics production, mobile device, smartphone | consumer electronics, mobile device, smartphone | Cutoff, U, GLO
Tablet*
consumer electronics production, mobile device, tablet | consumer electronics, mobile device, tablet | Cutoff, U, GLO
PC**
computer production, desktop, without screen | computer, desktop, without screen | Cutoff, U, GLO
Laptop*
computer production, laptop | computer, laptop | Cutoff, U, GLO
Screen
display production, liquid crystal, 17 inches | display, liquid crystal, 17 inches | Cutoff, U, GLO
Transport, truck
market for transport, freight, lorry 7.5-16 metric ton, EURO5 | transport, freight, lorry 7.5-16 metric ton, EURO5 | Cutoff, U, RER
Transport, air
market for transport, freight, aircraft, long haul | transport, freight, aircraft, long haul | Cutoff, U, GLO
Smartphone recycling
treatment of used smartphone, mechanical treatment | used smartphone | Cutoff, U, GLO
Tablet recycling
treatment of used tablet, mechanical treatment | used tablet | Cutoff, U, GLO
PC recycling
treatment of used desktop computer, mechanical treatment | used desktop computer | Cutoff, U, GLO
Laptop recycling
treatment of used laptop computer, mechanical treatment | used laptop computer | Cutoff, U, GLO
Screen recycling
treatment of used liquid crystal display, mechanical treatment | used liquid crystal display | Cutoff, U, GLO
Light refurbishing***
market for ethanol, without water, in 99.7% solution state, from ethylene | ethanol, without water, in 99.7% solution state, from ethylene | Cutoff, U, RER
market for water, completely softened | water, completely softened | Cutoff, U, RER
market for tissue paper | tissue paper | Cutoff, U, GLO
market for textile, knit cotton | textile, knit cotton | Cutoff, U, GLO
Full refurbishing
market for ethanol, without water, in 99.7% solution state, from ethylene | ethanol, without water, in 99.7% solution state, from ethylene | Cutoff, U, RER (0.007 kg)
market for water, completely softened | water, completely softened | Cutoff, U, RER (0.003 kg)
market for tissue paper | tissue paper | Cutoff, U, GLO (0.005 kg)
market for textile, knit cotton | textile, knit cotton | Cutoff, U, GLO (0.005 kg)
market for battery, Li-ion, NCA, rechargeable, prismatic | Cutoff, U, GLO (0.1 kg)
market for electronic component, passive, mobile, earpiece and speaker | Cutoff, U, GLO (0.002 kg)
market for liquid crystal display, unmounted, mobile device | Cutoff, U, GLO (0.1 kg)
E-waste incineration
treatment of waste glass, municipal incineration | waste glass | Cutoff, U, GLO = 10%
treatment of waste plastic, consumer electronics, municipal incineration | waste plastic, consumer electronics | Cutoff, U, GLO = 50%
treatment of scrap copper, municipal incineration | scrap copper | Cutoff, U, Europe without Switzerland = 20%
treatment of scrap aluminum, municipal incineration | scrap aluminum | Cutoff, U, Europe without Switzerland= 20%
E-waste landfill
treatment of waste plastic, mixture, sanitary landfill | waste plastic, mixture | Cutoff, U, RoW = 50%
treatment of waste glass, sanitary landfill | waste glass l Cutoff, U, GLO = 10%
treatment of waste aluminum, sanitary landfill | waste aluminum | Cutoff, U, RoW = 40%
Mean
64
Median
59
Standard Deviation
14.6
Coefficient of variation (Standard Deviation/Mean) (%)
22.8%
Mean
61
Median
61
Standard Deviation
3.8
Coefficient of variation (Standard Deviation/Mean) (%)
6.29%
Mean
161
Median
129
Standard Deviation
57.6
Coefficient of variation (Standard Deviation/Mean) (%)
35.8%
Mean
211
Median
216
Standard Deviation
16.7
Coefficient of variation (Standard Deviation/Mean) (%)
7.92%
Country
Europe average
72%
79%
56%
44%
Belgium
100%
80%
80%
20%
Bulgaria
79%
85%
68%
32%
Czechia
57%
100%
57%
43%
Denmark
38%
83%
32%
68%
Germany
89%
85%
75%
25%
Estonia
74%
84%
62%
38%
Ireland
59%
86%
50%
50%
Greece
49%
60%
29%
71%
Spain
62%
68%
42%
58%
France
91%
73%
67%
33%
Croatia
60%
88%
52%
48%
Italy
44%
62%
27%
73%
Cyprus
75%
91%
68%
32%
Latvia
54%
77%
41%
59%
Lithuania
80%
77%
61%
39%
Luxembourg
64%
87%
56%
44%
Hungary
53%
77%
41%
59%
Malta
No data
Netherlands
77%
72%
55%
45%
Austria
96%
75%
73%
27%
Poland
No data
Portugal
82%
22%
18%
82%
Romania
No data
Slovenia
100%
90%
90%
10%
Slovakia
91%
92%
84%
16%
Finland
63%
95%
59%
41%
Sweden
53%
84%
45%
55%
Iceland
No data
Liechtenstein
No data
Norway
100%
77%
77%
23%
NA
NA
23%
77%
NA
NA
82%
18%
NA
NA
25%
75%
Device type
d
Percent Refurbished
Percent new
Smartphone
59%
13%
87%
PC
35%
8%
92%
Tablet
34%
7%
93%
TV
28%
6%
94%
Model
New Price (€)
iPhone 14, 128 GB
€869
iPhone 14, 256 GB
€999
iPhone 14, 512 GB
€1,249
iPhone 14 plus, 128 GB
€969
iPhone 14 plus, 256 GB
€1,099
iPhone 14 plus, 512 GB
€1,349
iPhone 14 pro, 128 GB
€1,102
iPhone 14 pro, 256 GB
€1,235
iPhone 14 pro, 512 GB
€1,490
iPhone 14 pro, 1TB GB
€1,721
iPhone 14 pro max, 128 GB
€1,249
iPhone 14 pro max, 256 GB
€1,399
iPhone 14 pro max, 512 GB
€1,599
iPhone 14 pro max, 1TB GB
€1,699
iPhone 15, 128 GB
€969
iPhone 15, 256 GB
€1,099
iPhone 15, 512 GB
€1,349
iPhone 15 plus, 128 GB
€1,119
iPhone 15 plus, 256 GB
€1,249
iPhone 15 plus, 512 GB
€1,499
iPhone 15 pro, 128 GB
€1,229
iPhone 15 pro, 256 GB
€1,359
iPhone 15 pro, 512 GB
€1,609
iPhone 15 pro, 1TB GB
€1,859
iPhone 15 pro max, 256 GB
€1,479
iPhone 15 pro max, 512 GB
€1,729
iPhone 15 pro max, 1TB GB
€1,979
iPhone summary
Average new
€1,354
Average buyback
€186
Residual value
13.7%
Model
New Price (€)
Samsung Galaxy A14 4G, 64 GB
€132
Samsung Galaxy A14 4G, 128 GB
€128
Samsung Galaxy A14 5G, 64 GB
€176
Samsung Galaxy A14 5G, 128 GB
€256
Samsung Galaxy A34, 128 GB
€237
Samsung Galaxy A34, 256 GB
€286
Samsung Galaxy A54 5G, 128 GB
€309
Samsung Galaxy A54 5G, 256 GB
€410
Samsung Galaxy S23 FE, 128 GB
€699
Samsung Galaxy S23 FE, 256 GB
€759
Samsung Galaxy S23, 128 GB
€799
Samsung Galaxy S23, 256 GB
€859
Samsung Galaxy S23+, 256 GB
€919
Samsung Galaxy S23+, 512 GB
€993
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra, 256 GB
€969
Samsung Galaxy S23 Ultra, 512 GB
€1,039
Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra, 256 GB
€1,469
Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra, 512 GB
€1,589
Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra, 1 TB
€1,829
Samsung Galaxy S24, 128 GB
€899
Samsung Galaxy S24, 256 GB
€959
Samsung Galaxy S24+, 256 GB
€1,169
Samsung Galaxy S24+, 512 GB
€1,289
Smartphone summary
Average new
€790
Average buyback
€89
Residual value
11.3%
Model
New Price (€)
iPad Pro 11 inch, 128 GB
€1,069
iPad Pro 11 inch, 256 GB
€1,199
iPad Pro 11 inch, 512 GB
€1,449
iPad Pro 11 inch, 1 TB
€1,949
iPad Pro 11 inch, 2 TB
€2,449
iPad Pro 12.9 inch, 128 GB
€1,469
iPad Pro 12.9 inch, 256 GB
€1,599
iPad Pro 12.9 inch, 512 GB
€1,849
iPad Pro 12.9 inch, 1 TB
€2,349
iPad Pro 12.9 inch, 2 TB
€2,849
iPad Air, 64 GB
€789
iPad Air, 256 GB
€989
iPad 10th gen, 64 GB
€589
iPad 10th gen, 256 GB
€789
iPad 9th gen, 64 GB
€439
iPad 9th gen, 256 GB
€639
iPad mini, 64 GB
€659
iPad mini, 256 GB
€859
iPad Pro 11 inch 5G, 128 GB
€1,269
iPad Pro 11 inch 5G, 256 GB
€1,399
iPad Pro 11 inch 5G, 512 GB
€1,649
iPad Pro 11 inch 5G, 1 TB
€2,149
iPad Pro 11 inch 5G, 2 TB
€2,649
iPad Pro 12.9 inch 5G, 128 GB
€1,669
iPad Pro 12.9 inch 5G, 256 GB
€1,799
iPad Pro 12.9 inch 5G, 512 GB
€2,049
iPad Pro 12.9 inch 5G, 1 TB
€2,544
iPad Pro 12.9 inch 5G, 2 TB
€3,044
iPad Air 5G, 64 GB
€989
iPad Air 5G, 256 GB
€1,189
iPad 10th gen 5G, 64 GB
€789
iPad 10th gen 5G, 256 GB
€989
iPad 9th gen 5G, 64 GB
€609
iPad 9th gen 5G, 256 GB
€809
iPad mini 5G, 64 GB
€859
iPad mini 5G, 256 GB
€1,059
iPad summary
Average new
€1,430
Average buyback
€170
Residual value
11.9%
Model
New Price (€)
Galaxy Tab S9, 128 GB
899
Galaxy Tab S9, 256 GB
949
Galaxy Tab S9+, 256 GB
1149
Galaxy Tab S9+, 512GB
1149
Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra, 256 GB
1249
Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra, 512 GB
1499
Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra, 1 TB
1749
Galaxy Tab S9 FE, 128 GB
529
Galaxy Tab S9 FE, 256 GB
599
Galaxy Tab S9 FE+, 128 GB
699
Galaxy Tab S9 FE+, 256 GB
799
Galaxy Tab A9, 64 GB
189
Galaxy Tab A9, 128 GB
219
Galaxy Tab A9+, 64 GB
259
Galaxy Tab A9+, 128 GB
299
Galaxy Tab S9 5G, 128 GB
1099
Galaxy Tab S9 5G, 256 GB
1079
Galaxy Tab S9+ 5G, 256 GB
1329
Galaxy Tab S9+ 5G, 512GB
1449
Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra 5G, 256 GB
1579
Galaxy Tab S9 Ultra 5G, 1 TB
1899
Galaxy Tab S9 FE 5G, 128 GB
629
Galaxy Tab S9 FE 5G, 256 GB
599
Galaxy Tab S9 FE+ 5G, 128 GB
799
Galaxy Tab S9 FE+ 5G, 256 GB
899
Galaxy Tab A9 4G, 64 GB
217
Galaxy Tab A9+ 5G, 64 GB
309
Galaxy Tab A9+ 5G, 128 GB
349
Tablet summary
Average new
€944
Average buyback
€185
Residual value
19.6%
The global demand for batteries is projected to increase fourteenfold , with the European Union expected to . This is primarily fueled by the rise of electric mobility. In addition to climate change impacts, such as .
Most environmental impacts of batteries stem from two main stages: (a) the mining and processing of CRM and (b) their disposal at the end of life. Mining for CRMs raises significant environmental and human rights concerns, particularly as , often in protected regions with high mine density. Additionally, improper battery disposal can contaminate soil and water, negatively impacting human health. In 2021, the EU's end-of-life battery collection rate was for some types of .
Therefore, a major lever to reduce GHG emissions in this sector is to increase the lifetime of batteries, so that fewer batteries are produced. One method for increasing the battery's lifetime is the or through regeneration and refurbishing, giving it a second life.
Battery second life involves restoring previously owned and used batteries to a functional state for continued use, thereby delaying their entry into waste streams. This process includes thorough testing, cleaning, repairs, and, when necessary, replacing components to ensure optimal performance. Extending the lifespan of batteries reduces the production of new batteries and reduces hazardous waste. Refurbishment and regeneration of batteries face barriers from high costs of repair, market fragmentation, and lack of consumer trust and acceptance.
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for biobased material producers:
amount and type of biobased building material units sold
amount, type and source of biobased inputs
proof of adherence to the No Double Counting criterion
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for building developers using biobased materials:
amount and type of biobased building material units incorporated into buildings
proof of adherence to the No Double Counting criterion
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
Parameter
Reference in document
Uncertainty assessment
Emissions new device (kgCO2eq)
Table 3
For smartphones, the emission factor from ecoinvent has been thoroughly researched and modified to better represent average modern smartphones. Still, there is large variability in smartphone design, and there is high uncertainty in this one representative value.
Other devices come from ecoinvent processes and similar to smartphones, have variable designs, so there is high uncertainty in using one representative value.
Impact of refurbished (%)
Table 3
Average mass (kg)
Table 3
The same analysis can be applied from “Emissions new device (kgCO2eq)”. However this parameter has a smaller impact on the avoided GHG emissions calculations, so the uncertainty can be considered lower.
Lifetime new and refurbished (years)
Table 3
Market share refurbished vs new (percent)
Table 5
This secondary data is highly influential and is estimated to have low uncertainty for smartphones, where precise data were available for many countries. For other device types, there is moderate uncertainty.
Residual value of input devices
This measurement comes from device buyback prices and new device prices. For smartphones and tablets, there is low uncertainty here because buyback data came directly from Project Developers, and a large and representative sample of new device prices was taken. For other device types, the lack of buyback price data leads to moderate uncertainty.
WEEE statistics
These values have moderate uncertainty because they come from macro-level national datasets.
2022
14
128
0.172
61
79%
48
2022
14
256
0.172
67
79%
53
2022
14
512
0.172
83
79%
66
2022
14 plus
128
0.203
68
78%
53
2022
14 plus
256
0.203
75
78%
59
2022
14 plus
512
0.203
91
78%
71
2022
14 pro
128
0.206
65
81%
53
2022
14 pro
256
0.206
71
81%
58
2022
14 pro
512
0.206
84
81%
68
2022
14 pro
1TB
0.206
116
81%
94
2022
14 pro max
128
0.240
73
79%
58
2022
14 pro max
256
0.240
80
79%
63
2022
14 pro max
512
0.240
93
79%
73
2022
14 pro max
1TB
0.240
124
79%
98
2023
15
128
0.171
56
80%
45
2023
15
256
0.171
61
80%
49
2023
15
512
0.171
74
80%
59
2023
15 plus
128
0.201
61
79%
48
2023
15 plus
256
0.201
66
79%
52
2023
15 plus
512
0.201
79
79%
62
2023
15 pro
128
0.187
66
83%
55
2023
15 pro
256
0.187
71
83%
59
2023
15 pro
512
0.187
83
83%
69
2023
15 pro
1TB
0.187
107
83%
89
2023
15 pro max
256
0.221
75
83%
62
2023
15 pro max
512
0.221
87
83%
72
2023
15 pro max
1TB
0.221
110
83%
9
Year
Model
Memory (GB)
Mass (kg)
EF (kgCO2e)
Production (%)
EF production (kgCO2e)
Source
2021
9th gen.
64
0.487
75
78%
59
2021
9th gen.
128
0.487
78
78%
61
2021
9th gen.
256
0.487
84
78%
66
2022
10th gen.
64
0.477
72
78%
56
2022
10th gen.
256
0.477
82
78%
64
2023
no iPad launched*
Year
Model
Memory (GB)
Mass (kg)
EF (kgCO2e)
Production (%)
EF production (kgCO2e)
Source
2022
MacBook Air M2 chip
256
1.24
147
69%
101
2022
MacBook Air M2 chip
512
1.24
171
69%
118
2022
13-inch MacBook Pro
256
1.4
167
71%
119
2022
13-inch MacBook Pro
512
1.4
182
71%
129
2023
16-inch MacBook Pro
M3 Pro 512GB
2.15
290
67%
194
16-inch MacBook Pro
M3 Max 1TB
2.16
348
72%
251
14-inch MacBook Pro
M2 Pro 512GB
1.6
243
79%
192
14-inch MacBook Pro
M2 Pro 1T
1.6
272
79%
215
14-inch MacBook Pro
M2 Max 1TB
1.63
301
79%
238
MacBook Air 15-inch M2 chip
256
1.51
139
73%
101
MacBook Air 15-inch M2 chip
512
1.51
152
73%
111
Year
Model
Memory (GB)
Mass (kg)
EF (kgCO2e)
Production (%)
EF production (kgCO2e)
Source
2021
iMac (24 inches)
M1 7-core GPU 256GB
4.47
481
45%
216
2021
iMac (24 inches)
M1 8-core GPU 256GB
4.47
486
45%
219
2021
iMac (24 inches)
M1 8-core GPU 512GB
4.47
511
45%
230
2022
no iMac launched
2023
iMac (two ports)
256
4.43
359
52%
187
2023
iMac (four ports)
512
4.48
389
52%
202
Device type
Results new device (kgCO2eq)
Results refurbished device (kgCO2eq)
Refurbishing Impact Ratio
Source
Smartphone
84
7
8%
Tablet
74
9
12%
Laptop
168
18
11%
PC
256
26
10%
Screen
212
22
10%
Device type
Rate of full refurbishment
Smartphone
0.77
Tablet
1.92
Laptop
3.47
Screen
6.94
PC
3.61
Macbook
3.29
iPhone
1.00
iMac
4.00
iPad
1.35
Year
Model
EF (kgCO2e)
% manufacturing
EF manufacturing (kgCO2e)
Source
2023
Galaxy
A14
42.5
78%
33.20
2023
Galaxy
A54
49.2
69%
33.90
2023
Galaxy
S23 FE
47.5
79%
37.50
2023
Galaxy
S23
53
85%
45.00
2023
Galaxy
S23+
58.8
84%
49.22
2023
Galaxy
S23 Ultra
70.6
85%
60.22
2024
Galaxy
S24 Ultra
66.4
86%
56.90
2024
Galaxy
S24+
54.8
85%
46.47
2024
Galaxy
S24
50.3
84%
42.25
2022
Huawei
Mate 50 Pro
81
88%
71.33
2022
Huawei
Mate 50
75.3
88%
65.95
Country
Percent Refurbished
Percent new
Source
France
19%
81%
)
UK
16%
84%
Austria
15%
85%
Germany
15%
85%
Scandanavia
12%
88%
The Netherlands
11%
89%
Poland
10%
90%
Belgium
9%
91%
Italy
7%
93%
Average
13%
87%
V1.0
This methodology covers projects that refurbish or regenerate used batteries, extend their usable lifetime, reduce hazardous waste, and avoid the production of new batteries. Eligible battery applications include starting, lighting, and ignition (SLI) batteries; light means of transport batteries (LMT); electric vehicle (EV) batteries; and energy storage systems (ESS). Eligible battery chemistries include nickel-metal hydride (NiMH), lithium-ion (Li-ion), and lead-acid (Pb-acid) batteries.
Projects eligible under this methodology are the activities that carry out the technical aspects of refurbishing or regeneration of used batteries at the end of their lifecycle in Europe. These batteries can either be or in their second life. Activities that only recycle batteries (e.g. shred them to collect and use metals), collect used batteries (e.g. buyback schemes), serve as marketplaces for resale, or act as Producer Responsibility Operators (PRO) are not eligible projects.
Marketplaces, battery waste management intermediaries, and battery optimization software companies may act as intermediaries between Riverse and battery second-life projects to assist in the certification process. Signed agreements shall be provided ensuring that the battery second-life project is the principal and final beneficiary of carbon finance.
Treated batteries eligible under this methodology include starting, lighting, and ignition (SLI) batteries; light means of transport batteries (LMT); electric vehicle (EV) batteries; and energy storage systems (ESS). Other collected waste battery types such as portable batteries and portable batteries of general use are not eligible under this methodology. New, unused batteries obtained from overproduction are not eligible under this methodology.
This methodology distinguishes between two types of processes enabling a battery's second life:
Refurbishing: involves a lighter process to restore battery packs to optimal working conditions. This includes but is not limited to mechanical repairs such as cosmetic damage (casing), deep discharge, component replacement, fuse replacements, battery management system (BMS) repair and balancing, wiring harness repairs, and cleaning the battery. In this process, any damaged or low-quality battery units and auxiliary components are replaced with either reused or new parts. In the E this is defined as battery remanufacturing.
Regeneration: in addition to the battery refurbishing steps above, regeneration involves a more complex process of regenerating battery packs through methods such as applying electrical pulses and replacing the battery’s electrolytes to reverse some of the chemical degradation within the battery. The goal is to restore the battery's performance by reverting its degradation process without the need for replacing its core components, usually enabling it to return to its initial use application.
Both refurbishing and regeneration activities are eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits (RCCs) under this methodology.
One project corresponds to the battery second life sites within one registered company/holding company located within one country.
Eligibility criteria that do not require specific methodology instructions are not described here. These include:
Measurability
Real
Additionality
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
The project biobased material must have an expected carbon-storage duration of 100 years or more to be eligible for removal RCCs. Note that the carbon storage duration may differ from the reference service lifetime.
The expected carbon-storage duration shall include the total years that carbon remains stored in the project biobased material. This includes its first use, plus additional years if the material is recycled, reused, or disposed of in a landfill.
By default, the carbon-storage duration shall equal the reference service lifetime declared in the material’s EPD.
Project Developers may justify a longer carbon-storage duration than the reference service lifetime. The justification shall be based on reputable sources, such as scientific literature, industry reports, public databases, or performance tests, among others.
For composite materials made of multiple components with different lifetimes, the carbon storage duration of the final product shall be used, even if some components have different lifetimes.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Riverse Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The project Developer or the Riverse Certification team may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each reversal risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal, OR
additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal RCCs for each high or very high risk
For projects that manufacture biobased construction materials, Project Developers shall prove that users of the project biobased material (e.g. building developers) will not issue carbon credits for their incorporation into buildings.
For the top buyers of the project biobased material that make up a sum of 80% of materials purchased annually, the Project Developer shall provide signed agreements with each buyer stating that the defined type and amount of biobased materials have already been issued carbon credits, and they commit to not issue carbon credits for that material in the building.
Project Developers shall communicate the same information to customers via marketing, packaging, or examples of sales contracts.
For projects that use project biobased materials in buildings, Project Developers shall prove that the biobased materials used were not already issued carbon credits for their manufacture and sale.
The Project Developer shall provide signed agreements with the top suppliers of biobased construction materials that make up a sum of 80% of biobased materials used in the building, stating that the construction materials used have not already been issued carbon credits.
If part of the project’s biobased components have already been issued carbon credits, the remaining portion of biobased components are still eligible. Signed agreements do not exclude a project from issuing RCCs for all of their biobased components– only for the components that have already been issued carbon credits in another project.
Project developers shall prove that their project provides at least 2 co-benefits from the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) framework (and no more than 4).
Common co-benefits of biobased construction projects are detailed in Table 1. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Common co-benefits that biobased construction material projects may provide are detailed, including types of proof that can be used to justify each co-benefit.
Project Developers shall explain how the project biobased material substitutes the baseline material according to the following characteristics: function of the product, service lifetime, performance, and price/quality.
Performance indicators vary by material type, but may include insulation capacity, load bearing capacity, or compressive strength.
Sources for this criteria may include performance tests, dynamic thermal studies, secondary reports, scientific literature, and EPDs.
If the performance of the primary function of the project biobased material is different from the baseline material, this must be accounted for in the baseline scenario and project scenario selection.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Forest management, land use and deforestation
Intensive cultivation of biomass with fertilizers, irrigation and pesticides
Use of dedicated crops, competition for food and agricultural land
Distant transport of biomass
Chemical treatment of construction materials
Energy intensive processing
Worsened energy or other performance in the use stage
The project’s avoided GHG emissions should not be indirectly transferred elsewhere.
Project Developers shall transparently evaluate the potential leakage risks from activity shifting and from upstream/downstream emissions in the PDD. Note that due to the LCA approach for GHG reduction quantification, most relevant upstream and downstream emissions are likely already included in the quantification.
Any material sources of leakage that cannot be mitigated shall be conservatively included in the GHG reduction calculations or the discount factor.
Eligibility criteria that do not require specific methodology instructions are not described here. This includes:
Measurability
Real
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
For any type of barrier analysis, audited financial documents shall be provided as proof. These documents should either demonstrate the financial status to prove financial barriers or show that the project could not independently fund solutions to overcome institutional or technological barriers.
No additional measures for double issuance are required because double issuance among actors in the supply chain is unlikely, given that battery collectors and recyclers are not eligible under this methodology.
Common co-benefits of battery refurbishing and regeneration projects, and their sources of proof, are detailed in Table 1. Project developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
SDG 13 on Climate Action by default is not considered a co-benefit here, since it is implicitly accounted for in the issuance of carbon credits. If the project delivers climate benefits that are not accounted for in the GHG reduction quantifications, then they may be considered as co-benefits.
Table 1 Summary of common co-benefits provided by battery refurbishing and/or regeneration projects. Co-benefits are organized under the United Nation Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDGs) framework.
Second life batteries are expected to have a shorter lifespan and performance than new batteries, primarily due to wear and degradation from their initial use, and therefore do not fully replace new batteries on a 1:1 basis. Two factors are considered here:
Battery State of Health (SoH): represents the battery's performance, and is used here as supplementary information to adjust the battery's second-life lifespan. Second life batteries typically do not reach the same 100% SoH as new batteries, although it is technically possible.
Even if a second-life battery were restored to a near-perfect SoH of 100%, demonstrating a high ability to store and deliver energy compared to its original capacity, it is still assumed to have a reduced lifespan compared to a brand-new battery due to the cumulative wear from its previous application. In the absence of real-world data from Project Developers (PDs), this assumption will be adopted.
The number of new batteries replaced by a second-life battery is calculated by 1) taking the ratio of the second-life battery’s lifetime to that of a new battery, and 2) multiplying this by the second-life battery's SoH.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high-risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project
Improper on-site storage of non-functional batteries
Energy intensive processing
Greenhouse gas emissions from transport for collection
Worker health and safety
Frequent replacement of batteries due to shortened lifetime (rebound effect)
Frequent replacement of batteries due to economic incentives (rebound effect)
Export of reconditioned or regenerated batteries from Europe to countries with less stringent waste treatment standards
Release of pollutants and hazardous chemicals during the refurbishing/regeneration process
Leakage may occur when carbon-emitting activities are geographically displaced or relocated to areas outside the project boundaries as a direct result of the project's implementation. For battery refurbishing and regeneration, this includes:
There is a risk that a regenerated or refurbished battery is transferred to different countries with less stringent waste treatment standards than their original country. This can occur in the form of the refurbished battery itself, which will undergo waste treatment in the country where it is sold and distributed.
Project Developers shall transparently evaluate the likelihood of the above leakage risks in the PDD, plus any other project-specific leakage risks deemed relevant by the Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB.
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow a robust, recognized method and good practice guidance. The overall methodological approach is a comparative life cycle assessment (LCA) at the project-scale, based on ISO 14064-2:2019.
Project biobased materials with an expected carbon storage duration of less than 100 years are only eligible for avoidance RCCs. Materials with an expected carbon storage duration of 100 years or longer are eligible for removal and avoidance RCCs.
The avoided emissions between the project and baseline scenarios shall be compared on the basis of a common functional unit.
The functional unit shall describe the amount, units, lifetime, and function of the building material for the project and baseline scenario.
Annual avoided emissions are calculated by multiplying the avoided emissions per functional unit by the quantity of project biobased materials sold over the year (for building material manufacturers), or the quantity of project biobased materials used in a building (for building developers).
The Project scenario shall represent the manufacture or use of biobased construction materials by the project during the reporting period (typically 1 year).
The baseline scenario shall represent the conditions or practices that would occur in the absence of the project. The baseline scenario depends on the project-specific context (e.g. project biobased material, country...), but shall follow the same standard guidelines:
Identify the replaced construction product: define the application of the project biobased material that is being replaced (e.g., thermal insulation for flat roofs).
Identify products with a similar application, performance, lifetime, price as the project biobased material.
If the project biobased material has multiple likely applications, a market mix of likely applications should be used (e.g., thermal insulation for roofs in general).
The market mix should be based on national construction practices/statistics, and come from reliable, recent, and transparent data sources.
Identify the replaced construction material: clearly identify the type of material being replaced (e.g. stone wool or a mix of different materials)
Define the specific material/s that composes the replaced construction product/s (e.g. stone wool used for thermal insulation)
Identify materials with a similar performance, lifetime, price as the project biobased material
By default, a mix of materials from various manufacturers and Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) shall be used to accurately represent the market mix for the specified material type. A specific material type from a particular manufacturer may only be considered with adequate justification and proof.
A material in the national market share may be omitted if it is proven to be an unsuitable equivalent product for the project biobased material.
Select appropriate EPDs for the identified baseline construction product/s and material/s. This selection should be made conservatively and, as much as possible, should respect the geographic location of the project.
Lifetime: e.g. if the project and baseline materials have an expected lifetime of 100 and 50 years, respectively, then twice the amount of the baseline material is needed to fulfill the same function as the project material, since it will be replaced halfway through the project material's lifetime.
When faced with uncertainty in defining a baseline scenario, a conservative choice shall be made.
Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) shall provide the main source of information for both the project and baseline scenarios. EPDs are developed according to EN 15804, which itself is based on ISO 14025.
Information taken from EPDs shall include the project and baseline material’s:
lifetime (Reference Service Lifetime, RSL)
performance characteristics
end of life waste treatment methods
climate change impact (sum of fossil, biogenic, and land use change)
biogenic carbon content
If no EPD is available for a project, then a similar document may be used instead, given that it includes the above information, is independently verified, and follows ISO 14025.
The avoided GHG calculations shall include the cradle-to-grave impacts of the project and baseline scenarios. This corresponds to the “cradle-to-grave and module D” scope that includes all stages of modules A, B, C and D in EN 15804 (Figure 1).
If module D was excluded from either the project or baseline EPD, then the A-C cradle-to-grave scope shall be used for all products in both the baseline and project scenarios.
The following formulas shall be used to calculate the avoided GHG emissions for all projects, regardless of the carbon storage duration:
If the expected carbon storage duration of the project biobased material is 100 years or more, then the project is eligible for removal RCCs in addition to the above-mentioned avoidance RCCs.
Project removals are calculated by subtracting the carbon sequestration of the project biobased material from the induced emissions from producing that material. Net removals are calculated by subtracting project removals from baseline removals.
The biogenic carbon amount reported in the EPD of the project biobased material shall be used as the basis for calculating the amount of carbon removal credits to issue.
Note that any ancillary materials required in the project scenario from avoidance calculations are not included in removal credit calculations.
Note that EPDs report biogenic carbon uptake as a negative value in Module A using the -1/+1 method (common in LCAs of construction), and this must be removed in order to consider only GHG emissions induced by production (see Equation 3).
The use of an assumption for carbon storage duration leads to high uncertainty. This duration can be estimated, using best available information and proof, but it is impossible to know with certainty what will be the fate of the material decades from now.
The baseline scenario selection method has high uncertainty. The requirements outlined here ensure that appropriate baseline materials are selected, but ultimately this remains an assumption and can not be known with certainty.
Note that this covers only the method used to select the baseline scenario. For a given project, the specific baseline scenario selected may have more or less uncertainty, depending on the nature of the project.
Equations 1-5 are used to calculate GHG avoidance and removals and have no uncertainty. They are commonly used and basic equations.
No estimates or secondary data are used at the methodology level. The following secondary data are used as parameters at the project level, and their uncertainties must be assessed for each project. Expected uncertainties, based on the data source, are provided below as a guideline:
The uncertainty at the methodology level is estimated to be moderate to high. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 6% for projects under this methodology.
Monitoring Plans for this methodology shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information by Project Developers:
Transportation distances for the collection of waste batteries until the project's site.
Type and chemistry of collected batteries (Battery A).
Percentage of recycled battery packs, auxiliary components, BMS, and BUs derived from the collected battery packs (Battery A).
The quantity, type, and weight of second-life batteries sold (Battery B) in a functional state, along with their respective State of Health (SoH) and lifespan (optional). If lifespan data is unavailable, conservative assumptions will be made.
Quantity and type of new materials used in the second life battery, as well as any new electrolyte solutions incorporated into the sold battery (Battery B).
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
The Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) is the selected measure of circularity, due to its comprehensive assessment of material flows and alignment with global standards, notably established by The Ellen MacArthur Foundation.
The MCI examines the mass of material flows throughout a product's lifecycle. It evaluates how efficiently materials circulate within a closed-loop system, assigning “more circular” scores to systems that minimize waste and optimize resource reuse. The formula uses input parameters such as material feedstock amount and type (e.g. from recycled, reused, or biological sources), recycling rates, and lifespan extension potential to quantify a product's circularity.
The MCI is a unitless indicator that varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular. The project scenario MCI is compared to the baseline scenario MCI, measuring how much more circular the project scenario is than the baseline.
The MCI methodology has been applied to the battery's second life using the input data presented in Table 5.
V1.0
This is a Carbon Storage Module and covers Marine sub-sediment burial. This module is part of the Riverse BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
This module covers marine sub-sediment burial projects that inject waste and residual biomass feedstock inputs directly into the layer of . Projects shall meet all of the following criteria:
Demonstrate capability to perform MRV as agreed upon in the validated project documentation
Demonstrate a net-negative project carbon footprint based on initial LCA estimates of induced emissions and initial CDR estimates based on modeling
Projects that sink biomass to the seafloor but do not bury and embed it into marine sub-sediments are not eligible.
The entity eligible for receiving carbon finance is the operator performing storage at the sub-sediment burial site. Biomass producers and sub-sediment burial machinery manufacturers are not eligible Project Developers.
Storage must be done in conditions.
Storage must be done in existing accessible . Projects that excavate, dredge or build wells for the sole purpose of accessing sub-sediments or creating sub-sediment conditions are not eligible, due to the associated environmental risks.
Feedstock mix is buried in the predefined storage points, and monitored at the storage site and storage batch level.
Visual proof of each burial event and site closure is required, via imagery documented in the PDD and subsequent Monitoring Reports, to confirm that the site is well-sealed by surrounding sediments or other surface enhancements (e.g. rocks/rubble, clay caps) and confirm closure.
Project Developers may choose to either use:
50/50 issuance: undergo a verification audit by a VVB at the first measurement step and issue the first 50% of removal RCCs on the Riverse registry. Repeat the audit after the following step (Step 5) to issue the remaining 50%, or
One-time issuance: skip the first measurement and verification step, and wait to issue 100% of removal RCCs at the second measurement stage described below (Step 5).
Measurements and reporting are performed for storage batches. Verification and credit issuance is done at the reporting period scale (by default, annually), and groups results for all storage batches concerned during that reporting period. The organization of a project into storage batches, sites and points is described below, and depicted in Figure 1.
Grain size: the majority grain size at the burial sediment depth must be either defined as either clay (0.002-0.05 mm) or sand (0.05-2 mm) for all storage points within a storage site, indicated by >50% of sediment grain size. Defined by recommendations of .
Water depth at storage point: At water depths 1-20 m, water depths must be within 0.5 m. At water depths 20-200 m, water depths must be within 5 m.
Sub-sediment depth of storage: At sub-sediment depths 2-3 m, storage depths must be within 0.5 m. At sub-sediment depths >3 m, storage depths must be within 1 m.
Ongoing burial into the sub-sediment shall last no longer than , to standardize sampling timescales. If burial continues after 31 days, it shall be considered a separate storage batch.
One project may work with different storage batches simultaneously. Each storage batch shall be monitored and reported separately within the same Monitoring Report. Storage batch information shall be monitored and reported at least once per calendar year.
A feedstock mixture is defined as one biomass feedstock or uniform mixtures of feedstocks. One feedstock mixture may be used across several storage batches, but any time the feedstock mixture of one storage batch changes, a new storage batch shall be started.
The feedstock mixture composition may vary by no more than 20% to be considered the same homogeneous feedstock mixture, where the composition is made of feedstocks of a specific type from a specific supplier.
Storage points must meet the criteria outlined in Table 1 to be eligible. The criteria are set to ensure storage points are suitable for permanent carbon storage, are anoxic, and have low reversal risks.
All criteria shall be outlined in the Site Characterization Report, prepared before any burial events occur and submitted with the PDD for the validation audit. In addition, the Site Characterization Report shall provide GPS coordinates of each planned storage point, and a GIS-generated map showing each storage point and the delineation of the associated storage site.
Data sources characterizing storage points must be, in the following order of preference
primary data from a pilot survey e.g. site surveys, in situ measurements and measurements on samples collected at the project site, delivered by the Project Developer, or
secondary data from the specific area concerned (e.g. published peer-reviewed literature or database measurements) or
secondary data from an area that is proven to be sufficiently representative and similar to the project area in the appropriate factors that relate to permanent storage.
Table 1 The required measurements and information for a storage site that must be presented in the Site Characterization Report, before any burial occurs, to justify that the storage site is appropriate for permanent CDR via marine sub-sediment burial.
Sampling occurs at two stages of the project: sampling of the feedstock mixture before burial to establish organic carbon buried, and sampling the feedstock mixture after burial to check for any reversals (i.e. carbon degradation or diffusion. At both stages of sampling, laboratory testing shall provide the following measurements of the feedstock mixture:
% organic carbon content of the solid biomass
% moisture content of the feedstock mixture
density of the feedstock mixture
Two representative samples of the feedstock mixture shall be prepared and sent for laboratory testing per storage batch: one at the beginning (day one) and one at the end of the storage batch (day 31 or an earlier date when the storage batch is complete).
Post-burial monitoring and sampling shall occur:
at least 12 months after the burial event, and
Post-burial monitoring and sampling should be completed using sediment coring, to access the buried biomass, extract samples, and send them to a laboratory to measure the organic content of the solid biomass. Alternative approaches may be considered on a case by case basis, and approved by the VVB, the Riverse Certification team and, if deemed necessary by the Riverse Certification team, an expert peer reviewer.
Sampling and laboratory testing shall be done separately for each storage point. At least three sub-samples shall be taken from each storage point and mixed together to obtain one composite sample for the storage point. Samples can not be mixed from all storage points in one storage site to perform laboratory tests on a composite sample.
Project Developers shall prepare an ex-ante Sampling Plan before any burial events occur, and submit it with the PDD for the validation audit. The Sampling Plan shall describe:
how representative samples will be taken of the feedstock mixture in pre-burial sampling
how to preserve moisture content of feedstock mixture while sending it to the lab
number of samples used for post-burial sampling
strategy for ensuring random/representative/unbiased sampling locations for post-burial sampling
Ideally, the Sampling Procedure should align exactly with the Sampling Plan. However, given real-world challenges that may arise during monitoring, deviations are expected. The purpose of documenting the Sampling Procedure ex-post is to ensure transparency by capturing any adjustments made to the original plan.
The Sampling Procedure shall include all elements listed in the Sampling Plan components section.
The eligibility criteria requirements specific to this module are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and methodologies:
Removal Riverse Carbon Credits (RCCs) issued from marine sub-sediment burial have a permanence horizon of 1000 years.
Permanence is assessed at two points during project certification:
at ex-ante validation it is estimated using literature data and models
during verification it is demonstrated using direct measurements.
Requirements for each stage are detailed below.
At verification, it is assumed that any organic carbon still remaining in the feedstock mixture 12 months after burial will remain permanently stored over 1000 years.
For each storage batch, the organic carbon content in the buried feedstock mixture is measured via sampling at 1-3 months (optional) and 12 months (mandatory) to determine the carbon permanently stored.
If organic carbon loss measured during monitoring exceeds 1% of the initially buried carbon, degradation may be triggered. In this case, the conservative for estimating carbon loss under oxic conditions, which was used at ex-ante validation, shall still be used for verification and carbon credit issuance. This is expected to largely overestimate the actual carbon loss under anoxic conditions.
If organic carbon loss exceeds 5% of the initially buried amount, the project is considered compromised, and carbon credit issuance for the affected storage batches will be paused. The Riverse Certification team will collaborate with Project Developers to determine the cause of the unexpected loss and decide on appropriate corrective actions.
Common co-benefits of Marine sub-sediment burial projects, and their sources of proof, are detailed in Table 2. Project Developers may suggest and prove other co-benefits not mentioned here.
Table 2 Summary of common co-benefits provided by Marine sub-sediment burial projects. Co-benefits are organized under the United Nation Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDGs) framework.
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Projects must follow all national, local, and European (if located in Europe) environmental regulations related to the project activities.
Release of biomass via improper embedding
Release of hydrogen sulfide at oxic-anoxic transition zone
Project activities impacting benthic life
Transfer of harmful pollutants in biomass feedstock
Marine pollution due to ship time spent over storage site
Project Developers must follow all relevant laws and legal requirements for reporting operations to local, federal and international governing bodies. Project Developers must follow the requirements outlined in their permit relating to the amount of tonnes injected if specified, and geographic area permitted for operations.
Permits are typically required for accessing coastal marine sediments and performing sub-sediment burial. The Project Developer must provide written authorization by either 1) the permit granting regulatory authority or 2) by the partner providing the permit demonstrating freedom to operate and perform sub-sediment burial in the geographic area defined in the PDD.
Typically, the EIA should be completed in advance of obtaining permitting for credit generation, and will be completed over the course of operations and reported to Riverse.
EIA may not be required for all permits for storage. When EIA is not required for permitting (e.g. for a research permit or permit exemption), the Project Developer shall demonstrate that a baseline environmental survey has been completed, assessing the elements listed below, and that the potential impacts have been considered to be within regulatory guidelines. This justification shall be evaluated by both the VVB and the Riverse Certification Team. Project Developers shall provide the same information as they would in a full EIA to Riverse for project validation, and cover aspects including:
Marine protected areas
Benthic habitat
Fishing grounds
Shipping lanes
Subsea infrastructure
Materials of historical significance
Baseline environmental survey and/or EIA must address how the project adheres to regulatory requirements such as limitations on sediment resuspension and habitat destruction due to seabed intervention.
The system boundary of this quantification section starts after burial of feedstock mixture and covers carbon storage through end of life after 1000 years, and accounts for potential re-emission and decay modeled for 1000+ years. Sources of GHG emissions covered in this module include only permanent carbon storage modeling. Other GHG emissions shall be taken from the accompanying modules.
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 3. These data shall be included in the project’s PDD and made publicly available.
Secondary data taken from the literature are used to define default values for the parameters outlined in Table 4. These values are only used for ex-ante validation models, and will be replaced by project measurements during verification.
Table 4 Values from scientific literature that may be used instead of primary data, for validation stage ex-ante carbon degradation modeling.
Carbon storage is calculated by subtracting the amount of organic carbon degraded over 1000 years from the amount of initially buried organic carbon.
Carbon burial is measured using the amount of feedstock mixture buried, and its measured organic carbon content.
If monitoring measurements at 1-3 months or at 12-months show that >1% of buried organic carbon has been degraded and/or diffused, then the conservative models used at validation shall be applied to issue RCCs. See Eq. 4.
Nevertheless, oxic-environment rate constants are applied in ex-ante modeling here, which is a conservative approach because this is expected to overestimate potential degradation in the sub-sediment burial anoxic conditions. This methodology may be revised to account for new measurements of anoxic-condition rate constants.
The literature values used here are intended to conservatively overestimate carbon loss, because they are taken from experiments under oxic conditions where degradation is more likely than in the anoxic conditions required under this methodology.
The entirety of buried biomass will be securely located in the seabed, allowing point-source monitoring of organic carbon degradation via measurement of organic carbon content.
Organic carbon degradation is . 12 months is an appropriate and sufficiently long timeframe to determine how much carbon degradation (if any) will occur over 1000 years.
Biomass degradation will either begin after embedding in the sub-sediment following a logarithmic relationship (), or it will not occur at all.
The rate of organic carbon degradation under oxic conditions is greater than the rate under anoxic conditions.
Biomass degradation can be measured by tracking organic carbon content of samples of the buried feedstock mixture over time.
Storage points will not experience re-suspension or re-working such that burial biomass is exposed to the water column over 1000 years.
The site characteristics and requirements detailed in Table 1 are suitable to identify sub-sediment areas that are anoxic.
The uncertainty in this module is assessed below for each component.
The baseline scenario selection has low uncertainty: it is certain that the share of project technology occurring in a Business as Usual scenario is very low.
they are conservative assumptions, representing oxic conditions where carbon degradation is assumed to be higher than in the anoxic conditions required for burial under the present module, and
Low Uncertainty
Buried feedstock is securely stored in sub-sediment.
Biomass degradation can be tracked by measuring organic carbon over time.
Organic carbon degrades faster in oxic than anoxic conditions.
The site traits outlined in Table 1 are suitable for identifying anoxic sub-sediment areas.
Oxygen penetration depth can be used to estimate methane diffusion.
Moderate Uncertainty
Organic carbon degrades quickly at first, following a logarithmic trend; 12 months is a suitable measurement period.
Storage points remain undisturbed for 1000 years, preventing biomass exposure.
The uncertainty at the module level is estimated to be low. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects under this module.
The following information shall be provided for verification of each storage batch:
This appendix outlines the scientific foundation for sub-sediment biomass storage, summarizing key research on organic carbon degradation and preservation in marine sediments. While no studies directly replicate the conditions described in this module, relevant literature on similar processes is compiled.
Hydrogen sulfide, though toxic, is rapidly oxidized in oxygenated environments, preventing marine toxicity. Additionally, 10–20% of HS reacts with iron hydrates to form pyrite (FeS), further stabilizing organic matter (Barber et al., 2017; Baumgartner et al., 2023).
Methanogenesis, consuming 15% of CO₂ from sulfate oxidation, contributes to organic carbon degradation (Regnier et al., 2011). Over time, sediment compaction reduces porosity, slowing diffusion and promoting FeS formation. This further limits CO₂ and methane movement, allowing microbial utilization.
Long-term biomass preservation in marine sediments is driven by low OET, rapid burial, and anoxic conditions. Anoxic degradation is significantly slower than oxic processes, enhancing the stability of buried carbon. Existing research supports the feasibility of sub-sediment biomass storage as a durable carbon sequestration strategy.
ESDNH indicators may be measured by the Project Developer within the validation stage to reduce project risk, and suggested monitoring during the verification stage.
Hydrogen sulfide is toxic to benthic life, and excessive production may exceed oxidation rates, increasing ecological risk.
Methane, a potent greenhouse gas, can also impact benthic organisms if released.
Suggested monitoring plan additions to monitor environmental harms
Table 5: Summary of observation of furrowing and rippled scour depressions in literature
This page describes the changes in the Marine sub-sediment burial module.
Table A1 List of ecoinvent 3.10 processes used in the GHG quantification model
Table A2 Summary of assumed lifetimes, of new and refurbished batteries by .
Table A3 Summary of baseline scenario battery waste treatment, per battery type and chemistry.
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow the method detailed below, based on.
Battery second life projects are only eligible for avoidance Riverse Carbon Credits.
Battery second life projects serve two functions: (1) waste treatment from a battery’s first life (Battery A), and (2) the provisioning of a “new” battery in its second life (Battery B). Both of these functions are included in the project and baseline scenario.
The baseline scenario represents the functionally equivalent set of activities that would occur in the absence of the project. Therefore, the baseline scenario is the average waste battery treatment of Battery A, and the market mix for production of a new Battery B.
The distribution, packaging, use, and waste treatment of Battery B are not included in the calculations because they are assumed to be the same in both scenarios. Therefore, the downstream system boundary is Battery B at the factory gate.
Calculations and data collection are based on annual project operations.
Battery second life projects are multifunctional so the functional unit is twofold:
production of one battery (Battery B), plus
treatment of the corresponding amount of battery waste treated (from Battery A) to generate this one Battery.
All data shall be provided per battery type and chemistry because they use distinct materials and production processes, leading to varying environmental impacts, particularly during production and end-of-life waste treatment. This ensures an accurate assessment of emissions across the lifecycle.
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 2:
Secondary data taken from the literature are used to define default values for the following elements:
Battery’s expected lifetime (first and second life), when real-life data from the project is inaccessible.
Battery unit (cells and modules) percentage, by mass, in a battery pack, when real-life data from the project is inaccessible.
A battery pack consists of several essential components, which vary depending on the battery type, manufacturer, and chemistry. To facilitate data collection, the entry battery pack is divided into three main components (see Figure 1 for a depiction of a battery pack with the following breakdown):
Battery unit (BU): responsible for the battery's primary function—energy storage and delivery. It contains potentially hazardous materials and heavy metals, making it a critical focus for environmental and safety considerations. Its structure and design vary depending on factors such as the battery type, manufacturer, intended application, and chemical composition. In this methodology, it is assumed that the BU shape (e.g. cylindrical or prismatic) does not influence its environmental impacts.
and batteries are assembled from individual cells or modules (groups of cells combined to create standardized units of capacity and voltage).
batteries are typically constructed as single units rather than separated into distinct cells or modules. In this methodology, Pb-acid batteries are considered a single BU.
Battery management system (BMS): the second most impactful component of a battery in terms of GHG emissions, due to its complex manufacturing process.
Battery auxiliary components (AC): other components that are not classified as BU or BMS. e.g. casings (e.g. aluminum, steel), connectors, and electronic control systems. It is assumed that all mass of the battery pack that is not BU or BMS is AC.
The BMS weight per kg of the battery pack may vary depending on multiple factors such as the battery type, chemistry, and manufacturer. Due to the lack of precise data per battery type and chemistry, it is assumed that the BMS rate is 2% by mass of the battery pack based on the ecoinvent process for Li-ion battery production.
The waste collection and transport distance for Battery A in the baseline scenario is determined using bounding analysis to identify the most conservative value. A distance of 1800 km is assumed for all battery chemistries under this methodology except Pb-acid. For Pb-acid, this value is assumed 500 km. The considered distances reflect the maximum distance between existing battery recycling facilities in Europe. These values can also be applied to the Project scenario if no project-specific data are available.
The waste collection for Battery A is assumed to be done 100% by truck within Europe.
In the project scenario, in the absence of project data, it is conservatively assumed that 100% of the BMS and AC from collected waste batteries (Battery A) are not reused and, therefore, recycled.
The distribution of Battery B in the baseline and project scenarios is assumed to be the same and is therefore excluded from quantifications. This is a conservative assumption because new batteries in the baseline scenario are , and transported long distances. In contrast, the project scenario consists of mostly inter-EU shipping of batteries across much shorter distances.
Packaging, use, and waste treatment of Battery B are assumed to be the same in the baseline and project scenarios and are therefore excluded from quantifications.
It is assumed that when any battery component fails, the entire battery pack becomes non-functional, because the failure of even a single component—such as a cell, module, or critical part like the BMS—renders the whole battery pack inoperable. Therefore the input battery is assumed to be true waste, and no residual value is allocated from its first life. This means that new, unused batteries obtained from overproduction are not eligible under this methodology.
In the project scenario, the battery cleaning process involves (a) degreasing to remove oils and grease applicable to all battery types (2 ml degreaser per kg of battery pack), and (b) for Pb-acid batteries, neutralizing residual electrolytes using baking soda solution (0.08 ml solution per kg of battery pack). For cleaning, cloth is used (17g of cloth per kg of battery). These assumptions are based on estimates by the Project Developers. Only sold second-life batteries are assumed to be cleaned.
It is estimated that the electrolyte in a Pb-acid battery constitutes approximately of the total battery weight.
The Pb-acid batteries electrolyte solution is assumed to be made of sulfuric acid and 62% water.
In the regeneration of Pb-acid batteries, the electrolyte waste from Battery A (if present), is assumed to be neutralized using lime (CaO). The required amount of lime for neutralization is determined based on the chemical reaction between lime and sulfuric acid.
The Pb-acid battery lead content is assumed to be . This value is used to calculate the impacts related to the Pb-acid battery waste treatment. Lead recovery process has efficiency.
There are two main types of battery recycling treatment: pyrometallurgy and hydrometallurgy. Each battery chemistry is assumed to have the following repartition of the waste treatment process:
Li-ion: .
NiMH: assumed to be 100% through pyrometallurgical treatment. Even though hydrometallurgy is the most common process for recycling NiMH batteries, .
Pb-acid: 100% through remelting.
In the absence of the project, the Battery A end-of-life would have been treated according to the current market shares in Europe, which are detailed per battery type and chemistry in Table 3.
In the baseline scenario, the lithium-ion battery market share for NMC is assumed to be evenly distributed across two specific compositions: NMC811 and NMC111. Although other NMC compositions may exist, these are used due to the limited data availability.
It is assumed that a rather small amount of new battery purchases come from existing refurbishing activities due to the novelty of the technology . The market share of the project technology currently in use is assumed to be zero.
In the baseline scenario, a portion of both separately collected and non-separately collected batteries will be repurposed for second life use. The environmental impacts associated with processing these batteries for second life applications are excluded from the baseline impact assessment due to the application of cutoff criteria.
LMT: The PRO collection scheme target for 2028 is set at 51% from the EU . Therefore, the collection targets are assumed to be 51% for separate collection through PRO schemes and 49% for batteries collected outside of PRO schemes.
EV/HE, SLI, and ESS: These batteries do not have a collection target because the Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) systems are required to separately collect 100% of waste batteries. Therefore, none will go to incineration or landfilling, and they will all be recycled.
The project scenario consists of preparing used batteries for a second life, which serve two functions: 1) waste treatment of the battery after its first life (Battery A) and 2) preparation for reuse/repurpose to produce a “new“ battery via refurbishment/regeneration (Battery B). This process is broken down into 3 life cycle stages, and displayed in Figure 2:
Battery A waste collection
Battery A waste treatment
Battery B preparation for reuse or repurpose
To calculate the transport distance, Project Developers must provide the distance from the collection source to the battery's second life project site. Additionally, for better project understanding, the country and/or city from which the used battery packs are transported can be included in the project's risk assessment.
Battery packs and/or parts collected by the project that cannot be successfully prepared for reuse are processed through recycling.
Battery second life projects typically partner with certified recycling companies that are equipped to handle hazardous materials. These companies must be capable of managing BU, BMS and auxiliary components
Project Developers shall provide the percent of collected BUs, BMS, and ACs that are recycled.
Some ACs such as the battery casing, cables, and cooling system, may be removed from batteries destined for recycling, and kept onsite to harvest spare parts in the future. If limited project data is available on this topic, they are conservatively assumed to be 100% recycled.
This life cycle stage is composed of some shared common steps across all battery second-life projects, plus different steps depending on the battery's second life technology implemented: refurbishing or regeneration.
Pieces that remain in good condition are prepared for reuse or repurposing through processes such as refurbishing or regeneration, and used in new second-life batteries.
Final testing and validation consume electricity and ensure the battery’s safety and functionality before it is partially charged (usually up to 60%), packaged, and distributed for reuse.
The refurbishing process typically includes electricity use for testing and charging, and may also involve replacing used, non-functional BUs, BMS or ACs with new ones. All components are cleaned and reassembled into a "new" refurbished battery pack. This pack undergoes strict quality control checks to ensure compliance.
Refurbished batteries are frequently repurposed for new applications, such as transitioning from their original use in electric vehicles (EVs) to energy storage systems (ESS) or low means of transport (LMT).
The regeneration process is only suitable for some BUs with specific chemistries (e.g. NiMH and Li-ion).
In addition to the common steps, and in some cases the refurbishing steps, regeneration involves sending controlled high-frequency pulses of electricity through the battery unit, and may include desulfation and the replacement of chemicals/electrolytes (for Pb-acid batteries).
Once regenerated, the battery is often reused in its first life application as regeneration can achieve similar performance as for a new battery.
In the first verification period, carefully tracked electricity data is used to calculate the project’s average kWh consumption per battery type or process step (e.g., inspection, testing, recharging). This average is then applied to all future monitoring periods.
The baseline scenario is composed of two main functions, to represent the same functions as the project scenario: 1) waste treatment of the battery after its first life (Battery A) and 2) provisioning of a new battery (Battery B). The system boundary of the baseline scenario is shown in Figure 3. This is broken down into 3 life cycle stages, which are detailed in the following sections:
Battery A collection
Battery A waste treatment
Manufacturing of Battery B
The baseline scenario shall be reviewed annually by the Riverse climate team to account for any potential changes in regulations. Additionally, it shall be updated using project data to reflect the functional equivalent of the project's annual operations, considering the number and type of batteries collected and prepared for reuse.
The structure of the baseline scenario is the same whether the project consists of ongoing operations or an expansion. In the former, project data from all annual site operations is considered, and the baseline scenario is defined as the functional equivalent of all annual operations. For an expansion project, only project data related to the expansion is considered, because the normal annual operations would be the same in the baseline and project scenario, and can therefore be excluded.
It is assumed that battery waste is transported by truck 1800 km to its waste treatment center.
The mass of battery waste collected in the baseline scenario equals the total mass of input used batteries collected by the battery second-life project in the monitoring period.
Battery waste that is not separately collected is assumed to eventually be sent for specialized battery waste recycling through pyrometallurgical or hydrometallurgical processes. This assumption is based on the , which requires specific treatment technologies. Improperly managed battery waste that is not separately collected typically undergoes incineration or landfilling.
A portion of both separately collected and non-separately collected batteries will be repurposed for second life use. The environmental impacts associated with processing these batteries for second life applications are excluded from the baseline impacts due to the cutoff criteria for recycling (the impacts would instead be included in the second-life battery).
The number of new batteries to consider in the baseline scenario corresponds to the number of batteries successfully prepared for reuse and sold in a functional state in the project scenario, adjusted by the shorter lifetime consideration for second life batteries.
To quantify avoided GHG emissions, the baseline scenario must consider the market share of the project technology already in use. Precise data on this topic are unavailable, but it is assumed that a rather small amount of new battery purchases come from existing refurbishing activities due to the novelty of the technology (<1%). The market share of the project technology currently in use is assumed to be zero.
The process and GHG impacts of manufacturing a new battery are taken from the ecoinvent database.
Avoided GHG emissions are calculated by subtracting the sum of the project scenario GHG emissions from the sum of the baseline GHG scenario emissions.
Uncertainty shall be evaluated at both the methodology level and the project level. The project-level uncertainty assessment must consider the uncertainty in the methodology, which is inevitably passed down to each project.
The uncertainty assessment below must be complemented by a project-specific uncertainty assessment. The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of avoided emissions to eliminate with the discount factor.
The assumptions that are estimated to have high uncertainty (i.e. high variability and high impact) are:
Second life batteries are assumed to have a shorter lifetime than new batteries. In the baseline scenario, new battery production is adjusted based on the lifespan of both new and second life batteries, as well as the second life battery SoH. It is assumed that the SoH serves as a proxy for the remaining performance of the battery.
The market share of the project's technology currently in use is assumed to be zero. While this assumption has a strong impact on the estimated avoided emissions, it remains reasonable based on expert opinion, which indicates that less than 1% of new battery purchases come from existing refurbishing activities due to the technology's novelty.
The assumptions that are estimated to have moderate uncertainty are:
Batteries in the same battery type category and chemistry have similar characteristics (component percentages, emission factor, lifetime)
In the absence of project data, it is conservatively assumed that 100% of the BMS and AC collected are not reused and, therefore, recycled.
The electrolyte in a Pb-acid battery constitutes approximately of the total battery weight.
The Pb-acid battery lead content is assumed to be .
In the baseline scenario, 70% of batteries undergoing a second-life process are reused, while 30% will be recycled.
In the baseline scenario, the Li-ion NMC is assumed to be evenly distributed across two specific compositions: NMC811 and NMC111.
The assumptions that are estimated to have low uncertainty (i.e. low variability and low impact) are:
A battery pack is divided into three main components: BU, BMS, and AC.
The BMS rate is 2% by mass of the battery pack.
In the baseline scenario, the waste collection and transport distance of Battery A is assumed to be 1800 km for Li-ion and NiMH battery chemistries, and 500 km for Pb-acid batteries.
The collection of batteries in Europe is done 100% by truck.
The distribution, packaging, use, and waste treatment of Battery B in the baseline and project scenarios are the same.
When any battery component fails, the entire battery becomes non-functional, so no residual value is allocated to the collected waste batteries.
It is assumed that all second life batteries (Battery B) sold by the project will undergo cleaning with degreaser and electrolytes neutralizer depending on the battery chemistry.
In the regeneration of Pb-acid batteries, if the battery's electrolyte is changed, the waste electrolyte is assumed to be neutralized using lime (CaO).
There are two main types of battery recycling treatment: pyrometallurgy and hydrometallurgy depending on the battery chemistry.
In the absence of the project, the battery end-of-life would have been treated according to the market shares in Europe.
The environmental impacts associated with processing second life batteries are excluded from the baseline impact assessment due to the application of cutoff criteria.
The baseline scenario selection has low uncertainty. It accounts for project-specific information regarding the number and type of devices, and fate of devices is based on European battery waste management regulations.
The equations used in this methodology consist of basic conversions and have low uncertainty.
The uncertainty at the methodology level is estimated to be moderate. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 6% for projects under this methodology.
V1.0
This is a Transformation Module and covers any avoided emissions from the production and export of energy co-products. This module is part of the Riverse BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
This module is optional, and not all projects will use this module.
This module covers energy co-products and the resulting avoided emissions related to BiCRS projects. It is used for issuing avoidance RCCs, whereas the rest of the methodology focuses on removal RCCs. Types of energy co-products may include but are not limited to:
direct combustion of syngas for heat
combustion of syngas in combined heat and power (CHP) plants for heat and electricity
combustion of syngas to generate steam for electricity
bio-oil use as biofuel
heat for district heating or industrial use
The eligibility criteria requirements specific to this module are detailed in the sections below. Other eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and methodologies:
Project Developers shall prove that the project does not contribute to substantial environmental and social harms.
Project Developers shall prove that they follow all European, national, and local environmental regulations related to pollution from energy combustion (e.g. syngas, bio-oil...).
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall justify the selection of an avoided baseline energy source by demonstrating that their energy co-products is an appropriate, realistic and efficient substitute. This may be done using, for example,
direct measurements of the co-product's characteristics
contractual agreements specifying the required standards for the energy co-product or
reliable secondary/literature data detailing well-documented, consistent properties of the co-product.
The energy co-product may replace a specific energy source if it is known (e.g. natural gas) or a mix of energy sources (e.g. grid electricity, or average national heat sources). If the energy source is not specifically known, the replaced energy source shall be conservatively chosen.
The amount substituted shall be calculated based on the energy content of both the project's energy co-product and the baseline avoided energy product.
The GHG reduction quantification instructions from all other modules used by the project must be used in conjunction with the present module in order to obtain full life-cycle GHG reduction quantifications.
The additional quantification steps required in this module only relate to the baseline emissions from the avoided energy source. No additional project emissions are accounted for here, since the project's full life-cycle GHG emissions are already reported and quantified in other modules.
Monitoring and quantification may be done per Production Batch, or per calendar year. Verification shall be done annually by summing the GHG reduction quantifications for each production batch produced in the calendar year.
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 1.
Table 1 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for initial project certification and validation. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see Monitoring Plan section).
If the project undergoes ex-ante validation, estimations and calculations may be accepted instead of measured primary data. These shall be replaced by measured primary data upon verification. Any estimates and calculations should be justified with:
process engineering documents
technical specifications for machinery
measured data from previous projects or from the scientific literature
statistics or databases
Note that conservative estimates and calculations shall always be made to avoid overestimating provisional credits.
The project scenario is the sum of induced GHG emissions from all other processes in other modules that are related to the generation of the energy co-product.
These processes may be shared with the carbon storage solution (e.g. transport of biomass to the transformation site), but for the purpose of issuing avoidance RCCs, these emissions shall be fully allocated to the energy co-product.
Any processes that take place after the carbon storage solution and energy co-product are generated, and that are not shared between them (e.g. transport of biochar to the agricultural field, permanent carbon storage), shall be excluded from the project scenario for energy co-products.
All life cycle emissions from the avoided energy source shall be accounted for in the baseline scenario. This includes raw material extraction, processing, upgrading, distribution, and if relevant, combustion.
Uncertainty may come from project data, but this is estimated to be negligible, since it is required to come from a direct measurement.
There is low uncertainty from the baseline scenario selection, where the specific type of energy replaced may not be known, in which case the replaced energy source shall be conservatively chosen.
The uncertainty at the module level is estimated to be low. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects that have significant GHG impacts from avoided energy products.
Monitoring Plans for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each Production Batch and/or each calendar year:
Amount and type of energy product avoided by the project's energy co-product.
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
The table below presents a non-exhaustive selection of Ecoinvent activities that may be used in the GHG reduction calculations for this module. Additional activities may be used for any project, if the following selection does not cover all relevant activities.
Table A1 List of ecoinvent 3.10 processes used in the GHG reduction quantification model, all processes are from the cutoff database
V1.0
This is a Transformation Module and covers the upstream and downstream transportation throughout the project lifecycle. This module is part of the Riverse BiCRS methodology, which allows Project Developers to choose the relevant modules for their project, and shall be used with the necessary accompanying modules.
This module covers transportation steps throughout the project life cycle and over several modes of transportation.
Transportation steps covered include but are not necessarily limited to feedstock transportation to the processing site and product transportation to the permanent storage site.
Modes of transportation currently include road and sea transport. Other modes will be included in future versions of this module and may be proposed by Project Developers on a case-by-case basis.
There are no eligibility criteria requirements specific to this module. Eligibility criteria requirements shall be taken from the accompanying modules and methodologies:
The GHG reduction quantification instructions from all other modules used by the project must be used in conjunction with the present module in order to obtain full life-cycle GHG reduction quantifications.
This module covers the life cycle GHG emissions from all transportation of feedstock and transportation of carbon storage solutions by road and sea.
Two main life cycle stages are considered:
Energy use emissions
Embodied emissions
The required primary data from projects are presented in Table 1 and vary depending on the approach chosen (fuel or distance-based).
Data shall be reported from Project Developers for each and then converted to the abovementioned functional unit upon annual verification.
Table 1 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source. One asterisk (*) indicates which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see Monitoring Plan section). Two asterisks (**) indicate which data are optional, where a conservative default choice will be applied.
Secondary data is used for the fuel combustion emission factor and is presented in Table 2 and 3 below.
After analyzing the impacts of four different truck categories, the emissions for medium truck transport are averaged across two truck sizes: 7.5-16 tons and 16-32 tons.
If proof about the following transport segment (e.g. B back to A, or B onwards to C) cannot be provided, it is assumed that the transport unit returns empty with the same GHG emissions as the initial transport segment.
Embodied emissions from road transport include upstream emissions from truck manufacturing, road construction, and ongoing maintenance. For ship transport, embodied emissions cover at least the emissions associated with the ship itself, its maintenance, and the port facilities.
Table 2 Summary of outbound journey average load factor per truck category. Calculated based on ecoinvent assumptions.
Table 3 Summary of outbound journey average load factor per ship category. Calculated based on ecoinvent assumptions.
The three approaches to model energy use emissions from transport are detailed below.
This approach accounts for emissions from:
upstream energy production and processing
direct GHG emissions from combustion (if fuel is the energy source rather than electricity)
The shall be taken from Table 4. Project Developers may suggest emission factors for other fuel types not included here if they:
are based on reputable, transparent sources
are geographically accurate for the project's context
are approved by the VVB and the Riverse Certification team.
When details about the total energy consumption or vehicle energy efficiency are unavailable, GHG emissions from transport shall be modeled using:
default ecoinvent emission factors,
the weight of the product i transported through the segment s, in tonnes, and
the distance traveled.
For road transport, Project Developers shall select one of the following truck category sizes:
Light category: includes trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) of less than 7.5 tonnes. In the ecoinvent database, this category encompasses lorry size classes of 3.5-7.5 tonnes
Medium category: includes trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) of more than 7.5 tonnes and less than 32 tonnes. In the ecoinvent database, this category encompasses lorry size classes of 7.5-16 tonnes and 16-32 tonnes. The average values from these two truck sizes are used.
Heavy category: includes trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) of more than 32 tonnes. In the ecoinvent database, this category encompasses lorry size class >32t.
For sea transport, Project Developers shall select one of the following ship categories.
Ferry: typically used on short to medium distances.
Container ship: large, ocean-going vessel used to transport cargo in standardized containers, known as TEUs (Twenty-foot Equivalent Units).
Bulk carrier for dry goods: specifically designed to transport unpackaged bulk cargo, such as grains, coal, ores, cement, and other dry commodities
Tanker for liquid goods other than petroleum and liquefied natural gas: designed to transport bulk liquid cargoes other than petroleum and liquefied natural gas (LNG).
Truck, ship and road production and maintenance have significant GHG emissions over their entire lifespan. However, for the purpose of issuing carbon credits, these emissions must be distributed proportionally across the specific transport segment under review ("amortized"), rather than being counted entirely upfront.
This amortization is done on the basis of the amount of travel done in the segment, compared to the total expected amount of travel for the lifetime of the transport unit. The general approach is described below.
The calculations for total project transport emissions are as follows:
Energy amount approach and Energy efficiency approach:
Distance based approach:
Averaging truck sizes: this has low uncertainty since analyses showed that the emission profiles for the two medium truck sizes in ecoinvent were similar.
Empty returns: this has high uncertainty but the most conservative approach is taken in the quantifications.
Using the default ecoinvent load factor: this has high uncertainty, because in ecoinvent, it is assumed that all vehicles are not full. This load factor affects several aspects of the GHG emissions from road transport, and a project's load factor may be higher or lower.
Embodied transport emissions: this has low to moderate uncertainty as the transport unit and road maintenance is the most impactful embodied emissions processes.
The equations have no uncertainty since they are basic conversions.
Direct GHG emissions from combustion are used as secondary data and have moderate uncertainty. These values are not expected to vary significantly within the European fuel mix.
The uncertainty at the module level is estimated to be low. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects that have significant GHG impacts from transport.
Monitoring Plans for this module shall include, but are not limited to, tracking of the following information for each production batch:
Transport unit category used per segment
Amount of fuel per transport segment
Fuel type and fuel production geography per transport segment
Number of trips per transport segment
Transport unit category used per segment
Fuel efficiency and distance traveled per transport segment
Fuel type and fuel production geography per transport segment
Number of trips per transport segment
Truck category used per segment
Distance per transport segment
Weight of transported materials per segment
Number of trips per transport segment
The Project Developer is the party responsible for adhering to the Monitoring Plan.
The table below presents a non-exhaustive selection of ecoinvent activities that may be used in the GHG reduction calculations for this module. Additional activities may be used for any project, if the following selection does not cover all relevant activities.
Table A1 List of ecoinvent 3.10 processes used in the GHG reduction quantification model, all processes are from the cutoff database
*If the solar plant is directly connected to the fuel station, emissions are assumed to be zero.
Table A2 National biofuel policies in Europe per country from - Diesel blend.
Biofuel blends from other countries can be used if they come from reliable sources, and are approved by the Riverse Certification team and the VVB. If data for a specific European country is unavailable, the standard European biofuel percent may be used, which is conservatively estimated to be of the diesel fuel blend.
This page contains the archived versions of the Biogas from anerobic digestion methodology for continuity, transparency, and traceability.
Calculations of GHG emissions for the baseline and project scenarios shall follow a robust, recognized method and good practice guidance. The overall methodological approach is a comparative life cycle assessment (LCA) at the project-scale, based on.
Biogas from anaerobic digestion projects are only eligible for avoidance Riverse Carbon Credits.
Biogas from anaerobic digestion projects have one shared universal main function: energy production.
Projects that use manure and/or slurry as feedstock inputs have an additional function: improved manure/slurry management, which leads to fewer GHG emissions during storage and spreading, and higher nutrient availability reducing the need for mineral fertilizers.
The baseline scenario represents the functionally equivalent set of activities that would occur in the absence of the project. Therefore, the baseline scenario includes:
conventional energy production (mix of fossil fuels and biogas already present in the energy mix).
If the project uses manure and/or slurry, the baseline scenario also includes:
conventional manure and slurry management with higher GHG emissions, and
avoided mineral fertilizer production from manure and slurry application.
If the only function of the project is energy production, the functional unit is 1 GWh of energy delivered.
If the project uses manure and/or slurry as feedstock inputs, then the functional unit is 1 GWh of energy delivered plus the management and use of the equivalent amount of manure/slurry.
The required primary data for GHG reduction calculations from projects are presented in Table 2. These data shall be included in the project’s Project Design Document (PDD) and made publicly available.
Table 2 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for initial project certification and validation. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see Monitoring Plan section).
Secondary data taken from the literature are used to define default values, or provide conversion rates, to obtain the following elements:
Nitrogen, dry matter content, and biochemical methane potential (BMP) of cow and chicken manure and slurry (Table 3);
Percentage of Nitrogen in manure, slurry and different types of digestate (raw, liquid and solid) lost as N2O during storage (Table 3);
Rate of N2O emissions per kg of manure, slurry, digestate, and mineral fertilizer spread on agricultural fields (Table 3 and Table 6);
Amount of N, K2O and P2O5 mineral fertilizer avoided per tonne of manure and slurry
Average number of days manure and slurry are stored in the baseline scenario;
Characteristics of methane, biogas and biomethane;
Leakage rates of methane throughout the biogas production from digestion, purification, boiler for internal use, injection and distribution;
Percent of biogas produced that is used internally;
Emission rates of methane and N2O from combustion of biomethane, in kg/MJ;
Amount and density of digestate produced from feedstock inputs;
Gas mix in the baseline scenario, considering the market shares for natural gas, biomethane and biogas;
These values and their sources are provided in the Assumptions section.
The (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in Appendix 1.
Feedstock inputs that are categorized as waste come with no impacts from their production or first life. They enter the project system boundary during the transport to the biogas site. This includes inputs such as manure, slurry, silo grain residue, spent beer grains, recirculated digestate, or damaged produce that can’t be sold.
In the baseline scenario, the transport distance for manure and/or slurry collection to the storage and use point is .
Emissions of N2O and methane due to manure and slurry storage before the digestion process are linearly related to the amount of days manure and slurry are stored on site. If Project Developers do not have an estimation of this value, an average of 15 days is assumed. In the baseline scenario, this is assumed to be 180 days.
Emissions of N2O from slurry storage, in the project scenario, are that they can be excluded. This is because N2O emissions from slurry storage are generally small, plus the shortened storage duration in the project scenario minimizes them further.
Manure and slurry from pigs, horses, sheep, and other animals are modeled using the same characteristics as cow manure. Only chicken manure is treated differently, due to its high nitrogen content (Table 3).
Buildings and main infrastructure at the biogas site have an assumed lifetime of 20 years. Infrastructure amounts are modeled and extrapolated from the main digester exterior volume (m³) to simplify data collection, after numerous certification projects showed small impacts from infrastructure (1-2% of project life cycle GHG emissions). The ecoinvent process for the anaerobic digestion plant present in Appendix 1 is used, considering 1 m³ of digester volume annually.
Activated carbon used for biogas purification is modeled using a ratio of 0.2 tonnes of activated carbon/GWh of energy produced. The value was taken from biogas projects previously certified by Riverse, and results are not sensitive to changes in this value.
In the project scenario, the amount of biogas self-consumed for onsite heating is assumed to be 4%. Results are not sensitive to changes in this value, which can regularly vary from 2-6% according to previous project data.
The mass of digestate produced is estimated to be 85-95% of the mass of feedstock inputs. A is often considered, according to the literature, expert partner consultation, and a sample of projects’ applications for environmental licenses, where they must do a detailed estimate of digestate production (“Facilities classified for environmental protection”, in French Installations classées pour la protection de l'environnement, ICPE). A conservative value of 85% was chosen. Indeed, the annual amount of digestate produced is not measured at project sites. Rather, sites measure the amount sold. Due to temporal, seasonal restrictions on when digestate can be spread, the amount sold over one calendar year does not correspond to the amount produced in that year. Records of digestate sold are still collected from project developers to validate that this is a reasonable approximation.
Methane emissions during digestate storage are reduced when the digestate is covered (e.g. airtight covers on tanks, not piles of solid digestate under a roof or rain covers). It is assumed that covers.
Nutrient availability in digestate, manure and slurry is . For example, 1 kg of nitrogen applied to soils in digestate is assumed to substitute 1 kg of mineral nitrogen fertilizer.
Table 3a Summary of cow and chicken manure characteristics (from unless otherwise stated).
Table 3b Summary of slurry characteristics (from unless otherwise stated).
The project scenario consists of anaerobic digestion, which serves three functions: 1) biomethane production, 2) digestate production, and if the project uses manure or slurry as a feedstock, 3) improved manure/slurry management. This process is broken down into 4 life cycle stages, displayed in Figure 1:
Feedstock provisioning, transport, and storage;
Digestion and biomethane management;
Digestate storage and spreading;
Avoided fertilizer production.
Project Developers shall provide the amount of each type of feedstock input used annually in tonnes of fresh matter.
Feedstock input types considered in the model include several types of energy cover crops, straw, whole-grain corn crops, manure, slurry, recirculated digestate, and various agro-industrial waste/by-products.
The production and cultivation impacts from non-waste feedstock inputs are modeled using the ecoinvent processes outlined in Appendix 1. These include dedicated crops, energy cover crops, and straw.
Project Developers shall provide the distance that feedstock inputs are transported from their origin to the site. Transport is assumed to be done by truck (see ecoinvent process in Appendix 1). When there are multiple sources of a feedstock, the average weighted distance for each feedstock type shall be used.
Manure and slurry may be stored onsite for several days or weeks if they cannot be added to the digester immediately upon their delivery to the biogas site. During this storage period, methane and N2O are emitted linearly over time. When they are stored for 180 days (a conventional non-biogas scenario), 2% of its nitrogen is emitted as N2O, plus some methane expressed as a fraction of BMP (Table 3). Manure is stored at biogas sites for fewer days than in a conventional scenario, which results in fewer N2O and methane emissions. The ratio of average days manure and slurry are stored at the biogas site, to the average storage duration of 180 days, is detailed in Table 3 (see example in the box below).
Project Developers rarely have detailed receipts and tracking proof of feedstock inputs, even if they informally manage this very precisely for operations. In the absence of proof, calculations are used here to cross check expected biogas production from the given feedstock inputs vs the actual amount of biogas produced. Project Developers shall calculate the expected annual biogas production using the biochemical methane potential (BMP) of the sum of each feedstock input, available in (Equation 6). The calculated expected methane produced value should be of the actual methane produced value based on injection receipts, calculated in the following section in Equation 11. Discrepancy here suggests high uncertainty which may result in a higher discount factor (see Uncertainty Assessment section).
Project Developers shall provide the amount of electricity used onsite annually, in kWh/year, and the electricity source (e.g. grid or onsite solar). A black-box approach is used for electricity consumption, and only the total amount of electricity used on-site is required (i.e. not broken down into different uses).
Leakages of methane throughout the project steps are calculated using leakage rates from the literature, and are summarized in Table 4. Even though modern anaerobic digestion plants only leak small amounts of methane, they can represent . Project sites have sensors to measure large, exceptional methane leaks, but the amounts considered in the GHG reduction quantification are below the threshold of most sensors.
Table 4 Rates of methane and biogas leakage from different steps in the project scenario, based on volume of gas.
Project Developers should provide methane leakage rates from offgas during the purification step. This is typically provided in technical documents or contracts for purification machinery. If this value is not available, a default leakage rate of 0.7% of methane by volume will be used. If offgas is captured and used, this value may be zero.
The biogas and biomethane characteristics presented in Table 5 are used.
Table 5 Characteristics of biogas and biomethane
The most impactful direct emissions from the biomethane combustion step were taken from Table 53 in . This includes 4.93e-7 kg N2O/MJ biomethane, and 1.96E-06 kg biogenic CH4/MJ biomethane.
All infrastructure and machinery are included in this step, even if some are actually used for digestate or feedstock storage described in other sections.
Infrastructure and machinery are modeled in ecoinvent with a process that includes production, transport and disposal of the main materials for an agricultural biogas plant (see Appendix 1). The ecoinvent process represents a site with a main digester of 500 m3.
Project Developers shall provide the external volume of their site’s main digester, in m3. This is used to adjust the amount of the ecoinvent infrastructure and machinery process used. For example, if the project’s main digester has a volume of 250 m3, it will only be assigned half of the impacts modeled in the ecoinvent process.
It is assumed that infrastructure has a lifetime of 20 years. This means that for calculating impacts of 1 year of operations of the project, infrastructure and machinery will be allocated 1/20th of their total impacts.
The amount of digestate produced annually is estimated to be 85% of the mass of feedstock inputs (see the Assumptions section).
Project Developers shall provide the repartition of digestate types (raw, liquid, and/or solid phase) that are stored and spread. If the repartition is different for the storage and spreading stages (e.g. stored raw, spread as liquid and solid), then the repartition that leads to higher project emissions shall be applied to all digestate management, in order to maintain a conservative approach. Data shall come from the repartition of digestate types sold annually.
Project Developers shall provide an estimate of the residence time, (the number of days feedstock spends in the digester).
Methane emissions during digestate storage are calculated as a function of residence time in the digester and percent of methane produced that is emitted, as illustrated in Figure 10.1 of . The linear regression equation obtained from that dataset is presented in Eq. 21, and shall be used to predict methane leakage rates from digestate storage for a given project’s residence time.
It is assumed that storing digestate under airtight covers reduces methane emissions from storage by 80%. Project Developers shall report what fraction of their digestate storage is covered vs. uncovered.
Nitrous oxide emissions from digestate storage are calculated using 1) the amount of digestate stored, 2) the nitrogen content of digestate, provided by Project Developers in the form of laboratory analyses and 3) emission rates from the literature, summarized in Table 6.
Table 6 Percent of nitrogen present in digestate that is emitted as N2O from and .
Digestate transport from the biogas site to the farm for spreading is included when this transport is done by truck. No impacts are included for transport via irrigation pipeline, assuming that they would be below the impact threshold.
Nitrous oxide emissions from digestate spreading on soil is calculated using 1) the amount of digestate spread (which may differ from the amount stored if some digestate is recirculated as feedstock), 2) the nitrogen content of digestate, provided by Project Developers in the form of laboratory analyses and 3) an emission rate of 1% of nitrogen added to soils in digestate is lost in N2O, according to the .
The project is credited with avoiding synthetic mineral fertilizer production thanks to digestate spreading. This is because the project is multifunctional and makes a co-product digestate, which is treated using the common LCA practice of system expansion and substitution[48].
Project Developers shall provide the nutrient contents of all digestate types, measuring total N, P2O5, and K2O.
Amount of digestate spread is described and calculated in the previous section.
As described in the Assumptions section, nutrient availability in digestate is equivalent to that of mineral fertilizer, so for example spreading 1 kg of P2O5 from digestate is modeled as substituting the production of 1 kg of P2O5 mineral fertilizer production.
Along with avoiding nitrogen fertilizer production, digestate spreading also avoids N2O emissions from fertilizer spreading. These are calculated using the amount of nitrogen avoided by digestate, and nitrogen emission rates from mineral fertilizers, which equals 1% of applied N emitted as N2O.
The baseline scenario represents the GHG emissions that would occur without the project. It includes functionally equivalent processes that provide the same products/services as the Project Scenario.
As described in the Project Scenario section, the project delivers the following products/services, with their corresponding baseline scenario processes:
Biomethane production and injection into the gas grid: this is assumed to replace the average market mix of gas from the grid, primarily natural gas, with a fraction of biomethane and biogas already present in the mix.
Manure and slurry management (if the project uses manure and/or slurry): this is assumed to replace conventional manure and slurry storage and spreading, which includes emissions from storage, and avoided mineral fertilizer production.
The baseline scenario includes 1 to 3 life cycle stages, depending on the project operations, displayed in Figure 2:
Energy production
Manure and slurry storage and spreading (if the project uses manure and/or slurry)
Avoided fertilizer production and use (if the project uses manure and/or slurry)
If the project injects biomethane into the gas grid, the baseline scenario is the market mix of gasses in the national gas supply. This shall include the share of biogas and biomethane already used at the national level.
Natural gas, biogas and biomethane production are modeled using ecoinvent processes detailed in Appendix 1. For natural gas, the process includes all upstream impacts of gas extraction, production, distribution, and combustion in a gas turbine. Biogas and biomethane processes include their production, and combustion was excluded assuming its impact would be very small because they are not fossil fuels.
The total amount of gas considered in the baseline scenario shall equal the amount of energy from biomethane injected by the project biogas site (provided by Project Developers), minus the calculated amount of biomethane lost during the distribution stage, in MJ.
The total amount of gas in the baseline scenario shall be broken down into the amount of natural gas, biogas and biomethane using data from Eurostat datasets covering and consumption. An example is provided below.
If heat and/or electricity are exported by the project instead of gas injection, the baseline scenario shall include the national mixes of heat and/or electricity, based on Eurostat data for the most recent year (or data of a similar high-quality source). The amount of heat and/or electricity in the baseline scenario shall equal the equivalent amount of energy from heat and/or electricity exported from the project scenario to the grid/external industrial processes (i.e. excluding the amount that is self consumed).
If manure or slurry are not used as feedstock inputs at the biogas site, then this section is the only component of the baseline scenario.
This stage shall only be included in the baseline scenario if the biogas project uses manure or slurry as a feedstock input.
This stage includes N2O and methane emissions from manure/slurry storage and spreading, and GHG emissions from transport.
Project Developers shall provide the amount of manure and/or slurry used as feedstock inputs annually, in tonnes of fresh matter.
Project Developers shall specify if manure is from poultry vs any other type of animal. Manure from pigs, horses, sheep, and other animals are modeled using the same characteristics as cow manure, as described in the Assumptions section. Because poultry slurry is uncommon, all slurry is modeled as cow slurry.
Nitrogen content, N2O emission factors, and methane emission rates from storage and spreading for manure and slurry are summarized in Table 3.
This stage shall only be included in the baseline scenario if the biogas project uses manure or slurry as a feedstock input.
This stage is included to ensure that both the impacts and benefits of manure and slurry management are accounted for in the baseline scenario. It conservatively accounts for the tradeoff between diverting manure and slurry from use as organic soil amendments to biogas production. This , due to manure and slurry being used as organic soil amendments.
Similar to the Project avoided fertilizer section, it is assumed that nutrient availability is the same between manure/slurry and mineral fertilizer. For example, 1 kg of P2O5 from manure is modeled as substituting the production of 1 kg of P2O5 mineral fertilizer production.
Project Developers shall provide the amounts of manure and slurry used as feedstock inputs, and values from the literature shall be used for converting to amounts of synthetic fertilizer avoided (Table 7).
Table 7 Rates of avoided synthetic fertilizer production and use, from manure and slurry use as organic soil amendments in the baseline scenario ().
Avoided GHG emissions are calculated by subtracting the sum of the project scenario GHG emissions from the sum of the baseline GHG scenario emissions.
The amount of digestate produced is estimated from 85-95% of feedstock input weight. A conservative assumption of 85% was taken.
Digestate stored in a covered area with gas recovery has 20% of gasses leaked
Nutrient availability in digestate is equivalent to that of mineral fertilizer
Waste feedstock inputs come with no production impacts.
The distance for waste feedstock collection of manure and/or slurry in the baseline scenario is assumed to be 10 km).
In case Project Developers do not have an estimation of days manure is stored onsite, an average of 15 days is considered. In the baseline scenario, this is assumed to be 180 days.
N2O emissions from slurry storage are generally small and, therefore, excluded from the project scenario’s GHG assessment.
Manure and slurry from pigs, horses, sheep, and other animals are modeled considering the same characteristics as cow manure.
In the project scenario, buildings and main infrastructure have a lifetime of 20 years and overall infrastructure impact based on the external volume of the main digester, leading to grouping infrastructure equipment and network into the same category rather than assessing specific equipment's impacts.
Activated carbon used by the project is accounted for in a ratio of 0.2 t/GWh of energy produced .
The amount of biogas self-consumed is assumed to be 4%
The baseline scenario selection has low uncertainty and is mostly standardized. It accounts for project-specific information regarding the amount of biomethane injected into the gas grid, type of feedstock, quality of digestate, and national gas market share statistics.
Numerous equations and models are used in this methodology and have low uncertainty:
Most are basic conversions that have been taken from the scientific literature, especially , which is a rigorous, detailed LCA of biomethane production that underwent critical review and was published by INRAE Transfert, a subsidiary of the French National Institute for Research in Agronomics.
The linear regression model from has moderate uncertainty
Estimates and secondary data used in this methodology have varying levels of uncertainty and are assessed in Table 8.
The uncertainty at the methodology level is estimated to be low. This translates to an expected discount factor of at least 3% for projects under this methodology.
Table 8 Presentation of all secondary data and estimates used, and an assessment of their uncertainty.
For Apple devices, an average emission factor for new device production was taken from recent models, and the data samples are presented in . There is low uncertainty in the data samples, since the LCAs come from the manufacturer for the specific model. There is moderate uncertainty related to the distribution of these values, where the different devices have coefficients of variation (standard deviation/mean) of 6-36%.
This percentage comes from the detailed . That study uses high quality primary data so the values themselves have low uncertainty.
These values come from the detailed and are well within the range of expected lifetimes found elsewhere in the literature. Nonetheless, these estimates have a large impact on the results and are expected to have moderate uncertainty.
Table 4,
weight source: and
, p. 152 Table 62
, p. 157. Table 72
, p. 158. Table 74
, p. 107, and 166. Table 86
Emission factor extrapolated from PC results, adjusted by screen weight, , pg 166.
()
, pg 17
, pg 17
, pg 17
, pg 17
, pg 17
Deloitte Poland 2022,
, pg 17
, pg 17
Download the template
Note that the project shall be defined as the project activities that are justified as additional. This may include a refurbishing/regeneration site’s entire operations or only an expansion project. See the Additionality section of the for more details.
Project Developers shall demonstrate that they meet all eligibility criteria outlined in the , and described below with a specific focus on biobased construction.
Project Developers shall fill in the to evaluate the risk of carbon storage reversal, based on social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
Project developers shall sign the , committing to follow the requirements outlined in the , including not double using or double issuing RCCs.
Biobased construction materials and buildings must be valid substitutes for the construction material chosen for the for the purpose of calculating avoided emissions.
If the performance of secondary functions of the project biobased material is worse than the baseline, and causes, for example, increased energy consumption during the use stage, this is included in the .
If the service lifetimes differ between the baseline and the project, the difference will be accounted for in the comparative LCA (see section).
Project developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified risks of biobased construction. The identified risks include:
Biobased construction projects must lead to at least a 73% reduction in GHG emissions compared to the baseline scenario. This is aligned with the , as described in the .
The scope of the reduction is the biobased material/product. More details are in the section.
This shall be proven using the method described below.
Project Developers shall demonstrate that they meet all eligibility criteria outlined in the , and described below with a specific focus on battery preparation for reuse/repurpose through either battery refurbishing or regeneration.
To demonstrate additionality, Project Developers (PD) shall perform regulatory surplus analysis, plus either investment or barrier analysis, using the .
Regulatory surplus analysis shall demonstrate that there are no regulations that require or mandate the collection and preparation for reuse/repurpose through refurbishment or regeneration, and resale of batteries. It is acceptable if regulations promote or set targets for these activities because the resulting increase in these activities shall be accounted for in the .
At the European Union level, projects automatically pass the regulatory surplus analysis, which has been conducted by the Riverse Climate Team. None of these legislations require a battery second life through refurbishing or regeneration at the EU level. Project Developers are only required to provide a country-level regulatory surplus analysis.
At the EU level, batteries incorporated in Electrical and Electronic Equipment are considered under the Waste Electrical and Electronics Equipment (, introduced by the EU, and the to tackle the issue of a growing amount of WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment). According to the WEEE , batteries shall be removed and recycled from any separately collected WEEE. This does not affect the additionality of projects under this methodology, because the eligible battery types covered under this methodology are not included in the WEEE Directive (see Eligible technologies section).
The EU battery regulation () was approved in 2023, aiming to create holistic legislation for the safety and sustainability of batteries. The regulation mandates that portable batteries should be easily removable and replaceable by end-users or independent professionals. In addition, it sets recycling efficiency targets and material recovery targets for specific elements in recycling and treatment facilities for batteries. These targets will apply from December 31, 2027. This regulation does not affect the additionality of projects under this methodology, because it does not require battery treatment for reuse through refurbishing or regeneration.
The includes provisions for the reuse and recycling of vehicle components, such as batteries. However, the directive does not require the refurbishment or regeneration of batteries. The focus remains on recycling, with reuse being voluntary.
Battery reuse targets through either refurbishing and/or regeneration that are defined in these regulations will be accounted for in the GHG reduction quantification, at the country level.
Investment analysis may be used to prove that revenue from carbon finance is necessary to make the project investment financially viable.
Business plans must be submitted as preliminary evidence for investment analysis. These plans should demonstrate that the investment is not self-sustaining without carbon finance support and that the carbon finance required is comparable to the total investment cost through financial indicators. During the verification process, audited financial documents must be provided to validate that the initial projections in the business plan were accurate and that the carbon finance was utilized as intended.
Note that for investments in expansion, only the additional carbon reductions enabled by the expansion shall be eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits.
Barrier analysis may be used to prove that the project faces financial, institutional, and/or technological barriers to ongoing operations that can only be overcome using carbon finance.
Project developers shall sign the , committing to follow the requirements outlined in the , including not double using or double issuing carbon credits.
Project developers shall prove that their project provides at least 2 co-benefits from the UN framework (and no more than 4).
Second life batteries must be valid substitutes for new battery production as modeled in the (i.e. the avoided new battery). Project developers must provide evidence proving the quality of their second life batteries, demonstrating that they are suitable replacements for new batteries of the same chemistry (e.g. Li-ion vs NiMH) and application (e.g. ESS vs EV). This evidence includes, but is not limited to, documentation of quality control inspections, the battery grading system, and the State of Health (SoH) of the battery after preparation for reuse/repurpose, ensuring it meets the necessary standards for sale rather than recycling.
Battery lifespan: indicates the anticipated remaining lifespan, which is assumed to be shorter for a second-life battery compared to a new one. Default lifespans for new and second life batteries are presented in the .
This performance difference is deemed acceptable as it is factored into the , which determines the number of new batteries avoided and, consequently, the number of RCCs to be issued for a project.
Project Developers shall fill in the , to evaluate the identified risks of battery refurbishing and regeneration. The identified risks include:
Upstream and downstream emissions shall be included by default in the GHG reduction quantification, as part of the life-cycle approach. The upstream and downstream emissions included in the quantification are detailed in the and section
Battery refurbishing and regeneration projects must prove that they lead to at least a 47% reduction in GHG emissions compared to the baseline scenario. This is aligned with the , as described in the.
The scope of the reduction is the system boundary used in .
This shall be proven using the GHG reduction quantification method described in the .
General GHG reduction quantification rules can be found in the .
See section for more details.
1 m of flooring
1 m of insulation with an R value of 3 mK/W
It shall respect the and requirements described in the present methodology.
Ensure functional equivalence by analyzing the characteristics of the project biobased material and the chosen Baseline scenario EPDs. They should already have similar characteristics after following steps 1 and 2, but may not be equivalent. The amount of project or baseline material may need to be adjusted to ensure that the scenarios have the exact same (e.g. same amount, units, lifetime, and function). This includes, at a minimum:
Performance: the performance characteristics of the replaced product including but not limited to, energy efficiency, strength, mechanical resistance, reaction to fire, or insulation capacity (e.g., thermal resistance of 7 m²·K/W). See the section for more details.
The baseline scenario shall account for the use of biobased construction materials, and biogenic carbon removals, already currently used. The method below for calculating the shall also be applied to any biobased baseline materials that have a lifetime of 100 years or more.
represents the life cycle embodied GHG emissions of a building material, normalized to one functional unit. For the project scenario, this includes the project biobased material, plus any ancillary materials if necessary.
represent the GHG emissions per life cycle stage for a given amount of a building material defined in the EPD. These values are taken directly from EPDs for both the project and baseline materials. The corresponding Modules A through D are shown in Figure 1.
represents the quantity of the building material in one functional unit.
represents the service lifetime of the building material as defined in the functional unit.
represents the reference service lifetime of the building material as defined in the EPD. Often, this is same as the . However in some cases the project' biobased material may have a different lifetime than the material. In that case, a correction factor must be applied to consider the different amount of materials needed for functional equivalence.
represents the total annual tonnes COeq of GHG emissions avoided by the project.
represents the annual amount of functional units of the building material either 1) sold by the material manufacturer, or 2) used by the building developer, depending on the nature of the project, and the equivalent amount required in the baseline scenario to fulfill the same function.
represents the GHG emissions of Module A1-A3 adjusted by removing the biogenic carbon uptake.
is the GHG emissions from production of the biobased material. It corresponds to Modules A1, A2, and A3 in the norm EN 15804's terminology in Figure 1.
represents the kilograms of biogenic carbon stored for a given amount of a building material defined in the EPD.
is the conversion factor between carbon and COeq, and is calculated by dividing the molar mass of COeq by the molar mass of carbon = 44/12 = 3.67.
, and are described in section 3.6.1.
represents net tonnes of COeq removed per functional unit.
is the net tonnes of CO2eq removed, i.e. the carbon removed by the project in addition to what is removed in the baseline.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of avoided emissions to eliminate with the .
See Table 2 in the section for more details.
Projects that reduce GHG emissions and are issued Riverse Carbon Credits typically also contribute to a circular economy. The assessment of a project's circularity is considered under the co-benefits criteria and represents the number 12.2.
in the dedicated , on pages 22 to 31, following the Product-level Methodology under the Whole product approach). Figure 3 modified from summarizes the MCI material flows.
Table 5 All variables needed to calculate the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI) for the Riverse Battery Second Life methodology are detailed below. The full methodology and equations can be found in the dedicated .
👉 Download the template
See more details on how modules are organized in the .
A project is defined as all burial activities that take place from one port over the project lifetime (by default a maximum of 5 years, ), and all removal that occurs as a result of that burial, plus the upstream/downstream activities associated with that burial (e.g. GHG emissions from feedstock sourcing, transport...).
See the section for more details on how a project is organized into different burial areas and burial events.
See the section for more specific requirements.
Only feedstock that also meets the requirements of the is eligible in this module. Injection of liquefied or gaseous CO into sediments is outside the scope of this module.
See the for more specific feedstock requirements.
Before or in parallel to validation with Riverse, the Project Developer shall obtain the necessary permits, and take measurements and samples, and gather secondary sources, for the and feedstock characterization, and propose a .
The Project Developer submits required documentation and undergoes an ex-ante validation audit. The project documentation is made available on the registry, expected CDR volume is estimated, and are available for pre-purchase agreements. Specific prerequisites include:
have been granted to operate at the storage site, and to monitor the site up to 12-months after storage.
The storage points are technically appropriate and can allow for permanent carbon storage. This is proven by generating the , demonstrating adherence to all requirements in the section.
Expected CDR is modeled using .
Between 1-3 months after burial, Project Developers conduct first monitoring by following the and the to measure organic carbon content in buried biomass for each storage batch. Additional storage points may be added within the validated storage sites. CDR estimates and permanence are .
Project Developers conduct the second monitoring at least 12 months after burial, following the and the , to measure organic carbon content in buried biomass for each storage batch. CDR estimates and permanence are , and verified by the VVB.
50/50 issuance: the remaining credits are issued. Any discrepancies in earlier results, for example as a result of degradation, shall be accounted for by updating CDR calculations and following the in the Riverse Procedures Manual.
The Project Developer may choose to to extend the monitoring plan and continue repeating steps 3 through 5.
Sedimentary conditions for storage points within one storage site must be within the following ranges (data requirements are outlined in the section):
Information about storage batches may be monitored and by Project Developers by uploading claim information to the Riverse MRV platform.
Any water used in the feedstock mixture must come from within the 24 km storage batch area.
See the section for requirements on feedstock sampling.
optionally, may also be performed within 1-3 months after the burial event if the Project Developer chooses the 50/50 credit issuance approach. See the section for more details.
The Sampling Plan described above is developed ex-ante during validation and outlines the intended sampling approach. During monitoring and ex-post verification, Project Developers must provide a Sampling Procedure, described in the , which documents the actual sampling approach that was implemented.
To demonstrate that carbon in sub-sediment burial will remain permanently stable, indicators from the section must be provided at validation, in the Site Characterization Report, demonstrating compliance with the requirements.
These indicators are suitable proof that a substantial fraction of the buried carbon is permanently stable. The amount of permanently stored carbon is determined using the models and equations detailed in the section.
The actual amount of permanently stored carbon is measured as described in the , replacing the modeled amounts used during validation to issue ex-post Riverse Carbon Credits.
Project Developers shall fill in the Riverse Marine sub-sediment burial to evaluate the risk of carbon storage reversal, based on social, economic, natural, and delivery risks.
Project Developers shall prove that their project provides at least 2 co-benefits from the (SDGs) framework (and no more than 4).
Feedstock sustainability risks shall be taken from the .
Project Developers shall fill in the Riverse Marine sub-sediment burial to evaluate the identified environmental and social risks of Marine sub-sediment burial projects. The identified risks include:
Release of aqueous CO or methane at sediment-water interface
According to the Riverse Procedures Manual, this assumption shall be re-assessed at a during the mandatory methodology revision process, and any changes to this assumption would be .
Note that baseline scenario carbon sequestration or leakage impacts may be included for the project from the .
Table 3 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source for project validation and verification. See the section for more details on monitoring and verification requirements. Asterisks (*) indicate which data shall be updated for each storage batch.
If project incubation experiments or in situ experiments are used to provide values for and parameters, these experiments must either 1) be scientifically peer reviewed and published in academic journals, or 2) undergo independent external peer review for the specific project.
Carbon degradation is subtracted from this carbon burial. It is and .
represents the total carbon removed in the present module on marine sub-sediment burial. It is used in Eq. 1 in the section of the . It is calculated for each storage batch.
represents the tonnes of COeq in the buried feedstock mixture, calculated below in Eq. 2.
represents the tonnes of COeq in the buried feedstock mixture that are degraded, lost and re-emitted, and is calculated in Eq. 3.
represents the total volume of feedstock mixture buried in m
represents the density of feedstock mixture in tonnes/m
represents the moisture content of the feedstock mixture, on a weight basis (%w/w), so represents the dry matter content of the feedstock mixture
represents the organic carbon content in the feedstock mixture, in % mass (e.g. g organic carbon/g dry feedstock mixture). At validation, this value should be conservatively estimated.
is 44/12 = 3.67, and represents the molar masses of CO and C respectively, and is used to convert tonnes C to tonnes of COeq.
represents the potential amount of carbon lost from degradation of buried feedstock mixture, in tonnes of COeq.
represents the fraction of evolved CO from degradation of the buried feedstock mixture that diffuses upwards out of the sediment, into the overlying water column, and is eventually emitted to the atmosphere within 1000 years (as opposed to remaining trapped in the sediment, reincorporated into microbial biomass...). This is conservatively assumed to be 1 for all projects (i.e. 100% of carbon lost from biomass is assumed to be emitted to the atmosphere, see section) even though site requirements minimize sediment diffusion.
represents the fraction of organic carbon originally buried that has been lost via degradation. If this is found to be >0.01 during 1-3 or 12 month monitoring (i.e. 1% of buried organic carbon has degraded), then the conservative models used at validation shall be applied to issue RCCs.
The greatest risk to carbon removal reversal is degradation of buried feedstock mixture by microbes in the sub-sediment. This is limited by the site requirements that ensure anoxic conditions preventing degradation in the first place, and by sediment conditions ensuring that if degradation occurs, any evolved CO would stay trapped in the sub-sediment. Nevertheless, the calculations conservatively assume that any CO degraded is diffused out of the sub-sediment.
Carbon degradation is conservatively modeled during validation using a (see and ), and measured during verification.
Empirical peer-reviewed research has only covered rate constants for organic matter degradation () for use in the under marine sediment oxic conditions, but the projects covered under this methodology occur in marine sub-sediment anoxic conditions.
In absence of resources covering anoxic conditions, a literature review is described in using decades of research on analogous environments and describing the expected range of in anoxic environments.
During validation, carbon degradation over 1000 years shall be calculated using the following to estimate provisional carbon credit volumes. The calculations are demonstrated in below.
represents time. The equations presented can be time-integrated from 0 to 1000 years, calculating carbon degradation/storage continuously. For the purpose of issuing RCCs under this module, only results at time = 1000 years are used.
represents the fraction of organic carbon originally buried in the feedstock biomass remaining after 1000 years.
and are the fractional pools (in tonnes of organic carbon) of intermediate 1, intermediate 2, and residual, described in Table 4.
and are rate constants for each fractional pool, described in Table 4.
is described in Eq. 3.
is calculated in Eq. 2.
is described in Eq. 3.
is calculated in Eq. 2.
represents the organic carbon stored in the buried feedstock mixture at time , either a first monitoring and sampling between 1-3 months after burial, or a second monitoring and sampling at least 12 months after burial, in tonnes of COeq. See for a description of the two time periods. This is calculated in Eq. 8.
is described in Eq. 2, and is assumed to be the same at burial and at time
represents the density of feedstock mixture in tonnes/m at time
represents the moisture content of the feedstock mixture at time , on a weight basis (%w/w), so represents the dry matter content of the feedstock mixture at time
represents the organic carbon content in the feedstock mixture, in % mass (e.g. g organic carbon/g dry feedstock mixture) at time
was described in Eq. 2.
This example demonstrates the validation-stage, ex-ante carbon storage modeling for the burial of 1 tonne of COeq (=1) at a sediment depth () of 5 m, using literature values from described in Table 4.
Using equations 1-8 we obtain the the following results for , also shown in Figures 3a and 3b below for 1 and 1000 years, respectively.
= 1 t COeq
= 0.999 t COeq
= 0.9993 t COeq
= 0.9093 t COeq
In this case the estimated permanent carbon removal, over 1000 years, is 0.9093 tCOeq. Induced emissions from other modules would be calculated and subtracted from this removal estimate to determine the number of provisional credits to make available.
If, for example, upon monitoring, the Project Developer takes samples of the buried feedstock mixture and measured a = 0.9995 t COeq. This represents an of 0.05%, below the 1% threshold, so the project may issue RCCs based on the actual measured value of 0.9995 t COeq (adjusted by the induced emissions calculated in other modules).
If, for example, the Project Developer measures a = 0.985 t COeq. This represents an of 1.5%, above the 1% threshold. The measurements are not used, it is considered that degradation has been triggered, and the project will issue credits based on their validation-stage estimates (i.e. 0.9093 t COeq.).
Any organic carbon degradation from the buried biomass leads to CO released to the water column, and eventually back to the atmosphere, via diffusive transport (see Eq. 4, = 1). This is a conservative assumption, because degraded carbon may remain trapped permanently in the sediment matrix as CO. Indeed, the site requirements are set to ensure that CO diffusion out of the sediment matrix is minimized.
Methane diffusion can be measured using oxygen penetration depth as a proxy. If O is measurable in the surface layer of marine sediments, methane is unable to diffuse out of the sediment-water interface.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the .
modeling consists of basic conversions with low uncertainty.
modeling consists of the at validation, with low uncertainty given that this is a foundational and commonly accepted model in biogeochemistry. At verification, this is modeled using direct measurements of changes in organic carbon content, leading to low uncertainty.
The secondary data used for all projects under this methodology are the and constants presented in Table 4. The use of these constants has moderate uncertainty, because they are not specifically adapted to project storage sites. This uncertainty is mitigated and considered acceptable because:
constants are only used at validation for calculating ex-ante estimates of carbon removal. These are replaced by measurements and primary data for verification and RCC issuance.
Any degradation releases CO to the water, then the atmosphere, via diffusion (a conservative assumption).
Download the template
Marine sediments serve as the final carbon sink, storing 150–200 billion tons of organic carbon in their upper layers (; ; ). The biological pump transfers oceanic carbon to sediments via microbial fixation, food chain dynamics, and sinking particulate matter. Despite its inefficiency—only ~1% of sinking carbon reaches sediments, and just 0.1% is buried long-term (; )—this process significantly influences atmospheric CO₂ levels.
Biomass degrades rapidly in oxygenated sediments, but in anoxic environments, it can persist for millennia. Oxygen exposure time (OET) controls degradation: prolonged exposure breaks macromolecules into labile forms, accelerating conversion to CO₂. Reducing OET preserves biomass, as seen in bog bodies and historic wooden structures preserved in compacted, oxygen-deprived sediments (; ).
Decades of research (; ; ) indicate that organic carbon degrades slowly in anoxic sediments due to low substrate availability, microbial competition, mineral protection, and biochemical inaccessibility (; ).
Biomass preservation for over 1,000 years is common in coastal zones with high sedimentation rates and low OET. For example, rapid burial in the Bay of Bengal (30 cm/yr sedimentation) protects wood from microbial degradation, preserving organic material for millions of years (). Similarly, wood fragments up to 11,900 years old have been recovered from the Gulf of Mexico (), and entire ancient forests remain buried off the Alabama coast (; ).
Studies show organic carbon degradation slows exponentially over time, with rates up to 1,000× lower in anoxic sediments than in oxic environments (; ; ; ). This supports the assumption that degradation rates in oxic conditions () represent a worst-case scenario for anoxic sub-sediment burial.
Biomass degradation begins with extracellular enzymatic hydrolysis, where aerobic microbes break down macromolecules into small organic compounds. These are further processed via anaerobic fermentation into substrates for redox reactions. However, without sufficient OET, enzymatic hydrolysis cannot begin, preventing degradation (; ). Ligno-cellulosic biomass requires longer OET than algal biomass to initiate breakdown.
In deep sediments, sulfate reduction is the dominant degradation process, accounting for 50% of total biomass decomposition globally (Jorgensen et al., 2019). This slow, energy-limited process produces CO₂ and hydrogen sulfide (HS). CO₂ diffuses upward, where it may be fixed by microbes or released at the sediment-water interface. Worst-case CO₂ diffusion rates align with modern dissolved inorganic carbon (DIC) fluxes (). CO₂ accumulates due to compaction, it can form hydrates at depths >10 m in cold marine sediments (Eccles & Pratson, 2012; Velaga et al., 2011).
To monitor environmental risk, Project Developers should understand the biogeochemical zonation of sediment depths where biomass is stored. In anoxic marine sediments, organic molecules degrade via sulfate reduction, producing hydrogen sulfide (HS), which diffuses upward and oxidizes to sulfate in oxygen-rich layers. In the absence of sulfate, methanogenesis dominates, producing methane (CH). Both processes can generate HS or CH, posing environmental risks.
To mitigate risks, HS and CHemissions at the sediment-water interface should remain below environmental thresholds. Project Developers are encouraged to measure dissolved sulfate, HS, and CHconcentrations in target sediment layers before burial and include these gases in their monitoring plans to ensure environmental safety.
In addition to reaching below the maximum oxygen penetration depth at any season, there is a required sub-sediment depth of at least 2 m depth into the sediment is required due to risk of reversal, due to maximum 2m sediment scouring during tropical zones, and infilling of previously scoured areas due to resuspension due to storms (; ), fluid-mud flows (), and erosion (, ).
On the continental shelf, seafloor sediments are eroded and reworked by bottom currents and wave action, a process known as “scouring” (). This creates linear or lobate depressions shaped by dominant environmental forces. Channel-shaped scours, or furrows, range from 10–100 meters wide and 100–1000 meters long, with coarse sand or gravel floors. Larger lobate deposits (100–500 meters wide) are often filled with mega-rippled coarse sand, forming "Rippled Scour Depressions" (). Major storms can also transport large amounts of sediment to the deep sea without leaving scours ().
Scouring and sediment resuspension pose risks to carbon storage in shelf sediments, as buried biomass must remain covered to prevent oxygen exposure. To assess this risk, we reviewed 29 studies on sediment furrows and ripple scour depressions across various depths and oceanographic settings (Figure 4, Table 5). Reported scour depths, including those from extreme events (e.g., Hurricanes Katrina, Ivan, Sandy), inform our recommendation of a >2-meter burial depth for carbon storage. While regional variation is significant, findings from suggest that wider continental shelves may offer greater protection from erosion.
General GHG reduction quantification rules can be found in the .
Table 2 Summary of primary data needed from projects and their source. Asterisks (*) indicate which data are required to be updated annually during verification (see section). Data are for a battery of type i and chemistry c.
The (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in.
Batteries (including packs, units, management systems, and auxiliary components) are evaluated in categories of battery types and chemistries rather than specific battery models. It is assumed that batteries in the same battery type category and chemistry have similar characteristics (component percentages, emission factor, lifetime), as defined in .
Second-life batteries are assumed to have shorter lifetimes than new batteries. It is assumed that the battery State of Health (SoH) can be a proxy for remaining battery performance and that the amount of battery production avoided in the baseline scenario is proportional to the ratio of new and second life battery lifetimes and second life SoH. See the section and for details and examples.
In the baseline scenario, for the fraction of waste Battery A that is separately collected by specialized waste battery programs (e.g. ), it is assumed that 70% of batteries will be refurbished or regenerated and 30% will be recycled. This assumption is based on projections provided by industry experts and is already accounted for in the "Europe EOL market share" in Table 3. Check for detailed market share information.
For waste treatment of the batteries entering the second-life stream, it is assumed that 70% will be successfully regenerated/refurbished, and the remaining 30% will be recycled. This is already accounted for in the waste treatment breakdown provided in the last column of Table 3. Refer to for detailed information.
The mass of waste battery collected (Battery A) equals the total mass of input used batteries collected by the battery second life project annually. The total mass of batteries collected is back-calculated based on the number of battery packs that were successfully prepared for reuse or repurpose and sold, and the rate of parts that could not be reused/repurposed and were recycled (see ).
This step calculates the GHG emissions from transport from collecting used batteries ().
represents the percentage of all collected batteries and battery components (Battery ) of type and chemistry , that could not be successfully refurbished/regenerated by the project, and are recycled.
represents the percentage of battery packs (BP) of type and chemistry that fail initial sorting and are sent directly to waste treatment. This rate is expected to be close to zero for most projects, but it is included here as a conservative measure.
represents the percentage, by mass, of input used BUs of type and chemistry that pass the initial sorting but are recycled after failing the first or last tests.
represents the percentage, by mass, of BUs within a battery pack of type and chemistry . This value should ideally be provided by the PD or selected from if the exact value is unknown.
represents the percentage, by mass, of collected BMS of type and chemistry that are recycled. In the absence of project data, this is conservatively assumed 100%.
represents the percentage of BMS, by mass, in a battery pack. This is assumed to be 2% for all battery types and chemistries as defined in the section.
represents the percentage, by mass, of input auxiliary components (AC) of type and chemistry that are recycled (e.g. damaged cooling systems that cannot be reused). In the absence of project data, this is conservatively assumed 100%.
represents the percentage of ACs by mass in a battery pack, which are assumed to be everything that is not BU and BMS.
represent the total weight of input battery packs (Battery A) of type and chemistry collected by the project in the monitoring period, in kg of batteries.
represent the number of battery packs (Battery B) of type and chemistry that were sold in a functioning state, and shall be provided by the PD for each monitoring period.
represent the weight of sold battery pack (Battery B) of type and chemistry that was sold in a functioning state. In the case of battery repurposing (e.g. from EV to LMT) the sold battery weight may differ from the input collected battery weight, thus PDs are required to provide the mass and amount of sold functioning batteries.
is calculated in .
represents the total greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, in kgCO₂ equivalent, from transporting waste battery packs collected by the project.
is calculated in .
represents the average distance traveled, in kilometers, for collecting battery packs (Battery A) of type and chemistry , as provided by the PD.
represents the emission factor for transport in kgCOeq/kg.km according to the ecoinvent database and includes truck. Refer to 1 for the ecoinvent processes used.
Battery recycling is modeled using either hydrometallurgical or pyrometallurgical treatment depending on the battery chemistry (see ecoinvent processes in).
This step calculates the GHG emissions from transporting and recycling the collected used battery components that are unsuitable for being regenerated or refurbished ().
represent the total weight, in kg, of batteries of chemistry that are unsuitable for reuse or repurpose and are therefore recycled.
is calculated in .
is calculated in .
represents the total GHG emissions, in kgCO₂eq, resulting from the recycling of batteries with chemistry that are unsuitable for reuse or repurpose.
is calculated in .
represents the conversion factor for Pb-acid batteries. remelting with lead recovery as presented in . For this, it is assumed that the lead recovery process has 98.8% efficiency and the battery lead content is 0.61kg of lead/kg of battery as presented in the section. For other battery chemistries, consider this equal 1.
represents the emission factor for recycling a battery of chemistry , in kgCOeq per kg battery. For details on the ecoinvent processes used, refer to .
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the transport of batteries not suitable for reuse that are sent to recycling, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in .
represents the distance in km for transporting battery chemistry scrap to the specialized battery waste treatment facility. If this value is not provided by the PD, it is conservatively assumed to be 1800 km for Li-ion and NiMH batteries, and 500 km for Pb-acid batteries, as described in the section.
represents the emission factor for truck transport, in kgCO₂eq/kg.km. For details on the ecoinvent processes used, refer to
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the project scenario battery waste treatment treatment of non-reusable parts, in kgCOeq.
is defined in .
is defined in .
Both refurbishing and regeneration processes start with the disassembly of the battery packs into their BUs (modules or cells). Next, the BU undergoes inspection and testing to assess its and performance, including evaluations of voltage, performance, and charge retention. Any faulty BU, BMS, or auxiliary components that cannot be refurbished or regenerated are removed and .
Cleaning involves inputs of cleaning chemicals, paper and cloth, modeled after assumptions presented in the section.
For replacement of non-functional parts such as BUs and BMS, Project Developers shall select items/materials used among the options in . If the relevant input is not listed, it may be added/considered on a case by case basis, and approved by the Riverse Certification team. For each material, Project Developers shall provide the item it corresponds to and the amount used in the item. Items may be composed of multiple materials, or only one main material.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the preparation for reuse or repurpose process and/or ) broken down into three main processes: 1) common steps, 2) refurbishing steps, and 3) regeneration steps.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the electricity consumption needed for sorting (inspecting and testing) incoming BUs (cells/modules), in kgCOeq.
represents the number of battery units of type and chemistry c entering the preparation for reuse or repurpose process after the first quality control and sorting process. This value shall be provided by the PD.
represents the amount of electricity needed in kWh/BU for inspection and testing per battery unit (cells or modules). The PD must provide this value along with supporting evidence for the data, such as documentation of the test machine's usage time and power consumption, details of the tracking system, or the software used in the project.
represents the emission factor of grid electricity in the given project country. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
After evaluating the battery, any BU, BMS, or damaged auxiliary components that are not suitable for refurbishing or regeneration are removed for recycling and are considered in the calculation section. The remaining components are then cleaned.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the battery components cleaning. This includes chemicals and cloth, in kgCOeq.
is defined in .
represents the amount of chemical product used for cleaning the battery. This includes baking soda solution and degreaser as detailed in the section.
represents the emission factor of chemical . Refer to the assumptions to for the ecoinvent processes used.
represents the amount of cloth used for cleaning a battery, by battery weight. This amounts were assumed from data provided by Project Developers and is considered 17g of clothing per kg of battery.
represents the emission factor of cloth. Refer to the for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to battery preparation for reuse/repurpose common processes, in kgCOeq. This includes the impacts of sorting (inspection and testing) and cleaning.
is defined in .
is defined in .
represents the total emissions from one new replacement battery component, in kgCOeq.
represents the amount of the material of type used in the component replacement battery for the second life battery , in the same units as the emission factor described below. This amount shall be provided by the PD for each monitoring period.
represents the life cycle emission factor/s for the material of type in kgCOeq (e.g. BMS, plastic for casing, aluminium, steel, etc) per given unit from ecoinvent. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions, in kgCOeq, associated with charging battery B before it is sold, in kgCOeq.
is defined in .
represents the amount of electricity in kWh/battery needed for recharging the second life battery (Battery B) of type and chemistry c. This recharge usually accounts for 60% of the battery capacity.
is defined in Eq.8.
represents the sum of GHG emissions, in kgCO2eq, associated with battery refurbishing, in kgCOeq.
is defined in .
is defined in .
is defined in .
represents the number of BUs from the collected battery (Battery A) suitable for regeneration after sorting.
defined in
represents the percentage by mass of collected BUs that are suitable for regeneration after quality control. is defined in .
represents the sum of GHG emissions associated with the electricity consumption for regenerating the collected battery units, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in .
represents the amount of electricity in kWh needed to regenerate a BU.
is defined in Eq.8.
represents the sum of GHG emissions associated with the production of new Pb-acid battery electrolyte, in kgCOeq.
represents the amount, in kg, of new electrolyte used for the regeneration of Pb-acid batteries during the monitoring period, provided by the Project Developer.
represents the average fraction of electrolyte in a Pb-acid battery. Electrolytes typically constitute of the battery's total weight, as described in the section.
represents the emission factor of the new Pb-acid battery electrolyte, in kgC kgCOeq/kg. Lead-acid batteries electrolyte is assumed to be a solution made of 38% sulfuric acid and 62% water. Details of the ecoinvent process used can be found in .
If new electrolytes are used, it is assumed that an equivalent amount of the used electrolyte undergoes waste treatment. During the regeneration of lead-acid batteries, the used electrolyte can either be regenerated or neutralized and then treated as wastewater. To neutralize this electrolyte solution, various chemicals can be used, with lime being the most commonly applied. For 1 kg of the electrolyte solution, approximately s required. For a conservative approach, it is assumed that the used electrolyte will be neutralized, as described in .
represents the sum of GHG emissions associated with the chemicals needed for treating the battery's used electrolyte, in kgCOeq.
represents the weight of any new electrolyte used for regenerating a battery of type and chemistry , in kg, provided by the PD if relevant.
represents the amount of lime needed to neutralize the electrolyte in kg of CaO per kg of used electrolyte.
represent the emission factor of lime, in kgCOeq/kg. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
Next, BUs are tested to verify the effectiveness of regeneration, which requires electricity consumption. This is calculated by applying Eq. 8 again (). Any BUs that fail this test are sent for recycling, which is covered in the .
The battery is then reassembled (except lead-acid batteries, which are here considered as BUs), which may require new components. If applicable, refer to .
Finally, the battery is charged, following .
represents the sum of GHG emissions associated with the battery regeneration process, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in . It is used again here because the battery undergoes the same inspection and testing process at the end of regeneration as when it is first received by the project and sorted.
is defined in
is defined in .
is defined in .
is defined in .
is defined in .
is defined in , and may be zero if the project doesn't work with lead acid batteries.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from transporting used batteries during the collection process ().
represents the total greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, in kgCOeq, due to battery waste transport.
is calculated in and represents the weight of battery type and chemistry collected by the project, in kg of batteries.
represents the distance traveled, in kilometers, for collecting battery packs. In the baseline scenario this is assumed 1800 km for Li-ion and NiMH batteries and 500 km for Pb-batteries as described in the section.
represents the emission factor for truck transport in kgCOeq/kg.km. Refer to for the ecoinvent processes used.
Separately collected battery waste is assumed to undergo waste treatment based on the targets set by the . Most of this battery waste either undergoes specialized recycling, or repurposing for second life applications. Specialized recycling treatment is further divided into pyrometallurgical or hydrometallurgical processes, depending on the battery chemistry, as detailed in the section.
A detailed breakdown of battery waste treatment shares can be found in the section and . summarizes the battery treatment market shares.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the baseline battery waste treatment life cycle stage ().
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the recycling of batteries (Battery A) of chemistry , in kgCOeq, in the baseline scenario.
is calculated in .
represents the percentage of battery waste separately collected in Europe for battery type and chemistry . In Figure 3, this is represented by C%. This percentage is presented in and detailed in 3.
represents the percentage of collected batteries of type and chemistry that are recycled after separate collection. In Figure 3, this is represented by RR%. This percentage is presented in the section and . The specific recycling treatment used varies according to the battery chemistry (pyrometallurgy or hydrometallurgy), as described in the section 16.
represents the non-separately collected battery percentage in Europe for battery type and chemistry . In Figure 3, this is represented by (1-C%). This percentage is presented in the section and .
represents the percentage of non-separately collected batteries of type and chemistry that are eventually recycled. In Figure 3, this is represented by nRR%. This percentage is presented in the section and .
is defined in and it is only considered for Pb-acid battery chemistry.
represents the emission factor for treating battery of chemistry waste. Specific waste treatment shares per battery type are presented in the section. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to residual waste battery treatment (landfill and incineration), in kgCOeq. This regards especially LTM batteries of NiMH chemistry as described in .
is calculated in .
is defined in .
represents the percentage of separately collected batteries that become residual waste and are treated through either landfill or incineration. In Figure 3 this is represented by (RW%). Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
is defined in .
represents the percentage of non-separately collected batteries that become residual waste and are treated through either landfill or incineration. In Figure 3 this is represented by (nRW%). Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the emission factor for treating residual battery waste that is neither recycled nor reused, in kgCOeq/kg. This is assumed 50% incineration and 50% landfill. Refer to for the ecoinvent processes used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to battery waste treatment in the baseline scenario, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in .
is calculated in .
The difference in lifetime between refurbished and new batteries, detailed in the section, is accounted for in this life cycle stage. The amount of new battery production avoided in the baseline scenario is proportional to the ratio of the lifetimes of new and second-life batteries, adjusted by the SoH of the second-life batteries in the project scenario.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the baseline battery production life cycle stage ().
represents the sum of GHG emissions in kgCOeq due to the production of new batteries of chemistry , before accounting for the lifetime adjustment.
and are described in .
represents the emission factor in kgCOeq/kg due to the production of the new battery of chemistry c. Refer to for the ecoinvent processes used.
The shorter lifespan of second-life batteries is detailed in the section and is accounted for in the following adjustment to the avoided emissions from new battery manufacturing:
represents the new battery (Battery B) lifetime adjustment factor.
represents the expected lifespan of a second-life battery type and chemistry in number of years. This value should be provided by the Project Developer (PD) with proof. If no project data are available, a conservative choice will be made according to the values presented in .
represents the expected lifespan of a new battery type and chemistry in number of years, presented in .
represents the SoH of the second life battery (Battery B) type and chemistry prepared for reuse or repurpose and sold by the project. This value shall be presented by the PD.
represents the sum of GHG emissions in the baseline scenario new battery production life cycle stage, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in .
is calculated in .
where, can be either or depending on the project's battery second-life technology.
The Pb-acid batteries electrolyte solution is made of 38% sulfuric acid () and 62% water.
Many estimates and secondary data are used in this methodology to enable a reasonable amount of project data collection. These data have varying levels of uncertainty and are assessed in
See more details on how modules are organized in the .
The version 3.10 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in .
If the available emission factors do not accurately represent the project, a different emission factor may be submitted by the Project Developer, and approved by the Riverse Certification team and the VVB. Any emission factor must meet the data requirements outlined in the , and come from traceable, transparent, unbiased, and reputable sources.
The rules outlined at the methodology-level in the shall be applied for allocating GHG emissions between co-products.
See the co-product allocation section in the for more details.
represents the total emissions from the project scenario assigned to the energy co-product
represents the net emissions from the
represents the emissions from that are shared between the energy co-product and the carbon storage solution
represent the emissions from onsite that are shared between the energy co-product and the carbon storage solution, and/or used for only the processing of the energy co-product
represents the emissions from the onsite that are shared between the energy co-product and the carbon storage solution
Project Developers shall follow the in the Riverse Standard Rules and the for this module.
represents the total emissions from the baseline scenario
represents the amount of energy avoided in the baseline scenario, in units that correspond to the units of the chosen emission factor (see below)
represents the emission factor for the type of energy avoided in the baseline scenario, taken from ecoinvent. See Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process options.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the .
See more details on how modules are organized in the .
There are three approaches for modeling :
: based on the type and amounts of fuel used for each . This approach is more precise but the required data are more difficult to obtain.
: based on the fuel efficiency (e.g. liters diesel/km) of transport units and type of fuel used for each , plus the distance traveled, to calculate the amount of fuel used.
: based on the mass of goods transported, distance traveled, and generic transportation emission factors for shipping by road or water.
The version 3.10 (hereafter referred to as ecoinvent) shall be the main source of emission factors unless otherwise specified. Ecoinvent is preferred because it is traceable, reliable, and well-recognized. The ecoinvent processes selected are detailed in the
In the , transport unit emissions from ecoinvent are used, where the emission factor includes emissions from an empty return trip (i.e. a load factor of 0%). The average load factors for the outbound journey assumed in the emission factor are detailed in Table 2 for truck transport and Table 3 for ship transport.
Emissions for upstream energy production and processing shall be taken from ecoinvent. Options of energy types are presented in
If an electric vehicle charging station is directly connected to a renewable energy source (e.g., solar), emission factors for renewable energy production may be taken from ecoinvent, as detailed in . Otherwise, emission factors based on the regional grid will be applied.
consider at least CO, N,O and CH, emissions
Project Developers may declare a mix of fuels used (e.g. mostly diesel with a fraction of bioethanol). Default country-specific values shall be used for the ratio of diesel to biofuel (see ), unless Project Developers provide proof of a different ratio.
Table 4 Direct GHG emissions from combustion for several fuel types, relevant for a European context. The first three columns represent emissions in kilograms of gaseous pollutants per kilogram of fuel combusted. The final column presents the total emission factor for fuel combustion, expressed as kg COeq, after converting NO and CH emissions using their respective Global Warming Potentials (GWPs).
represents the sum of GHG emissions resulting from the energy use involved in transporting all input and output materials in kgCOeq during the entire reporting period.
represent the sum of GHG emissions resulting from upstream fuel emissions, in kgCOeq.
represent the sum of GHG emissions resulting from the fuel combustion, in kgCOeq.
represents the quantity of fuel (kg, liters or m³) or electricity (kWh) used to transport the material i throughout the segment s.
is the upstream emission factor for the considered fuel used during transport in the segment s. Units vary depending on the fuel's units in ecoinvent (e.g. in kgCOeq/kWh or kgCOeq/kg). Refer to for fuel options.
represents the number times segment s is repeated during the reporting period.
represents the rate of direct emissions for gas g (CO, NO and CH) for the combustion of the fuel type used in the transport segment s, presented in Table 4.
represents the global warming potential of gas g, taken from presented in the .
F represents the percentage of diesel in the fuel mix (as opposed to biofuel), which should be based on the country's fuel blend as detailed in . For example, if the diesel blend consists of 93% diesel and 7% biodiesel, then the emission of 100% mineral diesel from Table 4 should be multiplied by , which in this case would be 93%.
The amount of energy used can be calculated by Project Developers using the distance traveled, and the energy efficiency (e.g. fuel consumption efficiency) of the vehicle. Then, the description and equations from the section apply.
represents the quantity of fuel (kg, liters or m³) or electricity (kWh) used to transport the material throughout the segment .
represents the distance traveled in the transport section to transport the material , in km.
represents the fuel consumption efficiency of the vehicle used in transport section , in kg/km or kWh/km.
After calculating the amount of energy consumed, , is used in Equations 2 and 3 from the section instead of directly measured energy amounts.
represents the sum of GHG emissions resulting from the energy use and involved in transporting all input and output materials in kgCOeq during the entire reporting period.
represents the distance traveled in the transport section to transport the material , in km.
represents the weight of the product i transported through the segment , in tonnes.
represents the emission factor of the transport unit (truck or ship) in kgCOeq/t.km. This emission factor includes both upstream fuel production, direct emissions from fuel combustion, and embodied emissions from e.g. trucks, ships, roads... The ecoinvent options are presented in .
Embodied transport emissions include GHG emissions from production and maintenance of major materials used in transport, such as trucks, ships and roads. These need to be added separately if the or are used to calculate energy use emissions. Emission factors from ecoinvent are used, and Project Developers shall choose between the following truck/ship categories:
For example, it can be extrapolated from Ecoinvent that Truck 1 has total lifetime embodied emissions from production and maintenance amounting to 20 tCOeq, along with an estimated total lifetime fuel consumption of 30,000 liters of diesel (note that actual values may vary).
10% * 20 tCOeq = 0.2 tCOeq
In practice, this is implemented by taking an ecoinvent transport emission factor (in kgCOeq/tonne*km), isolating the embodied emissions, and multiplying by the fuel efficiency (in kg or kWh per tonne*km) to obtain an embodied emission factor in terms of kgCOeq/kg or kWh of energy.
represents the total project embodied emissions from transport, in kgCOeq.
is explained in Eq. 1 and represents the quantity of fuel (kg) or electricity (kWh) used to transport the material i throughout the segment s.
is the emission factor for transport embodied emissions in kgCOeq/kg or kWh of energy. The approach to obtain this emission factor is described above.
Fuel efficiency may be used to calculate the amount of fuel consumption ( ) as presented in Equation 4. The, is used in Equation 6 to calculate embodied emissions from transport.
is already calculated in Equation 5.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of RCCs to eliminate with the .
The uncertainty of assumptions presented in the section are assessed below:
General GHG reduction quantification rules can be found in the .
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to feedstock type i production, in kgCOeq.
represents the amount of feedstock type i, in tonnes of fresh matter, for non-waste feedstock only.
represents the emission factor of feedstock type i production in kgCOeq/tonne. Refer to for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to feedstock transport, in kgCOeq.
represents the sum of feedstock type weight, in tonnes, for all feedstocks regardless of waste status (waste or non-waste).
represents the distance of the feedstock collection, in kilometers.
represents the emission factor of truck transport in kgCOeq/t.km. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions from NO due to the storage of manure type i (chicken or cow) in the project scenario, in kgCOeq.
represents the mass of manure type i used as feedstock in the project scenario, in kg.
represents the percent of manure mass as nitrogen.
represents the rate of nitrogen emitted as NO from conventional manure storage of 180 days. According to Table 3, this equals 2%.
represents the number of days manure is kept stored in the project scenario. A default value of 15 days can be assumed if no project data is available. 180 represents the conventional manure storage duration of 180 days.
represents the conversion of nitrogen to NO equivalents by multiplying by the ratio of their molecular mass (1.57).
represents the global warming potential of NO over 100 years, which is .
represents the emissions of methane from storage of manure and/or slurry
is explained in equation 2, and only applies to manure and slurry
represents the biomethane potential of feedstock type , in nm of CH per tonne of fresh matter, presented in Table 3.
represents methane emissions during storage as % of BMP, presented in Table 3.
represents the methane density, which is kg/m³.
was described in Equation 3.
represents the global warming potential of biogenic CH over 100 years, which is kgCOeq/kg CH
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to feedstock production, transport, and if applicable, manure storage.
represents the expected amount of methane produced during the reference year in m³. This value is cross checked against the actual from Equation 11 to evaluate the validity and uncertainty in reported feedstock input amounts and types (see description ).
is explained in Eq.4.
The amount of biogas self-consumed in a boiler for onsite heating is assumed to be 4% (see section).
The amount of activated carbon used in purification is estimated to be 0.2 tonnes/GWh of energy produced (see section). Other processes related to purification were excluded, given that they are consistently .
This step calculates the GHG emissions from anaerobic digestion and biomethane management ().
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to on-site electricity consumption, in kgCOeq.
represents the total on-site electricity consumption, in kWh.
represents the emission factor for electricity, in kgCOeq/kWh. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process used.
_r_epresents the sum of GHG emissions due to on-site activated carbon consumption, in kgCOeq.
represents the weight of activated carbon used per GWh of energy produced, which is assumed to be 0.2 tonnes/GWh.
represents the GWh of energy produced by the project annually.
represents the emission factor for activated carbon, in kgCOeq/kg. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process used
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to infrastructure and machinery manufacture, transport and end of life, in kgCOeq.
represents the emission factor of an anaerobic digestion site's infrastructure and machinery. It is modeled for a site with a main digester exterior volume of 500 m. Refer to Appendix 1for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the volume of the project site's main digester, in m³. It is divided by 500 m to obtain the fraction of the ecoinvent process impacts to assign to the project
represents the assumed site lifetime, and is used to normalize infrastructure and machinery impacts to 1 year.
represents the total amount of methane losses in the system, as a percentage of total volume of methane produced.
represents the percentage of biogas produced that is leaked during the digestion process. This value is assumed 0.5%, as presented in Table 4.
represents the percentage of internally used methane that is leaked, which is 0.25% according to Table 4.
represents the percentage of biogas produced that is used internally, assumed 4%, as presented in the Assumptions section.
represents the percentage of methane in biogas. This value is assumed to be 55%, as presented in the Assumptions section.
represents the percentage of biomethane leaked during the gas injection into the grid, which is 0.1% according to Table 4.
represents the percentage of biomethane leaked during the biomethane distribution to the final user, which is 0.13% according to Table 4.
represents the percentage of methane in biomethane. This value is considered 97%, as presented in Assumptions section.
represents the percentage methane produced that is leaked in the purification process. This value is estimated at 0.7% if data is not available for the project.
represents the volume of methane produced, in m³, before losses. This value shall be cross checked against the expected CH produced, calculated in Equation 6.
represents the m of biomethane injected into the gas grid annually.
represents the sum of GHG emissions from biogenic CH leakages, in kgCOeq.
and were explained in Equation 1.
represents GHG emissions from biogenic CH leakages, in kgCOeq, due to biomethane combustion.
is described in Equation 11.
represents the lower heating value of biomethane, presented in Table 5 in the Assumptions section_._
represents biomethane's combustion emission rate, in kg CH/MJ biomethane.
was described in Equation 4.
represents the sum of NO direct emissions due to methane combustion, in kgCOeq.
is described in Equation 11.
is described in Equation 13.
represents biomethane's combustion emission rate, in kg NO/MJ biomethane.
is explained in Equation 3.
represents the sum of direct GHG emissions (CH and NO) due to leakages and losses in the digestion, purifying, injection, distribution and combustion steps, in kgCOeq.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the digestion, purifying, injection, and distribution step, in kgCOeq.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the digestate produced (stored and spread) life cycle stage ().
represents the total amount of raw digestate produced, stored and spread by the project annually, in tonnes of fresh matter.
represents the sum of all feedstock inputs, in tonnes of fresh matter.
represents the ratio of the total feedstock input mass that becomes digestate at the end of the digestion. This is assumed to be 85% as presented in the Assumptions section.
represents the amount of digestate produced that is recirculated in the digester, in tonnes of fresh matter.
represents the amount of digestate type i (raw, liquid, or solid form) produced (stored and spread), in tonnes of fresh matter. If no digestate separation process occurs, the amount of digestate produced is equal to the amount of raw digestate produced ().
was calculated in Equation 17.
represents the percent of all digestate produced that is digestate type i (whether raw, liquid, or solid).
represents methane leakage from digestate storage, as a function of total methane produced.
represents the average number of days that feedstock spends in the digester.
represents the weighted average percent of all digestate types that are stored under covered conditions.
is calculated in Equation 18.
represents the percentage of digestate type i stored under covered conditions.
represents the total weighted average of methane emission reductions thanks to covering digestate during storage.
was calculated in Equation 20.
represents the leakage reduction of methane obtained by covering digestate during storage. This value is 0.2.
represents the sum of GHG emissions from methane due to digestate storage, in kgCOeq.
represents the amount of methane produced during the reference year in m³, from Equation 1.
was calculated in Equation 19.
was calculated in Equation 21.
and is explained in Equation 1.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to NO leakages during digestate storage, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in Equation 18.
represents the Nitrogen content in the digestate type i (raw, liquid, or solid), in kg/tonne.
represents the percentage of Nitrogen leaked during digestate type i storage, as presented in Table 6.
and are explained in Equation 3.
represents the sum of GHG emissions from NO during digestate spreading, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in Equation 18.
is explained in Equation 23.
represents the percentage of nitrogen emitted as NO during digestate type i spreading, as presented in Table 6.
and are explained in Equation 3.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the transport of digestate from the biomethane site until the spreading point, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in Equation 18.
represents the distance from the biogas site to the location where the digestate type i will be spread, measured in kilometers.
represents the emission factor of truck transport in kgCOeq/t.km. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to the digestate storage and spreading life cycle stage, in kgCOeq.
was calculated in Equation 22.
was calculated in Equation 23.
was calculated in Equation 24.
was calculated in Equation 25.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the project’s avoided fertilizer production and use ().
represents the sum of GHG emissions avoided due to the substitution of mineral fertilizer production by digestate spreading, in kgCOeq. P denotes the project scenario, to differentiate between the same variable calculated in the baseline scenario.
is calculated in Equation 18
represents the content of nutrient 𝑗 (N, P205,and K2O) in digestate type 𝑖, in kg nutrient/tonne of digestate.
represents the emission factor of production of synthetic N, P2O5, or K2O fertilizer in kgCOeq/kg. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions avoided due to the substitution of mineral fertilizer use, and subsequent NO emissions, by digestate spreading, in kgCOeq. P denotes the project scenario, to differentiate between the same variable calculated in the baseline scenario.
is calculated in Equation 18.
is explained in Equation 23.
represents the rate of applied nitrogen emitted as NO, which equals 1%.
and are explained in Equation 3.
represents the sum of fertilizer GHG emissions avoided due to the use of digestate as an organic amendment, in kgCOeq.
Digestate production: this is assumed to replace synthetic mineral fertilizer production and application, which is already considered within the project scenario using system expansion and substitution (see ). It is not considered in the baseline scenario.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the baseline energy production life cycle stage, where biomethane is injected into the gas grid ().
represents the total amount of energy from gas delivered after distribution, in MJ.
represents the amount of biomethane injected into the grid, in m³, from the gas grid injection receipts, described in Equation 11.
represents the percentage of biomethane leaked during the biomethane distribution to the final user, which is 0.13% according to Table 4, described in Equation 10.
represents the lower heating value of biomethane, presented in Table 5 in the Assumptions section_._
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to natural gas production and use according to the market shares, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in Equation 30.
represents the fraction of natural gas in the grid, described in paragraph 3.6.1.4.
represents the emission factor of natural gas, in kgCOeq/MJ. Refer to Appendix 2 for the ecoinvent process used.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to biogas and biomethane production according to the market shares, in kgCOeq.
is calculated in Equation 30
represents the fraction of biogas type i (biogas and biomethane) in the grid.
represents the lower heating value used to convert MJ to m³ of biogas type (biogas and biomethane), presented in Table 5 in the Assumptions section_._
represents the emission factor of biogas type i, in kgCOeq/m³.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to gas production and use in the baseline scenario, in kgCOeq.
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the baseline Manure and Slurry Storage life cycle stage ().
represents the sum of GHG emissions from transporting manure and slurry from the location they are stored to where they are spread, in kgCOeq.
represents the amount of manure of type i (chicken or cow) used as feedstock in the project scenario, in tonnes of fresh matter.
represents the amount of slurry used as feedstock in the project scenario, in tonnes of fresh matter.
represents the distance of manure/slurry transport for spreading, in kilometers. This is assumed to be 10 km, see the Assumtions section.
represents the emission factor of truck transport in kgCOeq/t.km. Refer to Appendix 1 for the ecoinvent process used.
GHG emissions due to direct NO emissions from manure storage follow the same calculation presented in Equation 3, using a parameter value of . This shall be calculated as a parameter called . GHG emissions due to direct CH$_4$ emissions from manure and slurry storage follow the same calculation presented in Equation 4, using a days stored parameter value of . This shall be calculated as a parameter called .
represents the sum of GHG emissions resulting from NO being directly emitted into the air due to the spreading of manure, in kgCOeq.
is described in Equation 34.
represents the rate of NO released from manure spreading, and equals 0.177 kg NO/tonne of manure spread, regardless of manure type (Table 3).
is described in Equation 3.
represents the sum of GHG emissions resulting from NO being directly emitted into the air due to the storage of slurry, in kgCOeq.
is described in Equation 34.
represents the dry matter content of slurry, which is 4.27% (Table 3).
represents the percentage of dry matter as nitrogen in slurry, which is 7.11% (Table 3).
represents the percentage of nitrogen lost as NO during storage of slurry, which is 0.0008% (Table 3).
and are explained in Equation 3.
represents the sum of GHG emissions resulting from NO being directly emitted into the air due to the spreading of slurry, in kgCOeq.
is described in Equation 34.
represents the rate of NO released from slurry spreading, and equals 0.057 kg NO/tonne of manure spread (Table 3).
is described in Equation 3.
represents the sum of GHG emissions due to manure and slurry transport, storage, and spreading in the baseline scenario.
Avoided N2O emissions are the same as in the .
This step calculates the GHG emissions from the baseline scenario’s avoided fertilizer production and use ().
represents the sum of emissions avoided due to the use of manure or slurry as a fertilizer, in kgCOeq. denotes the baseline scenario, to differentiate between the same variable calculated in the project scenario.
represents the amount of feedstock (manure or slurry) in tonnes of fresh matter.
represents the replacement rate of nutrient 𝑗 (N, K2O, and P2O5) from each feedstock type i, in kg nutrient/tonne of feedstock.
is described in Equation 27.
represents the sum of GHG emissions avoided due to the substitution of mineral fertilizer use, and subsequent NO emissions, by manure and/or slurry spreading, in kgCOeq. denotes the baseline scenario, to differentiate between the same variable calculated in the project scenario.
is described in Equation 39.
represents the replacement rate of N fertilizer in kg per tonne of feedstock type i (Table 7).
represents the rate of applied nitrogen emitted as NO, which equals 1%.
and are explained in Equation 3.
represents the sum of fertilizer GHG emissions avoided due to the use of manure and/or slurry as an organic amendment, in kgCOeq.
See general instructions for uncertainty assessment in the . The outcome of the assessment shall be used to determine the percent of avoided emissions to eliminate with the .
The that are estimated to have high uncertainty (i.e. high variability and high impact) are:
The that are estimated to have moderate uncertainty are:
The that are estimated to have low uncertainty are:
Methodology name
Battery second life
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RIV-REC-02-BAT-V1.0
Release date
February 4th, 2025
Status
In use
Short term removal credits (50-100 years) no longer an option
Short term removals have limited value in offsetting GHG emissions
23/10/2023
V1.0 to V1.1
Added equations for calculation GHG reductions
Increased transparency
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Specified that building developers are eligible for carbon credits based on their use of biobased materials in their constructions
Expanding the scope to include other types of actors that are decisive in the sector
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Aligned terminology with ISO 14064-2:2019
Improved consistency with the voluntary carbon market
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Added risk assessment template for permanence and environmental and social do no harm
Provide more detailed and prescriptive assessment framework, clearer instructions for project developers
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Removed text for sections that are the same for all methodologies:
Measurability
Real
Additionality
Technology readiness level
Minimum impact
Independently verified
Repeated text from the Standard Rules
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Distinction between reference service lifetime (RSL) and carbon storage duration (CSD)
Two lifetimes must be differentiated for two purposes: CSD for permanence criteria, and RSL for GHG reduction calculations/substitution criteria
29/01/2024
V1.1 to V2.0
Added Monitoring Plan section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6
13/03/2024
V2.0 (PC) to V2.0
Remove mentions of Rebound Effect and Independently Validated criteria
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6
13/03/2024
V2.0 (PC) to V2.0
Added uncertainty section
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6
13/03/2024
V2.0 (PC) to V2.0
Modifications in calculation approach:
No longer subtract biogenic carbon from Module A for avoidance calculations
Removals now have emissions from Modules A1-A3 subtracted from removals
More clearly and accurately represent avoided vs removed GHG emissions.
13/03/2024
V2.0 (PC) to V2.0
Renamed provision pool to buffer pool, and uncertainty buffer to discount factor.
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6 post public consultation.
17/5/2024
V2.0 to V2.1
Recommended discount factor changed from 10% to 6%.
Alignment with Riverse Standard Rules V6 post public consultation.
17/5/2024
V2.0 to V2.1
Clarify that ancillary material emissions/removals are not considered in project removals, and distinguish between project biobased material and project scenario.
Clarification of the previous text’s intent.
August 2024
V2.1 to V2.2
Expanded description of guidelines for selecting baseline scenario plus examples
Transparency and documentation of our current practice
October 2024
V2.2 to V2.3
Added Project Scenario section
Consistent structure with other methodologies, exhaustive
October 2024
V2.2 to V2.3
Create project scope requirements
Specify that operations in different countries must be registered as separate projects
October 2024
V2.2 to V2.3
Add minimum list of ESDNH risks
Align with Standard Rules V6.2
October 2024
V2.2 to V2.3
Specify minimum frequency of updating baseline scenario
Clarity and transparency
October 2024
V2.2 to V2.3
8.4 Resource efficiency in consumption and production
Projects using waste biomass instead of raw materials such as concrete and steel use less raw, non-renewable resources.
9.4 Upgrade infrastructure and retrofit industries to make them sustainable, with increased resource-use efficiency and greater adoption of clean and environmentally sound technologies and industrial processes
Biobased construction may have better performance in the use phase, or may require less energy in the manufacturing phase.
12.2 Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
If waste biomass is used, projects give value and a second usable life to the organic waste.
15.1 Ensure the conservation, restoration and sustainable use of terrestrial and inland freshwater ecosystems and their services
Projects using wood from sustainably managed forests support the ecosystem services provided by those forests.
SDG 5.1 - Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls
Women are less likely to work in the technology sector, and when they do they are usually paid less than men.
Battery refurbishing/regeneration projects may promote gender parity by having a large female workforce and having equal pay between men and women for doing the same job.
Average hourly earnings of men and women by age and disabilities (if any)
Standalone official policy for equal pay or current scenario in the sustainability report
SDG 8.5 - Achieve full and productive employment and decent work for all women and men, including for young people and persons with disabilities
Battery refurbishing/regeneration projects may hire people with disabilities, who tend to have lower rates of employment (e.g. 55% activity rate of people with some disability in the EU vs 74% overall activity rate).
Official record of the number of employees with a disability vs total employees of the workforce
SDG 12.2 - Achieve the sustainable management and efficient use of natural resources
The project’s circularity will be measured by the Material Circularity Indicator (MCI), according to the Ellen MacArthur Foundation's methodology.
Primary data collected from the project for the GHG reduction quantification, which are also used in the Circularity Assessment
SDG 12.4 - Achieve the environmentally sound management of chemicals and all wastes throughout their life cycle
Batteries contain precious metals, rare earth elements, and hazardous materials. By refurbishing batteries, and recycling the precious metals and rare earth elements they contain, projects avoid the destructive mining and extraction of these finite, virgin elements.
Battery waste diverted from recycling or other waste treatment (E.g. landfill or incineration)
SDG 12.5 - Reduce waste generation through prevention, reduction, recycling and reuse
The project diverts battery waste from improper disposal accordingto the EU shares as presented in Apendix 2.
Weight of batteries refurbished by chemistry. The amount of rare earth elements avoided is calculated in Riverse life cycle inventory models.
First release of methodology
-
February 4th 2025
V1
Module name
Sub-sediment burial
Module category
Carbon storage
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RIV-BICRS-CS-MSSB-V1.0
Release date
February 7th, 2025
Status
In use
SDG 9: Industry,
innovation, and
infrastructure
The use of offshore technology, such as oil and gas exploration and exploitation equipment, retrofitting maritime vessels to use for more sustainable application than fossil fuel extraction and merchant transport.
Project Developers standard operating procedure (SOP) for the disposal and burial of biomass feedstock.
SDG 14: Aquatic life
Project Developers can develop long-term ecological monitoring stations to support monitoring of sub-sediment burial and support regional monitoring for ocean health indicators.
Project Developers demonstrate collaborations with regional universities or governmental institutions for collaborative long-term monitoring, and measurements to be completed. Relevant data should be open source.
Module created
--
February 2025
V1.0
Transport, truck
market for transport, freight, lorry 7.5-16 metric ton, EURO5 | Cutoff, U, RER
NiMH battery recycling
treatment of used Ni-metal hydride battery, pyrometallurgical treatment l used Ni-metal hydride battery l Cutoff, U, GLO
Li-ion battery recycling
64%: treatment of used Li-ion battery, pyrometallurgical l used Li-ion battery l Cutoff, U, GLO
36%: treatment of used Li-ion battery, hydrometallurgical treatment l used Li-ion battery l Cutoff, U, GLO
treatment of scrap lead acid battery, remelting l lead l Cutoff, U, RER
Common steps
market for solvent, organic l solvent, organic l Cutoff, U, GLO
10.7%: market for sodium bicarbonate l sodium bicarbonate | Cutoff, U, RER
89.3%: market for water, completely softened | water, completely softened | Cutoff, U, RER
market for textile, knit cotton | textile, knit cotton | Cutoff, U, GLO
market group for electricity, medium voltage l electricity, medium voltage l Cutoff, U,
Refurbishing steps
New BU:
NiMH: BU-related processes from NiMH battery production
Li-ion:
NMC811: battery cell production, Li-ion, NMC811 l battery cell, Li-ion, NMC811 l Cutoff, U, RoW
NMC111: battery cell production, Li-ion, NMC111 l battery cell, Li-ion, NMC811 l Cutoff, U, RoW
LFP: battery cell production, Li-ion, LFP l battery cell, Li-ion, LFP l Cutoff, U, RoW
NCA: battery cell production, Li-ion, NCA l battery cell, Li-ion, NCA l Cutoff, U, RoW
Pb-acid:
battery production, lead acid, rechargeable, stationary l battery, lead acid, rechargeable, stationary l Cutoff, U, RoW
New BMS:
battery management system production, for Li-ion battery l battery management system production, for Li-ion battery l Cutoff, U, GLO
New auxiliary components:
Glass fiber reinforced platics:
market for glass fibre reinforced plastic, polyamide, injection moulded l glass fibre reinforced plastic, polyamide, injection moulded l l Cutoff, U, GLO
Plastics (polyethylene):
market for polyethylene, high density, granulate l polyethylene, high density, granulate l Cutoff, U, RER
injection moulding l injection moulding l Cutoff, U, RER
Plastics (polypropylene):
market for polypropylene, granulate l polypropylene granulate l Cutoff, U, RER
injection moulding l injection moulding l Cutoff, U, RER
Battery module packaging:
market for battery module packaging, Li-ion l battery module packaging, Li-ion l Cutoff, U, GLO
Aluminium:
market for aluminium, cast alloy l aluminium, cast alloy l Cutoff, U, GLO
market for sheet rolling, aluminium l sheet rolling, aluminium l Cutoff, U, GLO
Steel:
market for steel, low-alloyed, hot rolled l steel, low-alloyed, hot rolled l Cutoff, U, GLO
Electric connectors (wire):
market for electric connector, wire clamp l electric connector, wire clamp l Cutoff, U, GLO
Electric connectors (buss):
market for electric connector, peripheral type buss l electric connector, peripheral type buss l Cutoff, U, GLO
Electronic components (other)
market for electronic component, passive, unspecified l electronic component, passive, unspecified l Cutoff, U, GLO
Regeneration steps
New electrolyte:
Li-ion: electrolyte production, for Li-ion battery l electrolyte, for Li-ion battery l Cutoff, U, GLO
Pb-acid:
38%: market for sulfuric acid production l sulphuric acid l Cutoff, U, RER
62%: market for water, completely softened | water, completely softened | Cutoff, U, RER
NiMH: market for electrolyte, KOH, LiOH additive l electrolyte, KOH, LiOH additive l Cutoff, U, GLO
Pb-acid electrolyte treatment:
market for quicklime, milled, packed l quicklime, milled, packed l Cutoff, U, RER
Residual waste
Incineration (50%): treatment of hazardous waste, hazardous waste incineration l hazardous waste for incineration l Cutoff, U, Europe without Switzerland
Landfill (50%): treatment of inert waste, sanitary landfill l inert waste l Cutoff, U, RER
New battery production
NiMH:
battery production, NiMH, rechargeable, prismatic l battery, NiMH, rechargeable, prismatic l Cutoff, U, GLO
Li-ion:
60% - NMC:
50%: NMC811: battery production, Li-ion, NMC811 l battery, Li-ion, NMC811, rechargeable l Cutoff, U, RoW
50%: NMC111: battery production, Li-ion, NMC111 l battery, Li-ion, NMC111, rechargeable l Cutoff, U, RoW
30%: battery production, Li-ion, LFP, rechargeable, prismatic l battery, Li-ion, LFP, rechargeable, prismatic l Cutoff, U, GLO
10%: battery production, Li-ion, NCA, rechargeable, prismatic l battery, Li-ion, NCA, rechargeable, prismatic l Cutoff, U, RoW
Pb-acid:
battery production, lead acid, rechargeable, stationary l battery, lead acid, rechargeable, stationary l Cutoff, U, RoW
LMT
Li-ion
LMT
NiMH
EV/HEV
Li-ion
EV/HEV
NiMH
SLI
Pb-acid
ESS
Li-ion
ESS
NiMH
ESS
Pb-acid
Battery type
EU EPR collection target in 2028
LMT
Li-ion:
NMC: 60%
50% NMC811
50% NMC111
LFP: 30%
NCA: 10%
NiMH
PRO collection schemes:
Battery second life: 10%
Recycling: 90%
PRO collection schemes:
Battery second life: 7%
Recycling: 93%
LMT
Li-ion:
NMC: 60%
LFP: 30%
NCA: 10%
NiMH
Outside PRO schemes:
Battery second life: 19%
Recycling: 75%
Outside PRO schemes:
Battery second life: 13.3%
Recycling: 80.7%
%
EV/HEV
Li-ion
NiMH
100%
Battery second life: 25%
Recycling: 75%
Battery second life: 17.5%
Recycling: 82.5%
SLI
Pb-acid
100%
Recycling: 100%
Recycling: 100%
ESS
Li-ion
Pb-acid
Li-ion
100%
Recycling: 100%
Recycling: 100%
Percentage, by mass, of all collected battery packs that fail initial quality control and are sent directly to waste treatment, with no parts recovered to reuse.*
%
Battery second-life project tracking system
Percentage, by mass, of collected battery units (BU) that pass initial quality control but are later sent for waste treatment, because they are later deemed unsuitable for refurbishment or regeneration*.
%
Battery second-life project tracking system
Percentage, by mass, of collected battery management systems (BMS) that pass initial quality control but are later sent for waste treatment, because they are later deemed unsuitable for refurbishment or regeneration*.
%
Battery second-life project tracking system
Percentage, by mass, of collected auxiliary components (AC) that pass initial quality control but are later sent for waste treatment, because they are later deemed unsuitable for refurbishment or regeneration*.
%
Battery second-life project tracking system
Percentage by mass of BUs within a battery pack per battery type and chemistry (optional).
%
Battery second-life project tracking system
Total number and type of battery packs that were sold in a functioning state during the monitoring period.*
unit
Battery second-life project tracking system or invoices
Weight of sold battery packs per battery type and chemistry.*
kg
Battery second-life project technical documentation or direct measurements
Distance traveled for collecting used battery packs.*
km
Battery second-life project tracking system
Distance in km to the battery waste treatment facility used by the project (optional).
km
Battery second-life project tracking system
Assumption based on the recycling facility location and the project’s site
Total number of BUs collected and tested during the monitoring period.*
unit
Battery model technical document
Direct measurements made by the project
Amount of any new components (e.g., BUs, BMS, casing plastic, electrolyte) in sold second life battery packs that are new (i.e. not reused spare parts recovered from other collected batteries).*
selection
BU, BMS: identification numbers with source proof, purchase records, battery second-life project tracking system
AC: may be based on project estimates.
Electricity amount for inspection and testing of BUs.
kWh/BU
Battery second-life project tracking system
Electricity amount for the regeneration of BUs.
kWh/BU
Battery second-life project tracking system
Electricity amount for recharging the second life battery before the sale.
kWh/Bat
Battery second-life project tracking system
Second life battery SoH*.
%
Measurement from project.
Second life battery lifespan (optional).
years
Assumption based on technical documentation from the project. If not available, the most conservative choice will be considered.
Battery type
Chemistry
type
:
: 60%
: 30%
: 10%
NiMH
collection schemes: 51% (separate collection)
Outside schemes: 49% (assumed mix of some separate collection, some general battery fate)
PRO collection schemes:
Battery second life: 7 %
Recycling: 93%
Outside PRO schemes:
Battery second life: 13.3%
Recycling: 80.7%
Landfill and incineration: 6%
V
Li-ion
NiMH
Separate collection 100%
Battery second life: 17.5%
Recycling: 82.5%
Pb-acid
Separate collection 100%
Recycling 100%
Li-ion
Pb-acid
Separate collection 100%
Recycling 100%
Chemistry per battery type
Table 3
Battery types encompass a variety of chemistries. This methodology focuses on the most common chemistries for each battery type, as identified through expert insights and market data.
While older systems may still contain small quantities of batteries based on Pl and NiCd, these are assumed to be negligible and are excluded from this methodology. This exclusion introduces a moderate level of uncertainty.
Separate collection 2024/2025
Table 3
While limited information is available on the separate collection rates of batteries at their end-of-life, this methodology relies on regulatory targets as a reference. Although this assumption introduces moderate to high uncertainty, it is considered a conservative approach.
Europe EOL market shares
Table 3
The EOL market share data for the studied battery types and chemistries is limited. To address this, market share estimates were gathered with support from industry experts, an operational facility in the Netherlands, and individual Project Developers' expertise.
While no official documentation validates the chosen market shares, these estimates are considered conservative. This is because the percentages include a large share of second life batteries, which are expected to be lower in reality (the environmental impacts associated with processing second life batteries are excluded from the baseline impact assessment due to the application of cutoff criteria).
Battery unit percentage, by weight, in battery pack
Table A2, Appendix 2
The percentage of BUs in a battery pack, by mass, is highly variable and depends on several factors, such as battery chemistry, pack design, and manufacturer. To simplify calculations, data from recent studies were used to estimate this value per battery chemistry, introducing a moderate level of uncertainty. Project Developers are encouraged to provide this percentage using primary data wherever possible.
Lifetime of a new battery and a second life battery
Table A2, Appendix 2
The lifetime of a new battery is highly variable due to factors such as operating conditions, usage patterns, and BMS efficiency. When available, battery lifetime data were sourced from recent studies or supplemented by Project Developers' expertise. This introduces high uncertainty, as lifetime is a sensitive and highly variable parameter. However, the assumption is conservative, as it reduces the impacts associated with producing a new battery in the baseline scenario. Project Developers are encouraged to provide this lifetime using primary data wherever possible.
Module name
Energy co-products
Module category
Transformation
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RIV-BICRS-T-ECP-V1.0
Release date
December 4th, 2024
Status
In use
Amount and type of energy product replaced*
kg, liter, MJ, MWh
Invoices, bills, contracts
grid electricity
market for electricity, low voltage, country specific
diesel fuel material
market for diesel, low-sulfur
market for diesel
diesel burning
diesel, burned in agricultural machinery
diesel, burned in diesel-electric generating set, 18.5kW
natural gas burning
natural gas, burned in gas turbine
heat, from steam
market for heat, from steam, in chemical industry
heat, from municipal incineration
heat, from municipal waste incineration to generic market for heat district or industrial, other than natural gas
heat, from biomethane burning
market for heat, central or small-scale, biomethane
heat, from straw burning in a furnace
heat production, straw, at furnace 300kW
heat, from natural gas
market for heat, district or industrial, natural gas
market for heat, central or small-scale, natural gas
Module name
Transport
Module category
Transformation
Methodology name
Biomass carbon removal and storage (BiCRS)
Version
1.0
Methodology ID
RIV-BICRS-T-TPRT-V1.0
Release date
December 4th, 2024
Status
In use
Distance traveled per transport segment*
km
Documenting transport unit odometer readings at the start and end of a trip, containing at least reading year
Records of traveled distances from tracking systems
Mapping of the traveled route online with common platforms such as Google Maps, including start and end locations of the trip per segment
Weight of transported material per segment*
tonnes
Difference between loaded and unloaded vehicle weight
Bills of lading or delivery notes with weight details
Official reports from quality control or inspection services documenting the weight
Transport unit category**
Trucks:
Light (<7.5t)
Medium (7.5t-32t)
Heavy (>32t)
Ships:
ferry (short distance sea transport)
container ship
bulk carrier for dry goods
tanker for
Transport unit documents
Transport unit photo (showing the car license plate)
Transport unit certificates or other official documents containing the transport unit weight with maximum load capacity
Next step after transport segment **
Description
Detail of the next step after completing a transport segment (e.g. whether the truck returns to the original location empty, carries goods for another client on the return trip, or will be involved in a subsequent transport segment).
Light
28
Medium
30
Heavy
89
Ferry
50
Container ship
70
Bulk carrier for dry goods
53
Tanker for
54
Diesel - 100% mineral
3.16
0.00001167
0.000148
3.20
Biodiesel
NA
-
-
0.19
Bioethanol
NA
-
-
0.0114
Heavy Fuel Oil (HFO)
3.11
0.0000473
0.000148
3.15
Diesel upstream emissions
market group for diesel, low-sulfur | diesel, low-sulfur | Cutoff, U, RER
Ethanol upstream emissions
ethanol, from fermentation, to market for ethanol, vehicle grade | ethanol, from fermentation, to market for ethanol, vehicle grade | Cutoff, U, RoW
Natural gas upstream emissions
market for natural gas, high pressure | natural gas, high pressure | Cutoff, U, RoW
Heavy Fuel Oil upstream emissions
market for heavy fuel oil l market for heavy fuel oil l Cutoff, U, RoW
Grid electricity
market group for electricity, medium voltage | electricity, medium voltage | Cutoff, U, RER
Solar electricity*
market for electricity, low voltage, renewable energy products | electricity, low voltage, renewable | Cutoff, U, CH
Truck Transport - light
transport, freight, lorry 3.5-7.5 metric ton, EURO5 | transport, freight, lorry 3.5-7.5 metric ton, EURO5 | Cutoff, U, RER
Truck Transport - medium
transport, freight, lorry 7.5-16 metric ton, EURO5 | transport, freight, lorry 7.5-16 metric ton, EURO5 | Cutoff, U, RER
Truck Transport - medium
transport, freight, lorry 16-32 metric ton, EURO5 | transport, freight, lorry 16-32 metric ton, EURO5 | Cutoff, U, RER
Truck Transport - heavy
transport, freight, lorry >32 metric ton, EURO5 | transport, freight, lorry >32 metric ton, EURO5 | Cutoff, U, RER
Ship Transport - ferry
transport, freight, sea, ferry | transport, freight, sea, ferry | Cutoff, U, GLO
Ship Transport - container ship
transport, freight, sea, container ship | transport, freight, sea, container ship | Cutoff, U, GLO
Ship Transport - bulk carrier for dry goods
transport, freight, sea, bulk carrier for dry goods | transport, freight, sea, bulk carrier for dry goods | Cutoff, U, GLO
Ship Transport - tanker for liquid goods other than petroleum and liquefied natural gas
transport, freight, sea, tanker for liquid goods other than petroleum and liquefied natural gas | transport, freight, sea, tanker for liquid goods other than petroleum and liquefied natural gas | Cutoff, U, GLO
Europe average
5.9
Austria
6.3
Belgium
5.7
Bulgaria
6
France
9.2
Hungary
0.2
Latvia
6.5
Lithuania
6.2
Poland
5.2
Romania
6.5
Slovenia
6.9
Parameter
Unit
Source proof
Amount and type of feedstock used*
tonne of fresh matter
Track records from the biogas site
Average weighted distance for transporting each feedstock type from its source until the biogas site
km
Track records from the biogas site; map with the two points location and distance
Average number of days manure and slurry are kept stored, if applicable (optional)
Days
Estimate
On-site electricity consumption during the reference year*
kWh/year
Electricity bills
The external volume of the site's main digester
m³
Licensing or design official document containing this parameter
Biomethane injected into the grid
m³ and GWh
Gas grid injection receipts
Digestate covered during storage
Percent
Any official document containing this parameter or estimates based on the volume of each storage facility
Repartition of solid, liquid and raw digestate stored and spread*
Percent
Records of digestate sales plus description of if/how digestate is separated
Whether leaks are recovered and recirculated during purification
Yes/No
Any official document containing this parameter
Efficiency of purification process (optional)
Percent of methane released with offgas
Machinery technical specifications
Average number of days that feedstock spends in the digester (residence time)
Days
Any official document containing this parameter or estimates
Nitrogen (total N), potassium (K2O) and phosphorus (P2O5) content in the digestate, per digestate type
kg/tonne of material
Official laboratory tests
Average distance that digestate is transported by road transport, per digestate type
km
Track records from the biogas site; map with the two points location and distance
Fresh matter as nitrogen (%)
-
Dry matter in manure (%)
-
24
-Dry matter as nitrogen (%)
-
2.7
Nitrogen lost as N2O per 180 days of storage (%)
2
2
Rate of N2O released from manure spreading (kgN2O/t of manure spread)
0.177
0.177
86
51
Methane emissions during storage (as % of BMP)
1.5
1.5
Dry matter in slurry (%)
4.27
Dry matter as nitrogen (%)
7.11
Nitrogen lost as N2O per 180 days of storage (%)
0.08
Rate of N2O released from slurry spreading (kgN2O/t of manure spread)
0.057
19
Methane emissions during storage (as % of BMP)
36
Process
Leak rate as percent of methane produced
Digestion
0.5% biogas produced leaked by volume
0.28%
page 36
Boiler leakage
0.25% internally used methane by volume leaked from the boiler
0.0055%
page 35, assuming 4% biogas produced used internally
Purification of gas
Project data, or
default value of 0.7%, or
0%
of methane produced by volume
0.7%
page 38
Injection
0.1% input biomethane leaked by volume
0.097%
page 76
Distribution
0.13% input biomethane leaked by volume
0.126%
Table 52
Sum
1.20%
Lower heating value (LHV) (MJ/m³)
22.
Methane content (% volume)
Spreading
Raw, liquid, and solid
1
Storage
Raw
0.08
Storage
Liquid
0.08
Storage
Solid
2
Nitrogen (N)
2.19
1.67
Potassium (K2O)
12.7
2.05
Phosphorus (P2O5)
2.75
1.59
Chicken manure fresh matter as nitrogen (%)
Table 3
The rate of fresh matter as nitrogen contained in chicken manure was taken from a study conducted in 2015. There is low uncertainty in this data sample since chicken feed patterns are assumed to not have significantly changed.
Cow manure and slurry dry matter and nitrogen content
Table 3
These values come from Table 18. Their source was internal expertise and databases from the French National Institute for Research in Agronomics (INRAE), which is expected to have high quality data for these values that are relatively simple to measure. That study underwent critical review. Uncertainty is low.
Nitrogen lost as N2O during manure and slurry storage (%)
Table 3, Table 6
These values come from , Table 34 and 37. Their source was . These are estimated to be reputable scientific sources, but due to the sensitivity of this value, it is estimated to have moderate uncertainty.
Rate of N2O released from manure and slurry spreading (kgN2O/t of manure)
Table 3
These values come from, Tables 35 and 38 and were calculated in the study. This is estimated to be a reputable scientific source, but due to the sensitivity of this value, it is estimated to have moderate uncertainty.
Nitrogen lost as N2O during digestate, storage (%)
Table 6
These values come from, Table 18. Their source was . These are estimated to be reputable scientific sources, but due to the sensitivity of this value, it is estimated to have moderate uncertainty.
Nitrogen lost as N2O during digestate, spreading (%)
Table 6
This value comes from the . Although it is a reputable source, the value taken is a highly generalized global average and actually depends on soil and climatic factors. It is estimated to have moderate uncertainty.
Lower heating value of biogas and biomethane (MJ/m³)
Table 5
These characteristics come from the ecoinvent database and International Energy Agency, both of which are reliable sources. Biomethane LHV has low uncertainty since it is a consistent value, but biogas LHV has high uncertainty since the gas content, and therefore energy content, of biogas is variable.
Density (kg/m³)
Equation 4, 12 and 22
Methane density was obtained from a textbook on anaerobic digestion, and has low uncertainty.
Methane content (% volume)
Table 5
Methane percentages in biogas and biomethane were taken from the European Biogas Association. Biomethane has low uncertainty since it is a consistent value, but biogas has high uncertainty since its composition is variable.
Biomethane combustion N2O and CH4 emission rates
Paragraph 3.5.2.7
These values come from , Table 53, and results are not sensitive to them. They are estimated to have low uncertainties.
Leakage rates in the digestion, purification, boiler, injection and distribution process (%)
Table 4
These values come from There is high uncertainty in this data sample. Even though the study is recent and uses reliable data, leakages depend on project-specific factors such as the site design and age. Projects certified under Riverse's biogas methodology are considerably new (built after 2018), which justifies adopting the values for recently built sites from the data sample.
Manure and slurry avoided fertilizer (kg/tonne)
Table 7
The amount of N, K2O, and P2O5 avoided fertilizer per tonne of manure and slurry used in the baseline scenario was taken from the , Tables 35 and 38. There is low uncertainty in these data samples.
Baseline grid gas mix
Paragraph 3.6.1.4
In the baseline scenario, the mix of gasses for energy production is taken from national gas grid market shares from the Eurostat database. These data are estimated to have moderate uncertainty, because the most recent data available are from 2022, and because of inherent uncertainty and compatibility issues inherent in such macro, national data.
A conservative, default estimate of high uncertainty is used for these parameters because they are taken directly from EPDs, which typically do not provide information on uncertainty. Project Developers may provide information to justify lower uncertainty here.
This parameter should be known and measured for each project, so the uncertainty is low.
The uncertainty is low because this is a basic conversion based on the size of the product.
This parameter has no uncertainty because it is defined by the Project Developer for the purpose of the GHG reduction quantification.
Symbol
Definition by the MCI
Guidelines for the project scenario
Guidelines for the baseline scenario
Mass of a product
Total mass (kg) of second life batteries in the project scenario.
Consider the same guidelines as for the baseline scenario
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from recycled sources
Assumed zero
Assumed zero
Fraction of mass of a product's feedstock from reused sources
Assumed zero
Fraction of a product's biological feedstock from Sustained production.
It is assumed that no biological feedstock is used in batteries.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Material that is not from reuse, recycling or biological material from sustained production.
The amount of virgin materials used in the project scenario is the same as the Np when virgin material shall be extracted to produce new pieces.
All the input materials are considered virgin as no reuse or recycled materials are assumed in a status quo scenario.
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a recycling process
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product going into component reuse
Fraction considered under the Cr variable, according to the baseline's rates.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product being collected to go into a composting process
As no biological feedstock is used in batteries, this value is assumed to be zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Fraction of mass of a product being collected for energy recovery where the material satisfies the requirements for inclusion
Energy recovery as part of a circular strategy only applies to biological materials, according to the MCI methodology. This value is assumed to be zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste through a product's material going into landfill, waste to energy and any other type of process where the materials are no longer recoverable
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Efficiency of the recycling process used for the portion of a product collected for recycling
According to the EU Regulation for batteries, recycling efficiencies are determined based on their chemical composition rather than their usage category:
Li-ion: 65%
Pb-acid: 75%
NiMH (other): 50%
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated in the process of recycling parts of a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Efficiency of the recycling process used to produce recycled feedstock for a product
Assumed equal to Ec as no data are available specifically for batteries. Additionally, since Fr is considered zero, this variable is not impactful.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste generated when producing recycled feedstock for a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology, and considering Fr equal to zero, this value is zero.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Mass of unrecoverable waste associated with a product
Following the MCI calculation methodology and Riverse's guidelines, this value is the same for both scenarios. Due to the comparative approach, it can be excluded.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Linear flow index
Varies from 0 to 1, where 1 is a completely linear flow and 0 is a completely restorative flow. In a circular project, the LFI shall be closer to zero, while the baseline shall be closer to 1.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Actual average lifetime of a product
Assumed 1
Average lifetime of an industry-average product of the same type
Assumed 1
achieved during the use phase of a product
Calculated based on the extended lifetime of the project's product.
Assumed 1
Average number of functional units achieved during the use phase of an industry-average product of the same type
Assumed 1
Assumed 1
Utility of a product (function of the product's lifespan and intensity of use)
Equal to 1 as the baseline scenario regards the status quo market (average industry scenario).
Material Circularity Indicator of a product
Varies from 0 to 1, where 0 represents a fully linear product and 1 is fully circular.
Consider the same guidelines as for the project scenario
Marine water
Must be in coastal, sea or ocean waters with a salinity greater than zero. Freshwater burial is not currently eligible.
Anoxic Sediment Layer
The depth must remain anoxic year-round, accounting for bioturbation or increased advection/diffusion into sediments. The sub-sediment area must be stable with low likelihood of re-exposure, proven via established tools for determining sediment stability such as 210Pb or other geochronology tools.
Water depth
Must ensure the surface of the water bottom (seafloor or sediment surface) is not exposed to the air during tidal fluctuations.
Methane diffusion
Potential gas exchange
Project Developers shall use all criteria mentioned above to calculate potential gas exchange from embedded depth into the atmosphere, to justify that there will be minimal gas exchange of any evolved gases with the atmosphere during a 1000 year period.
Shelf slope
Sediment or seafloor gradation must be <1:100 to prevent sediment .
Sediment grain size
At the target sub-sediment depth, grain size must be at minimum 50% of at maximum 2 mm particle size.
Authorization and access
Project Developers must be authorized by jurisdictional authorities to operate, perform burial events and complete monitoring at the given geographic coordinates.
Potential for Future Disturbance
This shall be qualitatively and transparently discussed in the Site Characterization Report to determine if sediment disturbance may occur in the next 40 years, due to deep-sea mining, oil and gas extraction, trawling from fishing vessels, other resource exploitation, or any other use-conflict that might lead to reversal of storage. The site lease agreement should implement suitable barriers to such disturbance events.
Marine life
Characterize the biodiversity of marine life at the storage site, considering species type and abundance. This is used to 1) identify any sensitive biodiversity hotspots and 2) as a benchmark to compare identify any environmental damages after post-burial. Jurisdictional permitting and Environmental Impact Assessment procedures should already cover this, so this is implemented as an abundance of caution.
Sediment grain size
mm
primary data from a pilot survey of the site
secondary data from the specific area concerned (e.g. published peer-reviewed literature or database measurements)
secondary data from an area that is proven to be sufficiently representative and similar to the project area in the appropriate factors that relate to permanent storage
Sub-sediment depth (X)
m
Same as above
Volume of feedstock mixture buried per storage batch*
Equipment logs on machinery delivering the burial
Organic carbon content of feedstock mixture *
% organic carbon
Reported in the Feedstock Characterization Report for each storage batch
Moisture content of feedstock mixture*
fraction
Same as above
Density of feedstock mixture*
Same as above
Fractional pools of complex organic carbon
Project Developers may choose between three sources for these values:
project incubation experiments with the feedstock mixture in representative marine sub-sediments.
in situ experiments with the biomass feedstock mixture in representative marine sediments.
Rate constants
Same options as above.
Volume of feedstock mixture buried per storage batch
Each burial event
Organic carbon content of feedstock mixture
Moisture content of feedstock mixture
Density of feedstock mixture
Visual proof of burial (e.g. photos or video taken during the burial event)
To confirm that the storage site is closed.
Each burial event
To detect microbial activity that might indicate increased environmental risk, even without %OC changes
Each storage batch, 12 months after burial
Dissolved sulfate in the sediment porewaters
To determine that the depth of storage has > 1 Mm of sulfate for organic carbon degradation to proceed using sulfate as an electron acceptor
Each storage batch, 12 months after burial
Methane (if dissolved sulfate is not measurable)
To assess methane production, which would indicate the use of methanogenesis rather than sulfate reduction
Each storage batch, 12 months after burial, if dissolved sulfate is not measurable
Location
Water Depth
Scour Depth (cm)
Width (m)
Reference
Central CA, USA
30-70
5-500
Onslow Bay, NC, USA
0-20
20
Rio Balsas, Mexico
0-30
50-100
Middle Atlantic Bight, USA
5-30
10-100
Southern Rhode Island, USA
0-10
50
Port Clarence, AK, USA
4-15
10-500
Southampton
1-12
10-60
100-300
California Coast, CA, USA
0-100
40-100
Shinnecock Inslet, NY, USA
3-9
50
30
Gray's Harbor, WA, USA
10-16
100
10-90
Humboldt Bay, CA, USA
16-36
100
Rhone Island Sound, RI, USA
0-42
50-80
Malin Shelf, Ireland
80-120
50-100
100
Drowned Forest, AL, USA
20
100
Dauphin Island, AL, USA
60
30-36
Innisfail, QLD, AUS
28-35
15
40-150
York River, VA, USA
5-100
Copper Harbon, MI, USA
100
50
3-5
English Channel, UK
50-200
10-20
Western Sahara
100
20
New Jersey, USA
100-150
5-15
Los Angeles, CA, USA
100-200
15-50
Mississippi, USA
100-200
5-10
Bolivar Peninsula, TX, USA
3.5
100
Fire Island, NY, USA
5-30
100
Barataria Bight, LA, USA
10-40
2-15
Fuel quantity consumed per transport segment*
Kg or kWh
Measurements from the transport unit (e.g. vehicle flow sensors)
Measurements from tracking systems
Values reported by on-board transport unit diagnostic systems (OBD)
Purchase receipts of fuel plus local fuel cost per unit
Fuel type* and geography**
Data from tracking systems
Fuel purchase receipts, showing the fuel type and location of purchase.
Photographic evidence
Number of trips per transport segment*
Unit
Number of trips each transport segment is repeated during the reporting period (e.g. 10 trips from A to B and 8 trips from C to D)
Transport unit category**
Trucks:
Light (<7.5t)
Medium (7.5t-32t)
Heavy (>32t)
Ships:
ferry (short distance sea transport)
container ship
bulk carrier for dry goods
tanker for
Transport unit documents
Transport unit photo (showing the car license plate)
Transport unit certificates or other official documents containing the transport unit weight with maximum load capacity (proven with the parameter "weight of the loaded and unloaded vehicle")
Next step after transport segment **
Description
Detail of the next step after completing a transport segment (e.g. whether the truck returns to the original location empty, carries goods for another client on the return trip, or will be involved in a subsequent transport segment).
Fuel consumption efficiency*
kg/km or kWh/km
Telematics Data
OBD Data: Real-time vehicle diagnostics.
Reports from fleet management tools.
Fuel type* and geography**
Data from tracking systems
Fuel purchase receipts, showing the fuel type and location of purchase.
Photographic evidence
Number of trips per transport segment*
Unit
Number of trips each transport segment is repeated during the reporting period (e.g. 10 trips from A to B and 8 trips from C to D)
Transport unit category**
Trucks:
Light (<7.5t)
Medium (7.5t-32t)
Heavy (>32t)
Ships:
ferry (short distance sea transport)
container ship
bulk carrier for dry goods
tanker for
Transport unit documents
Transport unit photo (showing the car license plate)
Transport unit certificates or other official documents containing the transport unit weight with maximum load capacity
Next step after transport segment **
Description
Detail of the next step after completing a transport segment (e.g. whether the truck returns to the original location empty, carries goods for another client on the return trip, or will be involved in a subsequent transport segment).
Template for the Conflict of Interest (COI) policy signed by Riverse Standard and Riverse Ecosystem members subject to COI, to ensure all new members respect Riverse’s independence
Terms of Reference for the Riverse Technical Advisory Committee
This page contains the archived versions of the Refurbishing of electronic devices methodology for continuity, transparency, and traceability.
This page contains the archived versions of the Biobased construction materials methodology for continuity, transparency, and traceability.
December 2024
(Note that starting in V2.0, this methodology was moved under the BiCRS methodology.)
September 2023
New appendix with IT Security requirements
Terminology changes, reflected in the Glossary (notably discount factor and buffer pool)
August 2024
This version fully aligns with CORSIA and ICROA requirements. Notably through:
Revised additionality assessment requirements and templates
Revised permanence and reversal risks requirements and templates
Revised ESDNH requirements and templates
Alignment of GHG quantification with ISO14064-2:2019
May 2024
Restructure standard documentation to move all procedures to “Procedure Manual”
Revised Environmental and social do no harm assessment method
Baseline choice approach to be based on WBCSD
Introduction of new appendix on Ramp up effects
October 2023
Clarification of the text on multidecadal monitoring
Permanence risk assessment introduced
June 2023
Restructure all eligibility criteria under 14 distinct criteria
Added section on General LCA methodology
Introduction of Key Impact Indicators in verification mechanism
Revised rules of buffer and provision pool
May 2023
In-depth eligibility criteria and project requirements have been established, including Technology Readiness Level (TRL), Rebound effects, Leakage, and the "Do no harm" principle.
A new "provision fund" has been introduced.
Provided more a detailed procedure regarding Validation and Verification Body (VVB) audits.
September 2022
These represent the historical methodology used in the Riverse Standard. Projects that were initially certified under these earlier versions have undergone a re-evaluation to ensure they meet the criteria of the program's most current version.
May 2022
Terminology changes, reflected in the Glossary (notably discount factor and buffer pool). Clearer performance criteria for VVBs, including timeliness, accuracy, and communication metrics. Clarifications regarding compliance with updates to Riverse Standards or methodologies.
May 2024
P
More detailed/new procedures related to site registration, VVB protocols, site audits (remote and in-person), methodology creation/revision, RCC management section on provision pools, over/under achievement and reversal/cancelation
February 2024
The first version of the Riverse Procedures Manual lays out the foundational procedures. It resulted from restructuring and moving content out of the Riverse Standard Rules starting in V5.2.
October 2023
March 2024
November 2023
September 2023
June 2023
May 2023
April 2023
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Riverse’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
All risks with a high or very high risk score are subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Riverse’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
All risks with a high or very high risk score are subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Riverse’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
All risks with a high or very high risk score are subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Riverse’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
All risks with a high or very high risk score are subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Riverse’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
All risks with a high or very high risk score are subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Riverse’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
All risks with a high or very high risk score are subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Riverse’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
All risks with a high or very high risk score are subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Riverse’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
All risks with a high or very high risk score are subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score of each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The VVB and Riverse’s Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
All risks with a high or very high risk score are subject to a , which outlines how Project Developers will mitigate, monitor, report, and if necessary, compensate for any environmental and/or social harms.
Additional proof may be required for certain high risk environmental and social problems.
The Project Developer, the Riverse Certification team, or the VVB may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Where and are defined in in the section.
Considers the mass of second life batteries () and the mass of new components acquired (, in kg):
is the sum of new Battery materials as described in and (for Pb-acid batteries)
Value is based on the collection rates from the baseline scenario as presented in 3. After the end of the battery's first and second life, the product is assumed to follow the country's recycling rates where waste is generated.
Sum of the lifespan of the product's first and second life according to , using an average weighted across the battery types refurbished or regenerated by the project.
Average lifespan of the product's first life, weighted across all battery types refurbished or regenerated by the project as presented in .
In battery second life projects, X is higher in the project scenario, as the project extends the product's life ()
Must reach deep enough into the sub-sediment to reach the . This shall be at least 2 m into the sediment (see C for justification), but actual depth to achieve this varies by site and shall be justified for each project.
Methane must not be diffusing out of the sediment-water interface. This is measured using as a proxy for methane diffusion. This requirement is to ensure that if any buried feedstock mixture degrades, it would not be emitted as the stronger GHG methane, and would instead be emitted as CO. In any case, loss of organic carbon from the biomass would be detected.
This requirement ensures that if any buried feedstock mixture degrades, the CO generated will likely remain trapped in the sediment and remain stored, rather than through the water column into the atmosphere.
reported in the
m
Laboratory testing of
Measured per storage batch, and (1-3 months, and 12 months)
kg/m
and
(oxic biomass bale sinking experiment, values are 0.012, 0.091, 0.897 for each variable, respectively).
and
values are 0.04, 0.002, and 0 for each variable, respectively
To calculate
To calculate
Each storage batch: Day 1 and last day of burial, and 12 months post-burial (optional 1-3 months post-burial for )
To calculate
Each storage batch, Each storage batch: Day 1 and last day of burial, and 12 months post-burial (optional 1-3 months post-burial for )
To calculate
Each storage batch, Each storage batch: Day 1 and last day of burial, and 12 months post-burial (optional 1-3 months post-burial
Dissolved hydrogen sulfide (HS) in storage batch sediment porewaters at 1- and 12-month intervals
Category (see )
Category (see )
The Complaints and Appeals Policy ensures fair and transparent procedures for addressing grievances and contesting decisions related to carbon credit certification, fostering trust and accountability in the certification process.
A storage batch is all burial events of homogenous feedstock mixtures at one storage site over a maximum of 31 days.
A storage site is a group of similar storage points within 24 km of one another with similar site characteristics.
A storage point is the precise spot where a burial event occurs. Similar storage points may be grouped into a storage site.
Baseline scenario
The set of processes used to model the greenhouse gas emissions of what would happen without the project. Also called the reference scenario or business-as-usual scenario.
Buffer pool
A shared account of Riverse Carbon Credits that projects issuing removal Riverse Carbon Credits contribute to, used to compensate for carbon removal reversal.
Carbon avoidance
Avoiding greenhouse gas emissions that would have occurred without the project’s mitigation activity.
Carbon finance
The financial instruments and funding mechanisms resulting from the selling of carbon credits to support projects.
Carbon removal
Physically removing carbon from the atmosphere and storing it in biologic or geologic pools. Also called carbon sequestration.
Certification
The combined process of validation and verification of a project to issue Riverse Carbon Credits.
Commitment period
The duration over which carbon will be removed.
Crediting period
The duration over which a given project is eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits. Riverse limits the crediting period to a maximum of 5 years.
Discount factor
A percentage of verified Riverse Carbon Credits eliminated from each project and never issued. This acts as a safeguard against uncertainty in GHG reduction quantifications and overestimated carbon removal/avoidance.
Emission reduction
Decrease in greenhouse gas emissions between a baseline scenario and the project activity, including both removals and avoidance.
Ex-ante
Before the fact. Expected outcomes before the project mitigation activity has occurred. Provisional credits are based on ex-ante estimations.
Ex-post
After the fact. Actual outcomes after the project mitigation activity has occurred. All Riverse Carbon Credits are ex-post.
Global Warming Potential (GWP)
A measure of how much heat a greenhouse gas traps in the atmosphere over a specific time period, compared to carbon dioxide (CO₂). It is a relative measure of the impact of a greenhouse gas.
MCI
The Material Circularity Indicator (MCI), developed by the Ellen MacArthur Foundation, measures the extent to which a product's material flows are restorative.
Mitigation activity
The specific processes within a project that lead to carbon removal/avoidance.
Monitoring
Ongoing measurement of indicators to determine whether the project delivers the expected carbon removal/avoidance. Used for Riverse Carbon Credit verification.
Project
The mitigation activity/activities that are under consideration for issuance of Riverse Carbon Credits.
Project Developer
Entity responsible for executing the project, which should include a contact person plus company/organization name. The Project Developer may apply for Riverse Carbon Credits themselves (the default case), or designate a Registration Parter.
Project output
Products or services that the project generates.
Project scenario
The set of processes used to model the greenhouse gas emissions of the project, which must be functionally equivalent to the baseline scenario.
Provisional credit
The estimated Riverse Carbon Credits to be issued after operations occur and emission avoidance/removal is verified. The number of provisional credits is estimated ex-ante after the validation audit, and enables pre-purchase agreements.
Registration partner
An entity chosen by the Project Developer to apply for Reverse Carbon Credits and meet the Project Developer's obligations on their behalf.
Riverse Registry
The digital platform created by Riverse that tracks the issuance, purchases, and retirements of Riverse Carbon Credits.
Riverse Carbon Credit
1 tonne of CO2eq removed or avoided by a project’s mitigation activity.
Riverse Standard Documentation
The highest level of documentation that covers all projects and methodologies under the Riverse Standard. It includes the Riverse Standard Rules, the Procedures Manual, and other documents.
Validation
First evaluation to check if a project is eligible for Riverse Carbon Credits, and to estimate the expected number of provisional credits that will be issued.
Verification
Final evaluation of whether the expected carbon removal/avoidance occurred, based on ongoing monitoring. After verification, Riverse Carbon Credits are issued.
Auxiliary components
The individual non-electrochemical parts within a battery pack, including casings, connectors, and electronic control systems. It does not include Battery Units (BU) or Battery Management System (BMS).
The basic functional unit in a battery, composed of electrodes, electrolyte, container, terminals and, if applicable, separators, and containing the active materials the reaction of which generates electrical energy.
Battery marketplace
An online or physical platform for buying, selling, or trading batteries or battery-related services.
Electronic device that manages the electric and thermal functions of a battery to ensure the it’s safety, performance and service life; and manages the data for determining the battery’s state of health and expected lifetime.
Any set of battery cells that are connected or encapsulated within an outer casing to protect the cells against external impact. One module may be used alone or in combination with other modules.
Battery pack
The item encompassing all other components described here. It includes battery units (arranged in series, parallel, or both), and depending on the specific battery type, may include a BMS and various auxiliary components.
Battery recycling
The process of recovering used batteries to extract valuable materials (such as metals, plastics, and chemicals) and ensure that harmful substances are safely disposed of. Unlike refurbishing or regeneration, the recycled battery is no longer usable after the process.
Battery refurbishing
The mechanical process of replacing worn components, reconditioning structure, disassembly, cleaning, and testing. High-quality parts are reused for "second-life" batteries, extending lifespan for battery repurposing or returning to its original application.
Battery regeneration
The process of restoring battery performance by reversing chemical degradation, via e.g. deep discharging and recharging, or applying specific electrical pulses. It can also include electrolytes replacement (Pb-acid batteries). It improves battery's capacity and efficiency without replacing major components. The regenerated battery usually returns to its original application.
Battery repurposing
A form of battery second life, where the battery is used in a different application than its original purpose and its first life use.
Battery reuse
A form of battery second-life, where the battery is used in the same application as in its first life, that it was initially designed for.
Battery second life
Extended use of a battery after it can no longer perform its original application from its first life. This reduces environmental impact by delaying recycling or disposal, and replacing the need for new battery production.
Battery Unit (BU)
A single battery (lead-acid batteries) or cells and modules (li-ion and NiMH) that can store electrical energy and provide power.
EV battery
A battery designed specifically to power electric vehicles (EVs), typically using lithium-ion and NiMH chemistry.
Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR)
A policy approach that holds manufacturers responsible for the entire lifecycle of their products, especially waste management.
Energy storage system (ESS)
A battery capable of storing energy in order to supply electrical energy at a later time.
Industrial battery
Batteries that are used in off-highway electric vehicles such as forklifts, construction equipment such as scissor lifts, excavators, and agricultural machinery.
Li-ion
Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery is a type of rechargeable battery that relies on lithium ions moving between a graphite anode and a lithium metal oxide cathode during charge and discharge cycles.
LMT
Batteries used in Light Means of Transport (LMT) such as e-bikes and e-scooters. Usually using Li-ion and NiMH battery chemistries.
NiMH
A battery Nickel Metal Hydrade (NiMH) battery is a type of rechargeable battery that uses a nickel oxide hydroxide cathode and a hydrogen-absorbing alloy anode.
Pb-acid
Lead-acid (Pb-acid) battery is a type of rechargeable battery that uses lead dioxide as the cathode, sponge lead as the anode, and a sulfuric acid solution as the electrolyte.
Preparation for reuse
Inspecting, testing, and preparing battery units, auxiliary components and packs to be reused in their original function without significant alterations
Preparation for repurpose
Inspecting, testing, and preparing battery units, auxiliary components and packs to be repurposed and used for a different function (e.g. an EV battery repurposed to an ESS).
PRO
A Producer Responsibility Organization (PRO) is an organization or company responsible for ensuring that producers meet their environmental obligations under EPR frameworks.
SLI
Starting, Lighting, and Ignition (SLI) batteries are a specific type of lead-acid battery used in vehicles to power ignition, lights, and electronic accessories.
SoH
The State of Health (SoH) represents a battery's condition and energy capacity compared to its original state. Expressed as a percentage, 100% indicates perfect condition, while lower values show degradation due to factors like age and use. SoH helps evaluate a battery's performance, and is a factor in determining remaining battery lifetime.
Bioenergy
Renewable energy derived from organic materials, such as plant and animal waste, agricultural crops, and forestry residues, that are converted into heat, electricity, or fuels through processes like combustion, gasification, or fermentation
BECCS
BECCS (Bioenergy with Carbon Capture and Storage) is a carbon mitigation technology that combines the use of bioenergy (from biomass) with carbon capture and storage (CCS) to remove and store carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions from the atmosphere
Biochar
material that is rich in stable carbon, produced through the thermal conversion of biomass in a low-oxygen environment
Delivery Risk
The potential risk that a project will not be able to deliver the anticipated results, such as the projected amount of biochar or carbon sequestration benefits.
End use application
The way biochar will be used, such as direct application to soil, mixing with compost and application of the mix to soil, mixing with cement for use in concrete.
End use point
The step in the production chain where biochar leaves the direct control of biochar producers, where it is assumed to be incorporated into its final end use application.
Embodied Transport Emissions
GHG emissions associated with the production, maintenance, and operation of transportation infrastructure and vehicles across all modes of transport (e.g., road, sea).
Feedstock
The organic material used as the raw input for biochar production, such as wood, agricultural residues, or manure.
Gasification
high-temperature process that involves the partial oxidation of organic materials in the presence of a controlled amount of oxygen (or air) and a gasification agent
GVW
Gross Vehicle Weight is the total weight of a vehicle, including its own weight plus the weight of any cargo
Loading rate
Ratio of actual load to the full load or capacity (e.g. mass or volume) that a vehicle carries per trip.
Molar H/Corg ratio
The ratio of hydrogen to organic carbon atoms in biochar, used to assess the stability and quality of biochar; lower ratios indicate higher stability.
Permanence horizon
Sequestration horizon, commitment period
Production batch
Biochar produced under the same conditions regarding production temperature and feedstock mix. A production batch has a maximum validity of 365 days.
Production batch ID
A unique identifier for each production batch.
Pyrolysis
thermal decomposition process that occurs in the absence of oxygen
Random reflectance
A measure of the reflectivity of biochar under a microscope, indicating the degree of carbonization, inertinite characteristics and permanence of the biochar.
Segment
Part of the transportation process involving the movement of inputs or products between point A and point B within the project boundary.
Transport segment
One shipment of a fixed amount of material from a known location A to a known location B. It represents a one-way trip.
Transport Unit
A general term used to describe any vehicle, vessel, or mode of transportation used to move goods or passengers from one location to another. In this module version, this includes trucks and ships.
Transport type/ mode of transport
Type of transport. E.g. by land (truck, rail, pipe), by water (boat, ferry), by air (airplane). This module's first version focuses on road and sea transport type.
Verification period
The time period of project activities that a given verification audit and carbon credit issuance covers. For biochar application to soils, this may be one calendar year, or the duration of validity of one production batch.
Anoxic
The absence of oxygen. In marine sediments, anoxic layers contain no detectable oxygen, as the rate of oxygen diffusion into these layers is slower than its consumption. In these conditions, microbial activity and organic matter degradation occur at significantly slower rates compared to oxic environments.
Burial event
The act of burying feedstock mixture into the storage point.
Feedstock
The organic material used as the raw input for sub-sediment storage, such as wood, agricultural residues, or manure.
Feedstock mixture
The specific biomass feedstock composition (e.g. corn husks, rice straw) and state (e.g. shredded, emulsified, mixed into a slurry) used in the sub-sediment storage.
Marine sediments
Deposits of insoluble material that have built up on the seafloor, primarily rock and soil particles, and remains of marine and terrestrial biomass. Sediments have pore space that is filled with marine water, and exchange can occur with the marine water in sediments and the overlying water column via diffusion.
Sub-sediment
A layer of sediment that is not exposed to the overlying water column, does not hold multicellular life and does not experience re-suspension. There is no exchange with marine water and the overlying water column.
Storage batch
All burial events of homogenous feedstock mixtures at one storage site over a maximum of 31 days. Data shall be monitored and reported at the storage batch level, and multiple storage batches can be grouped and analyzed together for one project.
Storage site
A group of similar storage points within 24 km of one another with similar site characteristics.
Storage point
The precise spot where a burial event occurs. Similar storage points may be grouped into a storage site.
Biogas
A mixture of gasses produced by the anaerobic digestion of organic matter, primarily composed of biogenic methane and carbon dioxide. It can be used directly as a renewable energy source, or can be purified to biomethane.
Biogenic methane
Methane produced from the decomposition of organic matter, as opposed to methane derived from fossil fuels. It has a slightly lower global warming potential than fossil-based methane.
Biomethane
Methane that has been purified from biogas to meet quality standards for natural gas. It can be used for heating, electricity generation, or as vehicle fuel.
Dedicated crop
Crops specifically grown for use as feedstock in energy production, such as maize or sorghum, as opposed to crops grown for food or other purposes. They are cultivated during the main growing season and harvested at maturity.
Digestate
The nutrient-rich residue left after the anaerobic digestion of organic feedstock, which can be used as a fertilizer or soil conditioner.
Energy cover crop
Crops like clover or rye that are grown during the off-season for use as biogas feedstock. They prevent soil erosion and are harvested for energy production, unlike traditional cover crops, which are mixed into the soil.
Feedstock
Organic materials used as inputs in the production of biogas through anaerobic digestion, such as agricultural residues, food waste, or manure.
Methane
A colorless, odorless flammable gas (CH₄) that is the main component of natural gas and biogas. It is a potent greenhouse gas when released into the atmosphere.
Nitrous oxide
A potent greenhouse gas (N₂O) occasionally emitted during anaerobic digestion, especially with high-nitrogen feedstock. It has a much higher global warming potential than carbon dioxide.
Biobased construction material
Materials derived from biomass that are used in construction and other applications
Biogenic carbon
Carbon from organic matter that can be sequestered and stored in biobased products during their production, and released back into the atmosphere if they are incinerated or decayed. It is considered part of the short, natural carbon cycle, as opposed to fossil based carbon
Biomass
The biodegradable fraction of materials from biogenic origin, such as trees, plants, and agricultural and urban waste
Carbon storage duration
The number of years that biogenic carbon will be stored in a construction material. This corresponds to the reference service lifetime for the material’s first use, plus extended storage periods from reuse, recycling, or landfilling
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD)
A standardized and independently verified document that communicates the environmental performance of a product, including construction materials, based on a life cycle assessment
Reference service lifetime
The expected or predefined period of use for a product or construction material, measured in number of years. Used for assessing its environmental impact over its life cycle
Modules A-D
Components and terminology of an environmental assessment under EN 15804, outlining the stages of a life cycle assessment for construction materials. They encompass (A) Production, (B) Construction/Installation, (C) Use, and (D) End of Life
Project biobased material
The biobased material from the project that is subject to removal and/or avoidance Riverse Carbon Credit issuance. Its production/use is the mitigation activity for this methodology.
How to use this module
BiCRS Methodology
BiCRS methodology
Additionality
No double counting
Targets alignment
ESDNH
Other modules
Substitution
Co-benefits
No double counting
ESDNH
Leakage
Riverse Standard Rules
Measurability
Real
TRL
Minimum impact
How to use this module
BiCRS Methodology
BiCRS methodology
Additionality
No double counting
Targets alignment
Other modules
Permanence
Substitution
Co-benefits
No double counting
ESDNH
Leakage
Riverse Standard Rules
Measurability
Real
TRL
Minimum impact
How to use this module
BiCRS Methodology
BiCRS methodology
Additionality
No double counting
Targets alignment
ESDNH
Other modules
Permanence
Substitution
Co-benefits
No double counting
ESDNH
Leakage
Riverse Standard Rules
Measurability
Real
TRL
Minimum impact
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Riverse Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The Project Developer, Riverse Certification team, or the third-party auditor may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each reversal risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal, or
additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal Riverse Carbon Credits for each high or very high risk
Project Developers shall assign a likelihood and severity score to each risk, and provide an explanation of their choices. The Riverse Certification team shall evaluate the assessment and may recommend changes to the assigned scores.
The Project Developer, Riverse Certification team, or the third-party auditor may suggest additional risks to be considered for a specific project.
Each reversal risk with a high or very risk score is subject to:
risk mitigation plan, developed by the Project Developer, that details the long-term strategies and investments for preventing, monitoring, reporting and compensating carbon removal reversal, or
additional contributions to the buffer pool, at a rate of 3% of verified removal Riverse Carbon Credits for each high or very high risk
The baseline scenario structure remains valid for the entire crediting period but may be significantly revised earlier if:
The Project Developer notifies Riverse of a substantial change in project operations or baseline conditions, and/or
The methodology is revised, affecting the baseline scenario.
The specific values within the baseline scenario will be updated annually, using project data to accurately reflect the equivalent of the project’s annual operations.
The baseline scenario structure remains valid for the entire crediting period but may be significantly revised earlier if:
The Project Developer notifies Riverse of a substantial change in project operations or baseline conditions, and/or
The methodology is revised, affecting the baseline scenario.
The specific values within the baseline scenario will be updated annually, using project data to accurately reflect the equivalent of the project’s annual operations.
The baseline scenario structure remains valid for the entire crediting period but may be significantly revised earlier if:
The Project Developer notifies Riverse of a substantial change in project operations or baseline conditions, and/or
The methodology is revised, affecting the baseline scenario.
The specific values within the baseline scenario will be updated annually, using project data to accurately reflect the equivalent of the project’s annual operations.
The baseline scenario structure remains valid for the entire crediting period but may be significantly revised earlier if:
The Project Developer notifies Riverse of a substantial change in project operations or baseline conditions, and/or
The methodology is revised, affecting the baseline scenario.
The specific values within the baseline scenario will be updated annually, using project data to accurately reflect the equivalent of the project’s annual operations.
Buyback
Buying used devices from consumers.
Device A
In this methodology, Device A refers to the first life of the refurbished device in the project scenario, and the waste device in the baseline scenario.
Device B
In this methodology, Device B refers to the refurbished device in the project scenario, and the new manufactured device in the baseline scenario.
Functioning device
A device that is successfully refurbished by the refurbishing project. It replaces a new manufactured device.
Non-functioning device
A device that is not successfully refurbished by the refurbishing project. It may be recycled, dismantled for spare parts to be used by the refurbisher, or sold for spare parts.
Refurbishing
The process of repairing and restoring used devices to good working order.
Residual value
The value (economic and lifetime) of a used device that is still remaining when it is sold and/or sent for refurbishing.
Scrap materials
Parts of used devices that are no longer functioning and are replaced by spare parts in the refurbishing process.
Small IT and telecommunication equipment
Sold devices
A functioning device that was successfully refurbished and sold functioning by the refurbishing project. It fully meets the market requirements and replaces a new manufactured device.
Spare parts
Functioning parts used in the refurbishing process to replace non-functioning parts, such as a battery or display. They may be new manufactured parts, or harvested from dismantled non-functioning devices.
WEEE
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment, also called e-waste
Terms of Reference for the Riverse Standard Advisory Board
June 2024
September 2023
May 2024
March 2024
October 2023
Registered
The project has completed and undergone with Riverse.
Project Developers are given access to the certification platform and the project is added to the registry.
The project may be already operating or may still be in the planning phase.
No credits have been estimated or issued.
Validated
The project is registered, and has completed and .
The PDD is completed on the Impact Certification Platform and validation audit is completed by the VVB.
The project may be already operating or may still be in the planning phase.
If the project is in the planning phase, may be estimated and made available on the registry for pre-purchase agreements.
If the project is operating, it may undergo validation and verification at the same time, and pass directly to "Credited" status.
Credited
The project is registered and validated, and has completed at least one round of .
A has been submitted and audited by a VVB.
The project must be operating.
Verified RCCs are issued and made available on the registry.
The project may retain this status for a maximum of 5 years, corresponding to the maximum 5-year crediting period length. After 5 years, the status changes back to Registered, and the project must undergo .
Registered
The project has completed and undergone with Riverse.
Project Developers are given access to the certification platform and the project is added to the registry.
The project may be already operating or may still be in the planning phase.
No credits have been estimated or issued.
Validated
The project is registered, and has completed and .
The PDD is completed on the Impact Certification Platform and validation audit is completed by the VVB.
The project may be already operating or may still be in the planning phase.
If the project is in the planning phase, may be estimated and made available on the registry for pre-purchase agreements.
If the project is operating, it may undergo validation and verification at the same time, and pass directly to "Credited" status.
Credited
The project is registered and validated, and has completed at least one round of .
A has been submitted and audited by a VVB.
The project must be operating.
Verified RCCs are issued and made available on the registry.
The project may retain this status for a maximum of 5 years, corresponding to the maximum 5-year crediting period length. After 5 years, the status changes back to Registered, and the project must undergo .
A category of electronic waste (e-waste) defined by the , composed of devices no larger than 50 cm external dimension, including mobile phones, GPS, routers, personal computers, and printers.
Application
Project Developer (PD) submits a Project Application (PA); the Certification team reviews it within 15 days.
Clarifications may be requested, and a refusal report is issued if the application is rejected. Approved applications proceed to registration.
Registration
PD signs Terms & Conditions and completes administrative setup, including Know Your Customer (KYC) requirements.
Project sites and any Registration Partner are formally documented.
Pre-Validation
PD submits data and proof to the Impact Certification Platform
Project Design Document (PDD) is generated, outlining project operations, GHG quantification, additionality, and Monitoring Plan.
Certification team reviews the PDD, possibly involving domain experts, and approves it before third-party validation.
Validation
VVB conducts a validation audit to confirm project adherence to Riverse Standard Rules and chosen methodology, involving the PD and Certification team as needed.
In parallel, PD conducts or provides evidence of a stakeholder consultation, open for 30 days on the Riverse Registry.
Monitoring and Verification
Key Impact Indicators (KIIs) are monitored regularly to track project impact and eligibility.
PD submits KIIs per the Monitoring Plan; prepares a Monitoring Report which subject to the verification audit by the VVB annually (or as per schedule) to verify GHG quantification and RCC issuance.
Continuous Issuance (Optional)
Eligible projects may choose more frequent issuance of provisional credits if they meet the data frequency and accuracy requirements
Provisional credits are converted to RCCs upon verification.
Compliance and Updates
Projects must stay compliant with Riverse Standard and methodology revisions and report major operational changes in the Monitoring Report.
VVB audits any revisions or changes, ensuring alignment with updated methodologies and standards.
Crediting Period Renewal
After a 5-year crediting period, the project must undergo a full revalidation, including a new PDD, validation audit, and stakeholder consultation to continue issuing credits.
Application
Project Developer (PD) submits a Project Application (PA); the Certification team reviews it within 15 days.
Clarifications may be requested, and a refusal report is issued if the application is rejected. Approved applications proceed to registration.
Registration
PD signs Terms & Conditions and completes administrative setup, including Know Your Customer (KYC) requirements.
Project sites and any Registration Partner are formally documented.
Pre-Validation
PD submits data and proof to the Impact Certification Platform
Project Design Document (PDD) is generated, outlining project operations, GHG quantification, additionality, and Monitoring Plan.
Certification team reviews the PDD, possibly involving domain experts, and approves it before third-party validation.
Validation
VVB conducts a validation audit to confirm project adherence to Riverse Standard Rules and chosen methodology, involving the PD and Certification team as needed.
In parallel, PD conducts or provides evidence of a stakeholder consultation, open for 30 days on the Riverse Registry.
Monitoring and Verification
Key Impact Indicators (KIIs) are monitored regularly to track project impact and eligibility.
PD submits KIIs per the Monitoring Plan; prepares a Monitoring Report which subject to the verification audit by the VVB annually (or as per schedule) to verify GHG quantification and RCC issuance.
Continuous Issuance (Optional)
Eligible projects may choose more frequent issuance of provisional credits if they meet the data frequency and accuracy requirements
Provisional credits are converted to RCCs upon verification.
Compliance and Updates
Projects must stay compliant with Riverse Standard and methodology revisions and report major operational changes in the Monitoring Report.
VVB audits any revisions or changes, ensuring alignment with updated methodologies and standards.
Crediting Period Renewal
After a 5-year crediting period, the project must undergo a full revalidation, including a new PDD, validation audit, and stakeholder consultation to continue issuing credits.